Black Box 4/BlackBox.cdr/os2/os2tip.arj/OS2TIPS.INF

OS/2 Help File | 1991-05-21 | 313.4 KB | 15,885 lines

ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1. PREFACE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

"Tips & Techniques" is an IPF document which contains information and "How
To's" on each of the following components:

 Compilers/Languages/Toolkit
 Communications Manager
 Database Manager
 Lan Manager
 OS/2 Base Operating System
 Presentation Manager

 The purpose of this product is to provide developers and system coordinators
 with information on OS/2 that is not readily available. It is geared for
 application development and/or system usage.

 This product is intended for the end-user, mainly a technically oriented
 person, not necessarily a programmer.  The information for the Tips have come
 from Support and the IBMPC Forums.  Each tip has been verified here in Austin.

  DISCLOSURE

 Any comments or suggestions may be directed to:

 Michell H. Pettes     PETTES @ AUSVM1,
 M. Kathleen O'Reilly   SC25545 @ AUSVM2, or
 L. Jim Akers       LJAKERS @ AUSVM1

 IBM may use or distribute whatever information you supply in any way it
 believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.

  How To View Tips


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DISCLOSURE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The information contained in this document has not been submitted to any formal
IBM test and is distributed on an "As Is" basis without any warranty either
expressed or implied.  The use of this information or the implementation of any
of these techniques is a customer responsibility and depends on the customer's
ability to evaluate and integrate them into the customer's operational
environment.  While each item may have been reviewed by IBM for accuracy in a
specific situation, there is no guarantee that the same or similar results will
be obtained elsewhere.  Customers attempting to adapt these techniques to their
own environment do so at their own risk.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> How To View Tips ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The tips are categorized by component and category.

For Example:  If you want to view tips concerning OS/2 Base System Install:

 o Click on the [+] symbol to the left of the "OS/2 BASE SYSTEM" component
   heading to receive a list of category headings.

 o Click on the [+] symbol to the left of the "INSTALL/REINSTALL" category
   heading to receive a list of tip description headings.

 o Select a tip description heading of interest to view the tip.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2. COMPILERS/LANGUAGES/TOOLKIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

C/2


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.1. C/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.1.1. Compile/Link Options to Improve Performance. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0000                          ENTERED BY: Tyger, Karen
 FILENAME: CLTZ0000.IPF             SOURCE:
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 12:58pm                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 When compiling a C/2 program, using this option might improve performance:

      cc   /Oalt

 This parameter has a format of "/Ostring".  Where the string can contain nine
 different optimization procedures. The string specified below is "alt".  The
 meanings of the letters contained in the string  are:

 Letter         Optimization Procedure
 a              Cancels all alias checking
 l              Enables loop optimization
 t              Favors run time during optimization

 Please refer to the IBM C/2 Version 1.10 Compile, Link, and Run publication
 page 2-40 and 2-55.

 When linking a C/2 application, using these options might improve performance:

      link /ALIGN:16 /PACKDATA /FAR

 The meanings of the parameters are:

 Option              Meaning
 /ALIGN:16           Align segments on 16 byte boundaries
 /PACKDATA           Pack neighboring logical data segments into one physical
                     segment
 /FAR                Optimize intrasegment far calls. **

 **This option will yield significant savings in medium and large model
 programs. However, it is possible that the optimizer will mistake a byte with
 a value of 0x9a as a far-call when, in fact, it is an assembled constant.  Be
 cautious when using this option.  See page 3-24 of Compile, Link, and Run
 publication.

 Again refer to the appropriate pages in Chapter 3 of the IBM C/2 Compile,
 Link, and Run publication.

 Please note that every application is different and these options should be
 taken as a suggestion only.  It is highly recommended to measure the
 performance of your application both before and after modifying your
 compile/link options. Then, based on that information, choose the best options
 to fit your performance requirements. REXX/2


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.2. REXX/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.2.1. Checking for a Directory IN REXX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0000                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen M.
 FILENAME: CLTX0000.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/15/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2+
 TIME: 1:18pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

  If you would like to check for the existence of a directory in REXX, there is
 a way.  The following code segment will take a directory name as an argument
 and say whether it was found or not:

  /* Program to Check for a Directory */
  '@ECHO OFF'
  /* First Read Args into New_Dir Variable */
  New_Dir = Arg(1)
  /* Use SETLOCAL because Directory will change the Current Directory */
  call setlocal
  Newdir=directory(New_Dir)
  If Newdir = New_Dir Then Do
          say 'Found Directory '||New_Dir
  /* Use ENDLOCAL to Restore Back to Previous Directory */
  /* In 1.2 GA, ENDLOCAL will NOT restore back to previous */
  /* directory; must set it back explicitly */
  call endlocal
  End
  Else
          say 'Not Found'


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.2.2. Checking/Setting ENV Variables in REXX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0001                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen M.
 FILENAME: CLTX0001.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/15/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2+
 TIME: 2:01pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

  There is a way to check and/or set the values of environmental variables
 (i.e. PATH, LIB, INCLUDE ) in REXX. The following code sample will first set
 an environment  variable, and then read back the new setting.

  /* PROGRAM TO CHECK WHAT ENVIRONMENTAL VARIABLES ARE */
  /* AM GOING TO SET THE VARIABLE FOOVAR TO THE VALUE IN NEWVAL */
  NEWVAL = "C:\JUNK\STUFF;"
  ENVNAME="FOOVAR"
  /* FIRST SET FOOVAR=C:\JUNK\STUFF */
  X = VALUE( ENVNAME,NEWVAL,"OS2ENVIRONMENT")
  SAY 'HAVE SET THE VARIABLE FOOVAR '
  /* NOW GET THE ENVIRONMENT VARIABLE FOOVAR */
  X = VALUE( ENVNAME,,"OS2ENVIRONMENT")
  SAY 'ENVIRONMENT VARIABLE FOOVAR = '|| X


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.2.3. Changing Colors in REXX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0002                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen M.
 FILENAME: CLTX0002.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/19/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2+
 TIME: 1:24pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

  If you would like to change the screen colors or the color of the text when
 executing a REXX program, you can use the ANSI color sequences to do it:

  /* PROGRAM TO DISPLAY TEXT WITH COLOR ATTRIBUTES */

  /* the following are the ANSI ESC sequences for screen colors */

  ESC = '1B'x
  C.NORMAL    = ESC || '[10m'
  /* these are to set foreground colors */
  C.FBLACK    = ESC || '[30m'
  C.FRED      = ESC || '[31m'
  C.FGREEN    = ESC || '[32m'
  C.FCYAN     = ESC || '[36m'
  C.FYELLOW   = ESC || '[33m'
  C.FBLUE     = ESC || '[34m'
  C.FMAGENTA  = ESC || '[35m'
  C.FWHITE    = ESC || '[37m'
  /* these are to set background colors */
  C.BBLACK    = ESC || '[40m'
  C.BRED      = ESC || '[41m'
  C.BGREEN    = ESC || '[42m'
  C.BCYAN     = ESC || '[46m'
  C.BYELLOW   = ESC || '[43m'
  C.BBLUE     = ESC || '[44m'
  C.BMAGENTA  = ESC || '[45m'
  C.BWHITE    = ESC || '[47m'
  C.BWHITE    = ESC || '[47m'

  SAY C.FRED
  SAY 'TO SET TO RED FOREGROUND USE:     1Bx [31m'
  SAY C.FGREEN
  SAY 'TO SET TO GREEN FOREGROUND USE:   1Bx [32m'
  SAY C.BYELLOW
  SAY 'TO SET TO YELLOW BACKGROUND USE:  1Bx [43m'
  SAY C.FWHITE
  SAY C.BBLACK
  SAY 'AND THEN SET BACK TO NORMAL :     1Bx [37m 1Bx [40m'
  EXIT


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.2.4. REXX Tokenization ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0003                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen M.
 FILENAME: CLTX0003.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/19/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2+
 TIME: 2:51pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

  The first time a REXX program is run,  a token is created and stored in the
 extended attributes of the file.  If you would like to specify that the REXX
 interpreter create a token,  you can specify the //t option when entering the
 REXX .cmd file to run.  Because an extended attribute is limited to 64K,  it
 is advisable to break up your program into smaller files,  otherwise your
 program will be tokenized every time,  and will run very slow. TOOLKIT


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.3. TOOLKIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.3.1. IPFC to Create .INF Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0000                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen M.
 FILENAME: CLTT0000.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/13/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2+
 TIME: 10:27am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

  IPFC (Information Presentation Facility Compiler) in the Toolkit contains an
 undocumented switch, /INF, that will convert .IPF files to .INF files which
 are viewable by the program VIEW.EXE, which is shipped with OS\2. This format
 is the same format as the On-line Command References.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.3.2. API to List all Running Sessions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0001                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen M.
 FILENAME: CLTT0001.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/15/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.1+
 TIME: 4:11pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

  There is an newly documented function in 1.2 called WinQuerySwitchList()
 which will return a structure that contains a list of all currently running
 sessions.  The function existed in 1.1; however, the parameters have changed.
 The structure and sample code to list all currently running sessions is listed below:

  Prototypes:

  OS/2 1.1:  USHORT WinQuerySwitchList(PSWBLOCK SwitchBlock,
             USHORT sizeofSwitchBlock);
  OS/2 1.2:  USHORT WinQuerySwitchList(HAB AnchorBlock,
             PSWBLOCK SwitchBlock, USHORT sizeofSwitchBlock);

 SWBLOCK Structure:

  typedef struct _SWCNTRL {     /* swctl              */
      HWND     hwnd;            /* window handle      */
      HWND     hwndIcon;        /* window handle icon */
      HPROGRAM hprog;           /* program handle     */
      USHORT   idProcess;       /* process id         */
      USHORT   idSession;       /* session id         */
      UCHAR    uchVisibility;   /* visiblity          */
      UCHAR    fbJump;          /* jump indicator     */
      CHAR     szSwtitle[MAXNAMEL+1];  /* program title */
      BYTE     fReserved;       /* To align on word boundary */
  } SWCNTRL;
  typedef SWCNTRL FAR *PSWCNTRL;

  typedef struct _SWENTRY {      /* swent */
      HSWITCH hswitch;           /* Switch list entry handle */
      SWCNTRL swctl;             /* Switch list control block structure */
  } SWENTRY;
  typedef SWENTRY FAR *PSWENTRY;

  typedef struct _SWBLOCK {       /* swblk */
      USHORT   cswentry;          /* Count of switch list entries */
      SWENTRY aswentry[48];       /* Switch list entries, 1 for each entry */
                                  /* specify 48 in WinQuerySwitchList()
                                     for safety, 48 is max sessions
                                     allowed */
  } SWBLOCK;
  typedef SWBLOCK FAR *PSWBLOCK;

 Program to list all running sessions:

  #define INCL_WIN
  #define INCL_WINSWITCHLIST

  #include <os2.h>
  #include <stdio.h>
  #include <string.h>

  // this structure is documented in the Programmers Reference:
  //     C/2 Bindings

  typedef struct _SWB {
     USHORT cswentry;
     SWENTRY aswentry[48]; // 48 is max number of sessions
  } SWB;
  SWB SwitchBlock;

  void main(void );

  void main(void )
  {

     USHORT usCount;         // number of items in list
     USHORT i;               // counter

     // this is the call to get the entries in the SwitchList
     //(Task List )
     usCount = WinQuerySwitchList( (HAB)0, (PSWBLOCK)&SwitchBlock,
        sizeof( SwitchBlock));
     // print them out with Session ID and titles
     for (i=0;i < usCount ;i++ ) {
        printf("\nItem #%2d  Session ID: %4d  Title: %s",
           i,
           SwitchBlock.aswentry[i].swctl.idSession,
           SwitchBlock.aswentry[i].swctl.szSwtitle );
     } /* endfor */
     return;

  }


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.3.3. Error in RC: EXEC of RCPP failed: ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0002                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen M.
 FILENAME: CLTT0002.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/15/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2+
 TIME: 4:14pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

  When using the Resource Compiler (RC.EXE) you may receive the following error:

    EXEC of RCPP failed: Invalid argument

 Check to may sure that the directory that contains the Resource Compiler is
 contained within the first 80 characters of your PATH statement.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.3.4. 1.2/1.3 Toolkit Compatibility ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0003                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen M.
 FILENAME: CLTT0003.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/18/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 2:59pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

  If you have an application that will be running on both OS/2 1.2 and 1.3, it
 is best if you stick with the 1.2 Toolkit.  You are likely to run into
 problems with an application compiled on 1.3's toolkit, running under 1.2.

  If you use the 1.3 toolkit to build a PM application the likelihood is that
 it will not run on 1.2 even if you do not use the new API calls available on 1.3.

  At least one reason for this is that within OS2.LIB the Help Manager API
 calls now point at PMWIN.DLL and not HELPMGR.DLL as in 1.2.  PMWIN.DLL now
 contains entry points for all the Help Manager API calls.  The 1.2 PMWIN.DLL
 does not contain these entries.

  PMWIN passes the calls to the real code which is still in HELPMGR.DLL. The
 reason for this change is one of performance.  Having a link to HELPMGR.DLL
 causes HELPMGR.DLL to be loaded when your application is loaded.  This
 increases load/startup time and working set by a significant amount.  Adding
 the indirection means it is easy to write an application which only
 links/loads to HELPMGR.DLL when the user requests help.  The down side is that
 applications linked in this way will not work with 1.2.

  There may be other changes that also cause 1.3 linked applications to not
 work on 1.2.  One simple change that could preserve backwards compatibility is
 to preserve the 1.2 version of OS2.LIB.  Applications that link successfully
 should then continue to run on 1.2.  However it should be obvious that if you
 do this you will not be able to use any of the new API available with 1.3.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.3.5. Multiple Selections in a Listbox ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0004                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen M.
 FILENAME: CLTT0004.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 03/04/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 12:43pm                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 MODIFIED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen M.                DATE: 03/08/91  TIME: 3:07pm

  In order to allow multiple selections from a listbox,  there are 2 things to
 consider:

  1. In the .RC file, make sure to include LS_MULTIPLESEL in listbox component.
  2.  In order to get selections,  use something similar to the following :

      /* send a message to the listbox to get the selection index */
      /* index will equal LIT_NONE when no selections are left    */
      /* index is corresponds to the order items were inserted in */
      /* listbox.  */
       case DID_OK:
           index = SHORT1FROMMR( WinSendDlgItemMsg( hwnd, LISTBOX,
              LM_QUERYSELECTION, MPFROMSHORT(LIT_FIRST), 0L ));
           while (index != LIT_NONE){
              ProcessIndex(index);
              index = SHORT1FROMMR( WinSendDlgItemMsg( hwnd, LISTBOX,
                  LM_QUERYSELECTION, MPFROMSHORT(index), 0L));
           }   /* end while */

       break;

   where:
       LISTBOX = Resource ID of Listbox component
       ProcessIndex() = user defined function


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.3.6. HORIZONTAL SCROLLING IN LISTBOX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0005                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen M.
 FILENAME: CLTT0005.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 03/04/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.1+
 TIME: 2:52pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

  If you would like to have a listbox that is scrollable horizontally, there
 are two steps to follow:

  1. In the .RC file specify LS_HORZSCROLL  for the listbox component
  2. In order to process the scrolling, PM must know the size of the text; so,
     insert the following code in your ListBoxProc():

     case WM_MEASUREITEM:
        /* first get the presentation space                       */
        hps = WinGetPS( hwnd);
        /* next get the coordinate rectangle surrounding the text */
        GpiQueryTextBox( hps, strlen(string), string, TXTBOX_COUNT,
            pointl );
        /* the difference between the two x's is the width        */
        x = pointl[TXTBOX_TOPRIGHT].x - pointl[TXTBOX_TOPLEFT].x;
        /* the difference between the two y's is the height       */
        y = pointl[TXTBOX_TOPRIGHT].y - pointl[TXTBOX_BOTTOMRIGHT].y;
        /* return the height and width                            */
        return  MPFROM2SHORT(x,y);

  where:

     POINTL pointl[5];
      /* TXTBOX_COUNT == 5L, so allocate 5 structures */
     static CHAR *string = "THIS IS THE LONGEST ITEM IN THE LISTBOX";


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.3.7. Functions Which Require a Msg Queue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0006                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen M.
 FILENAME: CLTT0006.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 Forums
 DATE: 03/06/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2+
 TIME: 5:14pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

  The following is a list of functions in which the existance of a message
 queue is required.  The documentation for the toolkit is wrong in some
 instances.

 WinAssociateHelpInstance                WinBeginEnumWindows
 WinBeginPaint                           WinCalcFrameRect
 WinCallMsgFilter                        WinCancelShutdown
 WinCatch                                WinCloseClipbrd
 WinCopyAccelTable                       WinCreateAccelTable
 WinCreateCursor                         WinCreateDlg
 WinCreateFrameControls                  WinCreateMenu
 WinCreatePointer                        WinCreatePointerIndirect
 WinCreateStdWindow                      WinCreateWindow
 WinDdeInitiate                          WinDdePostMsg
 WinDdeRespond                           WinDefDlgProc
 WinDefWindowProc                        WinDeleteLibrary
 WinDeleteProcedure                      WinDestroyAccelTable
 WinDestroyCursor                        WinDestroyMsgQueue
 WinDestroyPointer                       WinDestroyWindow
 WinDismissDlg                           WinDispatchMsg
 WinDlgBox                               WinDrawBorder
 WinEmptyClipbrd                         WinEnablePhysInput
 WinEnableWindow                         WinEnableWindowUpdate
 WinEndEnumWindows                       WinEndPaint
 WinEnumClipbrdFmts                      WinEnumDlgItem
 WinExcludeUpdateRegion                  WinFlashWindow
 WinFocusChange                          WinGetClipPS
 WinGetDlgMsg                            WinGetKeyState
 WinGetMinPosition                       WinGetMsg
 WinGetNextWindow                        WinGetPhysKeyState
 WinGetPS                                WinGetScreenPS
 WinInSendMsg                            WinInstStartApp
 WinInvalidateRect                       WinInvalidateRegion
 WinIsChild                              WinIsThreadActive
 WinIsWindowEnabled                      WinIsWindowShowing
 WinIsWindowVisible                      WinLoadAccelTable
 WinLoadDlg                              WinLoadLibrary
 WinLoadMenu                             WinLoadProcedure
 WinLockVisRegions                       WinLockWindow
 WinLockWindowUpdate                     WinMapDlgPoints
 WinMapWindowPoints                      WinMessageBox
 WinMsgMuxSemWait                        WinMsgSemWait
 WinMultWindowFromIDs                    WinOpenClipbrd
 WinOpenWindowDC                         WinPeekMsg
 WinProcessDlg                           WinQueryAccelTable
 WinQueryActiveWindow                    WinQueryAnchorBlock
 WinQueryCapture                         WinQueryClassInfo
 WinQueryClassName                       WinQueryClipbrdData
 WinQueryClipbrdFmtInfo                  WinQueryClipbrdOwner
 WinQueryClipbrdViewer                   WinQueryCp
 WinQueryCursorInfo                      WinQueryDesktopWindow
 WinQueryDlgItemShort                    WinQueryDlgItemText
 WinQueryDlgItemTextLength               WinQueryFocus
 WinQueryMsgPos                          WinQueryMsgTime
 WinQueryObjectWindow                    WinQueryPointer
 WinQueryPointerInfo                     WinQueryPointerPos
 WinQueryPresParam                       WinQueryQueueStatus
 WinQuerySysModalWindow                  WinQuerySysPointer
 WinQueryUpdateRect                      WinQueryUpdateRegion
 WinQueryWindow                          WinQueryWindowDC
 WinQueryWindowLockCount                 WinQueryWindowPos
 WinQueryWindowProcess                   WinQueryWindowPtr
 WinQueryWindowRect                      WinQueryWindowText
 WinQueryWindowTextLength                WinQueryWindowULong
 WinQueryWindowUShort                    WinRegisterClass
 WinRegisterUserDatatype                 WinRegisterUserMsg
 WinRegisterWindowDestroy                WinReleaseHook
 WinReleasePS                            WinRemovePresParam
 WinScrollWindow                         WinSendDlgItemMsg
 WinSendMsg                              WinSetAccelTable
 WinSetActiveWindow                      WinSetCapture
 WinSetClassMsgInterest                  WinSetClipbrdData
 WinSetClipbrdOwner                      WinSetClipbrdViewer
 WinSetCp                                WinSetDlgItemShort
 WinSetDlgItemText                       WinSetFocus
 WinSetHook                              WinSetMsgInterest
 WinSetMsgMode                           WinSetMultWindowPos
 WinSetOwner                             WinSetParent
 WinSetPointer                           WinSetPointerPos
 WinSetPresParam                         WinSetSynchroMode
 WinSetSysColors                         WinSetSysModalWindow
 WinSetWindowBits                        WinSetWindowPos
 WinSetWindowPtr                         WinSetWindowText
 WinSetWindowULong                       WinSetWindowUShort
 WinShowCursor                           WinShowPointer
 WinShowTrackRect                        WinShowWindow
 WinStartTimer                           WinStopTimer
 WinSubclassWindow                       WinSubstituteStrings
 WinTerminateApp                         WinThrow
 WinTrackRect                            WinTranslateAccel
 WinUpdateWindow                         WinValidateRect
 WinValidateRegion                       WinWaitMsg
 WinWindowFromDC                         WinWindowFromID
 WinWindowFromPoint


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.3.8. Using DosGetInfoSeg() ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0007                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen M.
 FILENAME: CLTT0007.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 Forums
 DATE: 03/12/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2+
 TIME: 1:11pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 There is a small trick to using the DosGetInfoSeg():

  You must use the macro MAKEPGINFOSEG or MAKEPLINFOSEG to make the pointer to
 access the structure that is returned.  The following bit of code illustrates.

  USHORT main( void)
  {

     USHORT    rc;
        // return code
     SEL      GlobalSeg;
        // Global Information Segment
     SEL      LocalSeg;
        // Local Information Segment
     GINFOSEG far *globptr;
        // ptr to global structure
     LINFOSEG far *localptr;
        // ptr to local structure

  // first get the information segment that has the current session
     rc = DosGetInfoSeg( &GlobalSeg, &LocalSeg );
  // now get the pointer to offset 0
     globptr = MAKEPGINFOSEG(GlobalSeg);
     localptr = MAKEPLINFOSEG(LocalSeg);
  // the _GINFOSEG structure is documented in BSEDOS.h
  // and return the current foreground session
     printf("Session ID = %d", localptr->sgCurrent);

     return localptr->sgCurrent;
  }
 MISCELLANEOUS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.4. MISCELLANEOUS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.4.1. OS/2 Programming Performance tips. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0000                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen M.
 FILENAME: CLTM0000.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 1:01pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 Build multi-segmented PM Applications. In particular, keep your main message
 processing loop tight and in a relatively small segment. Since this is going
 to be called very frequently, it will often need to be in memory, and if you
 are memory constrained, you don't want to have to shuffle a lot of segments
 around in order to load the segment back in. Infrequent messages that require
 a lot of code to process should be placed into subroutines and placed into a
 different code segment. Doing this will result in fewer and smaller code
 segments needing to be in memory in order to process the majority of messages
 flowing through the system, with less likelihood that the segments will need
 to be re-loaded, and faster re-loading when they have been discarded.

  Build multi-threaded PM applications. Use one thread to process the messages
 only. Use other threads for non-message processing and for long processing
 that can be moved out of the message processing thread. Also, avoid doing I/O
 on the message processing thread. The purpose here is to provide continuous,
 quick response to PM messages and to avoid tying up PM.

  Do not use DosMemAvail. In general, the data you get is invalid before you
 get it back. And it really does not tell you anything about the amount of free
 memory in the system. Therefore, do not use it to determine how much memory
 you should allocate for buffers, etc.

  Do not create and destroy threads on demand. If you need to dispatch threads
 for tasks, and then reuse them for other tasks, create a pool of threads and
 allocate them to the tasks needed when you need them. Create and destroy a few
 at a time, using a threshold management method to do so.

  Do not allow the linker to default pack your segments. Make a conscious
 effort to manage the packing of segments.

 -  Do not pack them one routine to a segment or one module to a segment.
 -  Pack interrelated routines together, to reduce segment jumping.
 -  Where the routines are not called from other segments, make them   near
 calls, rather than far. If the routines are externally   available, use
 Far-To_Near call optimization (this is the linker   default).
 -  Pack segments to 4K multiples (but keep just under, NOT OVER) . This   will
 not make a difference in OS\2 1.2, but will make a tremendous   difference in
 2.0.
 -  Place infrequently called routines into separate segments.  If you are
 managing your own resource, use DosGetResource2/DosFreeResource instead of
 DosGetResource. And pack your resources. This results in fewer segments being
 allocated.

  Minimize the number of DLL's. Each additional DLL causes:

 -  Additional system resources in fixed non-swappable memory needed   to
 describe the DLL, its segments and its IMPORTs and EXPORTs.
 -  Additional search time through system tables at load time. (The   tables
 are not normally mapped into the GDT in order to save GDT   space. When a
 search is performed, the Module Table Entries are   mapped into temporary GDT
 entries, one at a time, and mapped   back out after checking the module.
 -  Additional memory overhead. The MTE, and the file handle mapping   tables
 needed are all fixed, non-swappable memory, reducing the   total memory in the
 system available for normal swapping activity.
 -  Additional initialization processing. Loading a module/DLL in   is a slow
 process.

 Use multiple DLL's only when necessary. One reason for an additional DLL is
 for translatable resources. Thus when translating for another language, all
 the translatable resources are in one file, and are separate from code, etc.

  Do not put non-DLL files in the LIBPATH directories. This will increase the
 search time for needed DLLs. Put the libraries with less frequently loaded
 DLLs toward the back of the LIBPATH. But in doing this remember, once a DLL is
 in memory, the LIBPATH will not be searched again, the existing handle to the
 DLL will be used. However, if all programs using the DLL terminate, the next
 one to load it will have to search again.

  Do not allocate large numbers of small segments. Allocate a single larger
 segment and use DosSubSet/DosSubAlloc/DosSubFree.  Do not allocate a maximum
 size segment and slowly suballocate from it. Allocate at a reasonable size,
 and DosReallocSeg to make it larger. Lots of small segments result in causing
 a lot more memory shuffling to make room for a large segment, than does a few
 medium sized segments.

  Do not allocate 64K segments. A 64K segment requires two I/O operations to
 swap in or out*per. Allocate your segments on 4K boundaries (looking forward
 to 2.0 again).

  Do not allocate all the memory an application will need at initialization.
 Delay the allocation until it is actually needed.

  Do not allocate segments to the maximum possible size.

 - Allocate what is needed.
 - Use DosReallocSeg to grow and shrink as required.
 - Use threshold management to control the growth/shrinkage.

 Do not use all linker default.

  - /ALIGN:16 - default is ALIGN:512
  - /PACKDATA:nnnn - default for nnnn is 64K, specify if near.
  - /EXEPACK - Use only on .EXE (not .DLL) files. Normally results in
 smaller .EXE files, and smaller files load faster.

 Use WinInvalidateRect to repaint the client window. Only repaint the required
 portions of the window. Do not use WinInvalidateRect in WM_PAINT processing.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.4.2. Bug in DOSPTRACE() with CODEVIEW ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0001                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen M.
 FILENAME: CLTM0001.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 BUGS FORUM
 DATE: 02/07/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.3
 TIME: 2:20pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 You may find you get a TRAP B at 0228:3646 using debuggers. This is a bug in
 OS/2. The reason is as follows:

  DOSPTrace() is a kernel API and parts of the kernel are now swappable. The
 problem occurs when your debugger hits a breakpoint (INT 3) and Ptrace is
 swapped out. You get a "not in memory" exception which can't be handled
 because the INT 3 breakpoint exception is still being handled.

  The only circumvention is to eliminate swapping (not DOS Box swapping). There
 is a MEMMAN parameter in CONFIG.SYS called NOSWAP to set this. Of course, this
 means you need enough RAM to run all your applications.

  This bug only occurs when you are running a debugger.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3. COMMUNICATIONS MANAGER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

INSTALL/REINSTALL


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.1. INSTALL REINSTALL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.1.1. Installing or changing your Configuration files. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0000                          ENTERED BY: Pav, Eric M.
 FILENAME: COMI0000.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 12:09pm                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 To create or change a Communications Manager configuration file, type EECFG at
 any OS/2 command prompt. This will start the basic configuration services. It
 provides configuration files with the following default environments:.

 o 3270 Emulation (both DFT and Non-DFT connections)

 o ASCII Terminal Emulation

 o 5250 Work Station Feature

 o LAN Services

 o Remote Data Services.

 Note:  EECFG will not change a configuration file if you have already run
 Advanced Configuration in Communications Manager. However, you can use it to
 create a new one. Any substantial changes to a configuration file might
 require you to create a new configuration file (i.e. changing the connection)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.1.2. Naming of CM Config File. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0001                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen M.
 FILENAME: COMI0001.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 12:11pm                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 When naming your Communications Manager configuration file, do NOT use the
 default names, ACSCFG.CFG or ACSCFG.CFG. This will cause problems when you
 REINST or install a later version. The installation program will overwrite
 them. EMULATION


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.2. EMULATION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.2.1. Installing 3270 Emulation via Token Ring on an AT. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0000                          ENTERED BY: Pettes, Michell H.
 FILENAME: COME0000.IPF             SOURCE: Casey Stanislaw - Remote Data
                                    Services
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 12:18pm                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 Basic Configuration Services (BCS) has a bug, when installing 3270 emulation
 via Token Ring on an AT. The default parameters are wrong - BCS sets up for
 OPTIMAL PERFORMANCE, which are PS/2 parameters, not AT parameters.

 ERROR MESSAGE: LAN Frame (or Hex Frame) from the <gateway address> caused a
 [LINK FAILURE] on Local Adapter <00 or 01>.

 PROBLEM: The "Logon" screen sent was too big for the AT to handle. The request
 unit is too small.

 3 VARIABLES NEED TO BE CHANGED:

     1. LAN FEATURES - 802.2 PROFILE(IEEE)

         Transmit Buffer Size - default value - 1048 (PS/2 size)

           CHANGE TO ============> 1944 (AT size)

     2. SNA FEATURES -DATA LINK CONTROL

        Max RU Size - default value - 1024 ( PS/2 size)

           CHANGE TO ===========>  1920 (AT size)

     3. SNA FEATURES -APPC TRANSMIT MODE (There may be more than one)

          eg.  SQLLOO - Max RU Size

                   default value 1024 (PS/2 size)

           CHANGE TO ===========> 1920 (AT size)

        #3 may not be present if the machine is not configured for DB REQ/SVR.

        Note:  # 2 and # 3 are 24 bytes less than # 1


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.2.2. The difference between Presentation Space Setting and Font Size Setting. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0001                          ENTERED BY: Pettes, Michell H.
 FILENAME: COME0001.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 12:21pm                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 What's the difference between the Presentation Space setting of "24 x 80" and
 the Font Size setting of "24 x 80" in OS/2 1.2 Communications Manager's 3270
 Emulation?

 Why does the emulator window show only a portion of the host screen? Why
 doesn't it fill the "real" PS/2 screen?

  1. The Terminal Type

     The "terminal type" is a measure of how many lines your control unit
     considers a "screenfull."  A 3279 Model 2 sets this amount to 24 lines,
     for example.  This is why the CM configuration setting of "24 x 80 (Model
     2)" is worded this way.  If you are using a SNA port, you can choose any
     of these terminal types, and the control unit will configure itself "on
     the fly" to match your setting.  If not, you should set this to match what
     your control unit is expecting.  That is, if you replace a 3279 Model 3
     with your PS/2, you should set this for "34 x 80 (Model 3)."  If this
     setting is not correct, you will never see the entire screenfull of host
     data at once, since the window you've defined as a terminal (what OS/2
     calls a "presentation space") is smaller than what the host is sending.

  2. The Font Size

     As you may know, the font size can be changed with the system menu
     pull-down by choosing "Emulator Operations" clicking on the "Font Size"
     radio button, clicking "OK", selecting a font size, and clicking "OK"
     again.  The critical point is that this HAS NOTHING TO DO WITH THE NUMBER
     OF LINES OF HOST DATA THAT ARE ACTUALLY DISPLAYED IN THE WINDOW.  The
     naming convention used for font sizes only describes how a particular font
     might be SIMILAR to the one used on a terminal of that type.  You could
     read these font selections as, "If I picked this font, the characters
     would be about as big as those on a "34 x 80" character terminal."  The
     selection you make here is a matter of personal preference, and nothing
     more.  The entire presentation space "as defined in the CM configuration"
     will always be shown when you maximize the window.  Notice that if you
     change the font, the window just shrinks or grows correspondingly; the
     amount of data shown inside the window doesn't change.

  3. The Fullscreen Mystery

     The 3270 emulation features of Communications Manager were designed to
     match as closely as possible the behavior or "real" 3270-family terminals,
     even though  you are really using a PS/2.  For example, witness the fact
     that two keys marked "Ctrl" have very different functions, and neither
     corresponds to its marking.  Its because the position of the key is
     important, and it does match that of a 3279.  (You can change the meaning
     of the keys, though).

     Once you begin to think of this as a "real terminal" inside a window, you
     realize that OS/2 cannot (or will not, display any data in that window
     that would not be displayed on a real terminal.  That includes blank space
     at the edges of the screens.  The fact that your terminal window doesn't
     fill an 8514 screen is superfluous, once you accept that it occupies that
     correct amount of space to display all the data that would fit on a 3279
     screen, and nothing more.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.2.3. 3270 Emulation Screen Size ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0002                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen M.
 FILENAME: COME0002.IPF             SOURCE: OS2COMM FORUM
 DATE: 02/07/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2+
 TIME: 12:57pm                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 If you would like to change the size of the screen display during a 3270
 emulation session to a full screen, you can using the following procedure:

  1. Enter the Communications Manager Full Screen Session
  2. Select ADVANCED
  3. Select CONFIGURATION
  4. Hit ENTER to select your current configuration file
  5. Select 3270 feature profiles
  6. Choose the emulation you are using
  7. Choose the session you wish to change
  8. Select 33x80 Mod 3 Presentation Space Size
  9. Exit and Save

 The next time you start Communications Manager you should have full screen
 display.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.2.4. 3270 Box Characters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0003                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen M.
 FILENAME: COME0003.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/13/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.3
 TIME: 10:20am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

  Changing from 1.2 to 1.3 you may notice a problem with box lines using ISPF
 dialog tag programs.  Box may show up as:

             1.3                           1.2

          ---------                     ----------
          -       -                     |        |
          -       -                     |        |
          -       -                     |        |
          ---------                     ----------

 Edit C:\CMLIB\310.CPT and change the text in line 134 from:

 Center_Vertical
  to
 Center_Box_Bar_Vertical

 Restart Communications Manager, and this should take care of the problem.
 PROGRAMMING SUPPORT


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3. PROGRAMMING SUPPORT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.1. Installing Host Graphics. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0000                          ENTERED BY: Pav, Eric M.
 FILENAME: COMR0000.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 12:24pm                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 Do the following steps to install Host Graphics:

 Note:  This assumes that a GDDM-OS/2 Link product is installed on the host
 your logon to.

  1. Logon to host.

  2. Bring up an OS/2 window.

  3. Type HGINST at the "C:" prompt.

     Note:  At this point, another window will appear. It will ask you from
     which host session should the files be download from. About 15 files will
     download. The number of files may depend on your type of display.

  4. Logoff.

  5. Stop Communications.

  6. Start Communications.

  7. Logon to host.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.2. Header File - NETB1_C.H ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0001                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen M.
 FILENAME: COMR0001.IPF             SOURCE: OS2COMM FORUM
 DATE: 02/08/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.3
 TIME: 10:01am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

  One of the header files for the NetBios API has an error.

  There is a #define that does not correspond to the documentation.

  In the file it is listed as:
     #define NB_FIND_NAMEWAIT    0x0078
  It should be (according to the documentation):
     #define NB_FIND_NAME_WAIT   0x0078 CUSTOMIZATION


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4. CUSTOMIZATION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.1. APPC - Connecting to other LU TYPE 6.2 Products. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0000                          ENTERED BY: Pettes, Michell H.
 FILENAME: COMC0000.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 12:27pm                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 Connecting to other LU type 6.2 products and moving to future versions of OS/2
 Extended Edition will be MUCH easier if you start taking the following steps
 in your APPC configurations and programs.  These steps are strongly
 recommended:  Start Today! Pass this info on to all APPC users inside IBM and
 to all customers.

  1. Give each of your machines a unique physical unit name (PU name) in its
     SNA network.  Avoid the OS/2 default of "PU000000".  The PU name for an
     OS/2 workstation  is configured in the "SNA base" profile.  I'd also
     recommend making this name as useful as possible;  the PU name on my
     office OS/2 machine is B763C221, since I am in room C221 of building 673.

  2. Name the SNA Network that your machines uses.  Configure a SNA Network
     Name with a value other than all-blanks.  Avoid the OS/2 default of "
     ".  Although all-blanks indicates to other OS/2 machines that they are on
     the same network, it does not coexist well with other SNA products that do
     not make this assumption. The SNA network name for an OS/2 workstation is
     configured in the "SNA base" profile.

  3. In each APPC configuration, create a logical unit (LU) with the same LU
     name as the PU name.  Make this LU the default LU.  This is configured in
     the "Logical unit (LU)" profile.

  4. Make every LU name in each SNA network unique.  For example, do not create
     an "LU1" or "LU2" on more than one machine in an SNA network. I know that
     Basic Configuration Services in OS/2 EE installation does these kinds of
     things already--Change them!  This is a formula for disaster that you will
     have to change as the network grows and you begin using APPN.

     Note:  LU names and partner LU names must be distinct within each machine.
     Use the DISPLAY verb if you need to find the names of all the LUs and
     partner LUs in your machine.

     As another example: Do not configure "FILEREQ " and "FILESVR " (as the LU
     names for the sample programs--as shown in the System Administrator's
     Guide) on any machine in the network.  These are fine as LU aliases and
     partner LU aliases, but DO NOT use them as LU names and partner LU names.

  5. When possible, have each OS/2 program that issues a TP_STARTED verb issue
     it to the default LU (that is, supply all hex zeros for its LU_alias
     parameter), rather than issue it to a named LU profile.

  6. For mode names, LU names, PU names, and SNA network names (that is, the
     Type A EBCDIC names), use only the following characters: uppercase A - Z
     and numerics 0 - 9.

     Avoid using the three special characters in all Type A EBCDIC names; the
     three special characters are $, #, and @.

  7. Here is the one exception to step 6: Configure modes with one or more of
     the following names, and supply one of these names as the mode_name
     parameter on each (MC_)ALLOCATE verb.  The partner machine will need to
     have a mode with the same name.  These are configured in "Transmission
     Service Mode" profiles.

    o "#BATCH  "  - high bandwidth, low cost
    o "#INTER  "  - short delay, high reliability

      These mode names are pre-defined on other IBM products, such as AS/400.
      Also, these mode names may affect the quality and cost of the route
      selected through a subarea network.  They will soon be pre-defined in
      OS/2 EE.  Remember that 8-byte mode_names must be supplied in EBCDIC on
      the (MC_)ALLOCATE verb.  Assure that the first character of these names
      (after conversion to EBCDIC) is X'7B'.

      #BATCH - Describes a mode that provides the characteristics needed for
      batch-oriented sessions.  In general, high bandwidth and low cost are the
      key characteristics of a mode that supports #BATCH sessions.

      #INTER - Describes a mode that provides the characteristics needed for
      interactive-oriented sessions.  In general, short delay and reliability
      are the key characteristics of a mode that supports #INTER sessions.

      How to configure them:


            ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
            Γöé                                     Γöé                                  Γöé
            Γöé                Mode fields          Γöé      Initial session limit       Γöé
            Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
            Γöé       Γöé     Γöé     Γöé        Γöé        Γöé          Γöé            Γöé          Γöé
            Γöé       ΓöéMin. ΓöéMax. ΓöéReceive ΓöéSession ΓöéContentionΓöé Contention ΓöéAuto-     Γöé
            Γöé       ΓöéRU   ΓöéRU   ΓöéPacing  ΓöéLimit   ΓöéWinners   Γöé Winners    ΓöéActivated Γöé
            Γöé       ΓöéSize ΓöéSize ΓöéLimit   Γöé        ΓöéSource    Γöé Target     ΓöéSessions  Γöé
            Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
            Γöé#BATCH Γöé 256 Γöé  *  Γöé  3     Γöé  8     Γöé  4       Γöé   0        Γöé  0       Γöé
            Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
            Γöé#INTER Γöé 256 Γöé  *  Γöé  7     Γöé  8     Γöé  4       Γöé   0        Γöé  0       Γöé
            ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

      * Indicates that you may configure an optimal value for a particular
      link.  Higher values give better performance, depending on the DLC being
      used.

      For partner LUs that use these modes, remember to appropriately update
      the partner LU session limit.

      One "Initial Session Limit" profile can be configured for these, since
      its three values are the same for each of these modes.

      For partner LUs that use these modes, remember to appropriately update
      the partner LU session limit.

      Taking these 7 steps will save you a ton of headaches in the near future!


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.2. Insert Cursor Toggle. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0001                          ENTERED BY: Pav, Eric M.
 FILENAME: COMC0001.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 12:29pm                      CSD LEVEL: GA

  Toggling the insert cursor during insert mode in a 3270 Emulation Session.

 To toggle the insert key cursor during insert mode, go into Keyboard Remap and
 remap the following functions to the Insert key:

       [InsrtT][AltCur]

 This will toggle the cursor (from a block cursor during insert mode, to an
 underbar cursor in replace mode).

 Note:   It is possible that the cursor can get out of sync with the insert
 mode. To correct this, do the following steps.

  1. Get into insert mode (you will see a caret at bottom of the window).

  2. Move cursor somewhere that you cannot do a legal insert, then try to do it
     anyway.  Your terminal is now locked.

  3. Hit the reset key (press Left-Ctrl ) That unlocks the terminal, clears
     insert mode, and leaves an underbar cursor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.3. CM defaulting to the correct configuration file. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0002                          ENTERED BY: Pav, Eric M.
 FILENAME: COMC0002.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 12:32pm                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 How to make Communications Manager default to the correct configuration file.

 You will get a screen asking for the CFG file name if:

  1. You have not defined a CFG file name as a parameter to STARTCM.CMD.

  2. There is no default name known by CM.

   Once you enter a name in this field, this file becomes the default CM
   Configuration File. You can re-specify the default CFG file from option 4 on
   the MAIN menu for CM.

   Note:  Before 1.2 CSD4098, the name would NOT be remembered if you do not
   EXIT CM cleanly ( i.e. select Exit, Yes, wait for everything to stop, and
   then F3 to finally exit) If you enter the name, and the IPL without exiting,
   the name will not be stored. However, this was fixed with CSD4098 and in 1.3
   GA.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.4. Choosing Fonts in Emulators. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0003                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen M.
 FILENAME: COMC0003.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 12:34pm                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 If you would like to change the font in the Communications Manager emulator
 sessions, there is a way.  Use the following:

  1. Open an emulator session
  2. Use Alt-Spacebar to open Menu Icon
  3. Select Emulator Operations
  4. Click on radio-button, Font Size
  5. Click on OK
  6. Choose the font size you would like to use
  7. Click on Change
  8. Under Desktop Manager Window, choose Desktop
  9. Click on Save
 Your font should now always default to the one you have selected.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.5. Changing Colors For 3270 Emulation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0004                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen M.
 FILENAME: COMC0004.IPF             SOURCE: OS2COMM FORUM
 DATE: 02/06/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2+
 TIME: 2:34pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 If you would like to change the colors of your 3270 emulation session, there
 is a way to do it:

  1. Go to the Full Screen Communications Manager Session
  2. Select ADVANCED
  3. Select CONFIGURATION
  4. The name of your configuration file should appear, press ENTER
  5. Select 3270 Features Profile
  6. Select 3270 Colors & Alarms
  7. Set colors to your selections
  8. Select EXIT
  9. Select SAVE & EXIT
 10. Exit Communications Manager
 11. Restart Communications Manager MISCELLANEOUS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.5. MISCELLANEOUS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.5.1. Moving Keyboard Remap to other machines. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0000                          ENTERED BY: Pettes, Michell H.
 FILENAME: COMM0000.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 12:40pm                      CSD LEVEL: GA

  1. Copy your .CFG from \CMLIB on the source machine to \CMLIB on the target
     machine.

  2. Start Communications Manager with your target .CFG file named as the
     default.

  3. From the Communications Manager Main Menu choose:

    Advanced, Configuration, (confirm .CFG target file name ),
    Configuration file utilities,
    Copy selected profiles from another configuration file,
    (confirm with Yes the warning panel),
    supply the source .CFG file name,
    Keyboard profiles,
    choose which type of keyboard profile,
    choose which particular keyboard profile.

    Note:  Don't forget to tell the emulator to make the new keyboard profile
    the one it should use!  (Specify new Configuration file name default...)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.5.2. Dead Cursor Keys in 3270 Emulator Window. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0001                          ENTERED BY: Pav, Eric M.
 FILENAME: COMM0001.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 12:42pm                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 Intermittent problems with cursor keys.

 When the problem occurs, check to see if the Scroll Lock light is on. If it
 is, then the cursor keys will act like scrolling keys instead of acting like
 cursor keys.  The reason this was done is because on some display/adapter/3270
 Model combinations, the user must scroll in order to see the entire host
 presentation space.  Unfortunately, the code isn't smart enough to determine
 that your particular combination doesn't require scroll keys, and thus treats
 the cursor keys like scroll keys.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4. DATABASE MANAGER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

INSTALL/REINSTALL


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.1. INSTALL/REINSTALL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.1.1. SQLSYSTM saved during install. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0000                          ENTERED BY: Tyger, Karen
 FILENAME: DBMI0000.IPF             SOURCE: Aubrey Herzik (Query Manager)
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.3
 TIME: 12:50pm                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 Database manager configuration file is named SQLSYSTM. It contains values that
 can be set to adjust the performance of DBM.  During install of EE 1.3 over EE
 1.2, this file is renamed to SQLSYSTM.BAK and a new SQLSYSTM. file is created
 with default values.  If you want to restore your old defaults, issue a
 STOPDBM and copy SQLSYSTM.BAK to SQLSYSTM. QUERY MANAGER


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2. QUERY MANAGER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.1. Backup of Objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0000                          ENTERED BY: Pettes, Michell H.
 FILENAME: DBMQ0000.IPF             SOURCE: OS2SQL FORUMS
 DATE: 03/04/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 8:47am                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 The Query Manager objects are all kept in one database table,
 (QRWSYS.QRWSYS_OBJECT). So QM objects are part of the backup/restore. In fact
 that is one of the reasons QM objects are stored within the database. The only
 exceptions are the QM profile and the Printer Nickname definitions which are
 stored as DOS files. REMOTE DATABASE SERVICES


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3. REMOTE DATA SERVICES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.1. Publications for Remote Database Services. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0000                          ENTERED BY: Pettes, Michell H.
 FILENAME: DBMD0000.IPF             SOURCE: OS2SQL FORUMS
 DATE: 03/12/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 3:45pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 The following is a list of publications for Remote Data Services.

 o Database Manager Administrator's Guide

 o System Administrator's Guide (for Communications)

 o Database Manager Remote Data Services Cookbook (redbook) - GG24-3558

 o Personal Systems Developer, Summer, 1989

 o Personal Systems Developer, Fall, 1990  (G362-0001-07)

 o Personal Systems Technical Solutions, Issue 2, 1990 (G325-5006)

 o EE-CFG Package owned by Aubrey Herzik, Austin Technical Interface Group
   (ATIG), Database Manager


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.2. RDS limits for 16/4 card. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0001                          ENTERED BY: Pettes, Michell H.
 FILENAME: DBMD0001.IPF             SOURCE: OS2SQL FORUMS
 DATE: 03/12/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 5:43pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 If you want to go through some complicated calculations, see the Server
 Installation and Configuration Guidelines (G01F-0288).  Or, use CM advanced
 configuration and see what it will allow for link stations in the 802.2
 profile for a 16/4 card.  It should allow a maximum of 255. However, here are
 some practical things to keep in mind:

  1. The maximum number of active applications that can connect to a single
     database is 117.  This is specified in the database configuration file.

  2. Each application that connects to a database on the server will require
     approximately 150K bytes of server memory.  Thus, you will want to
     consider the amount of swapping that will happen if you connect n (up to
     117) requesters.

  3. SQLLOO will be able to use 80% of:

     - the number of link stations configured for 802.2 (max. = 255)

     - the number of link stations configured for NETBIOS

     - the number of link stations configured for DLC

    This is covered in G01F-0288, and in other publications.

 I hope this gives you some perspective on what you can practically configure.
 PROGRAMMING SUPPORT


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4. PROGRAMMING SUPPORT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4.1. Binding Problems? ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0000                          ENTERED BY: Pettes, Michell H.
 FILENAME: DBMR0000.IPF             SOURCE: OS2SQL FORUMS
 DATE: 03/04/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 12:02pm                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 Whenever the database is REORGed or deleted and recreated all programs that
 are bound to it, must be rebound.

 The call sqlabind( ) will allow you to dynamically bind a program to a named
 database, provided the relevant .BND file is accessible.

 Of course dynamically binding may take a second or two. CUSTOMIZATION


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.5. CUSTOMIZATION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.5.1. "Wrap-Around" Table Insertion ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0000                          ENTERED BY: Pettes, Michell H.
 FILENAME: DBMC0000.IPF             SOURCE: OS2SQL FORUM
 DATE: 03/03/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 6:24pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 One way to handle this is simply to run a program periodically that prunes
 your error table if it has become too large.  This has the advantage that "too
 large" can be defined in a dynamic way.

 If you want something that takes care of itself, you can add a timestamp
 column to your table (if it doesn't already have one).. Then decide in advance
 how many rows you want to have.  For each row, insert a row into the table
 with a unique timestamp and a dummy error entry. Then, when the real errors
 come in, always replace the row with the lowest timestamp.  If the errors come
 in too fast and you find that you don't get enough history, add more dummy
 records.  This can be done at any time, as long as the timestamps on the dummy
 records are lower than the timestamp of the lowest "real" record.  It would be
 nice if you could do the replace with a single statement, like:

     UPDATE T
        SET TS = CURRENT TIMESTAMP, DESC = :error_report ...
        WHERE TS = (SELECT MIN(TS) FROM T)

 But SQL rules prohibit referencing the object of an update statement in a
 subquery of the same statement.  So you'll need something like:

     SELECT MIN(TS)
        INTO :min_ts
        FROM CIRCULAR

     UPDATE T
        SET TS = CURRENT TIMESTAMP, DESC = :error_report ...
        WHERE TS = :min_ts


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.5.2. Host Variable in a Multi-threaded Application. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0001                          ENTERED BY: Pettes, Michell H.
 FILENAME: DBMC0001.IPF             SOURCE: OS2SQL FORUM
 DATE: 03/03/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 6:47pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 You can easily put a separate SQLCA in each of the routines that run under
 different threads.  Just declare the SQLCA yourself rather than use the
 INCLUDE SQLCA statement.  For example:

  #include "sqlca.h"

  void far mythread1()
  {
  struct sqlca sqlca;
  .
  .
  return();
  }

  void far mythread2()
  {
  struct sqlca sqlca;
  .
  .
  return();
  }

 You can also build a serialized routine to process SQLCA's that contain
 errors.  This allows successful threads to continue to do their work. Remember
 that the Database Manager's Runtime Services are also serialized, so even if
 you avoid variable problems, only one thread per process is allowed to process
 SQL statements at a time. The serialization also applies to START and STOP
 USING DATABASE and CREATE DATABASE.  I don't think any of the other APIs are
 serialized.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.5.3. Writing a Fixed-Length ASCII Table Export Program. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0002                          ENTERED BY: Pettes, Michell H.
 FILENAME: DBMC0002.IPF             SOURCE: OS2SQL FORUM
 DATE: 03/03/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 7:03pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 It is non-trivial to write a general export program, but not super-difficult
 either.  You will need to use the dynamic forms of the DECLARE, PREPARE, OPEN,
 CLOSE and FETCH statements, and you will need to use SQLDA's.  It will help if
 you do this in a language with decent memory allocation and pointer
 manipulation facilities, such as C or Pascal.  COBOL is a distant possibility.
 Forget FORTRAN.  Here is the pseudocode for a program to export a table.  SQL
 is in upper case.

     BEGIN DECLARE SECTION
        Declare STMT, a string variable.
        Declare CNT, an integer variable.
     END DECLARE SECTION

     INCLUDE SQLCA
     INCLUDE SQLDA
        Declare DA_PTR, a pointer to an SQLDA structure.

     STMT = 'SELECT * FROM '

     Get table name from user.
     Concatenate table name to STMT.

     Find out how many columns the table has ; call it NCOLS.


     Allocate SQLDASIZE(NCOLS) bytes of memory, and make DA_PTR point to it.
     Set DA_PTR-<SQLN = NCOLS;

     PREPARE S1 FROM :STMT

     DESCRIBE S1 INTO DA_PTR

     for each SQLVAR:

        case SQLTYPE:

           496, 497: SQLDATA = (*long int)malloc(SQLLEN);
           500, 501: SQLDATA = (*short int)malloc(SQLLEN);

              .
              .  (SQLTYPES can be found with the description of
                        the SQLDA)
              .

        end case.

        if odd_number(SQLDATA) SQLIND = (*short int)malloc(2);


     end for.

     DECLARE C1 CURSOR FOR S1

     OPEN C1

     loop until no more rows:

        FETCH C1 USING DESCRIPTOR DA_PTR

        output values to file

     end loop

     CLOSE C1


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.5.4. SQL Preprocessor and Host Variables. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0003                          ENTERED BY: Pettes, Michell H.
 FILENAME: DBMC0003.IPF             SOURCE: OS2SQL FORUMS
 DATE: 03/04/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 12:22pm                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 OS/2 does not support qualified variable names in SQL in any language.
 However, if your goal is to retrieve directly into elements of a structure,
 there are two things you can do in C, Pascal or COBOL:

  1. Either retrieve the data via an SQLDA which contains SQLVAR elements
     pointing to the items in your structure,
  2. or use pointers directly.

 Both techniques will be illustrated for COBOL in this tip. Neither of these
 techniques can be used easily in FORTRAN, although the OS/2 API routines
 SQLGADDR (Get Address) and SQLGDREF (Dereference Address) can be used to
 manage SQLDA's.  Both examples show how to fetch an integer and a character
 field from a table called MYTAB into a structure called MY-STRUCTURE.  In the
 first example, we define the structure and an SQLDA with two SQLVARs.  We make
 the first SQLVAR point to one of the items in MY-STRUCTURE, and the second one
 point to the other item.  Then we FETCH USING DESCRIPTOR--if the FETCH
 succeeds, the data will wind up in MY-STRUCTURE:

         data division.
         working-storage section.
         01 my-structure.
            03 item-1 pic s9(4) comp-5.
            03 item-2 pic x(10).

         EXEC SQL
            INCLUDE SQLDA
         END-EXEC.

         EXEC SQL
            INCLUDE SQLCA
         END-EXEC.

         EXEC SQL
             DECLARE C1 CURSOR FOR
                SELECT COL1, COL2
                FROM MYTAB
         END-EXEC.

         procedure division.
         start-para.

        *    DEFINE SQLDA WITH TWO VARIABLES

             move 2 to sqln

        *    FIRST SQLVAR POINTS TO ITEM-1

             move 500 to sqltype(1)
             move 2 to sqllen(1)
             set sqldata(1) to address of item-1

        *    SECOND SQLVAR POINTS TO ITEM-2

             move 452 to sqltype(2)
             move 10 to sqllen(2)
             set sqldata(2) to address of item-2

        *    PERFORM SQL OPERATIONS WITH SQLDA

             EXEC SQL
                OPEN C1
             END-EXEC

             EXEC SQL
                FETCH C1 USING DESCRIPTOR :SQLDA
             END-EXEC

             EXEC SQL
                CLOSE C1
             END-EXEC

             display item-1, item-2
             stop run.

 This is an awful lot of trouble to go through, and fairly restrictive, because
 some statements (e.g. SELECT INTO) cannot use descriptors. On the other hand,
 it should be completely portable to other IBM SQL products, as long as COBOL
 supports pointers.  The second example shows how to define "surrogate" host
 variables in the LINKAGE SECTION, and how to overlay these on structure items.
 This technique is easier to use (you don't have to know about SQLTYPES  and
 SQLDA esoterical), and more flexible, because you really get to use host
 variables.  However, it may not be portable.

         data division.
         linkage section.

         EXEC SQL
            BEGIN DECLARE SECTION
         END-EXEC.

         77 temp-1 pic s9(4) comp-5.
         77 temp-2 pic x(10).

         EXEC SQL
            END DECLARE SECTION
         END-EXEC.

         working-storage section.

         01 my-structure.
            03 item-1 pic s9(4) comp-5.
            03 item-2 pic x(10).

         77 ptr-1 usage is pointer.
         77 ptr-2 usage is pointer.

         EXEC SQL
            INCLUDE SQLCA
         END-EXEC.

         procedure division.
         start-para.

        *    DEFINE ADDRESSES OF HOST VARIABLES

             set ptr-1 to address of item-1
             set address of temp-1 to ptr-1
             set ptr-2 to address of item-2
             set address of temp-2 to ptr-2

        *     PERFORM SQL OPERATIONS WITH TEMP VARIABLES

             EXEC SQL
                SELECT COL1, COL2
                INTO :temp-1, :temp-2
                FROM MYTAB
             END-EXEC

             display item-1, item-2
             stop run.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.5.5. Concatenating Columns in Select Statements. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0004                          ENTERED BY: Pettes, Michell H.
 FILENAME: DBMC0004.IPF             SOURCE: OS2SQL FORUMS
 DATE: 03/04/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 12:37pm                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 However, it is part of SAA Level II SQL, so you can expect it be be available
 within the next two years.  In the meantime, workarounds will depend on your
 application. For example:

    FOR:                  USE:

    SELECT AΓöéΓöéB                 SELECT A,B
    INTO :x...                  INTO :x1, :x2...

                                x = concat(x1,x2);

    WHERE AΓöéΓöéB = C              WHERE A = SUBSTR(C,1,LENGTH(A))
                                AND   B = SUBSTR(C,LENGTH(A)+1,LENGTH(B))

                                /* this will be problematic if C */
                                /* is not at least as long as A. */

    UPDATE ...                  loop;
    SET X = AΓöéΓöéB                   FETCH INTO :a, :b;
                                   x = concat(a,b);
                                   UPDATE WHERE CURRENT SET X = :x;
                                end;
 I can't think of an example where there is not some sort of workaround, but
 the workarounds will almost always involve extra SQL or jumping out into an
 application program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.5.6. Using REXX for Database Manager Reporting. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0005                          ENTERED BY: Pettes, Michell H.
 FILENAME: DBMC0005.IPF             SOURCE: OS2SQL FORUMS
 DATE: 03/04/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 12:59pm                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 The answer to any kind of report that QM won't handle is REXX. Here is a
 sample of how you could list columns of a table vertically:

     nullind = ">none<"

     stmt = "SELECT   DEPTNUMB, DEPTNAME, DIVISION, LOCATION,",
            "         ID, NAME, JOB, YEARS, SALARY, COMM",
            "FROM     ORG, STAFF",
            "WHERE    DEPTNUMB = DEPT",
            "ORDER BY DEPTNUMB, ID"

     call sqlexec "DECLARE C1 CURSOR FOR S1"

     call sqlexec "PREPARE S1 FROM :stmt"

     call sqlexec "OPEN C1"

     call sqlexec "FETCH C1 INTO ",
        ":DEPTNUMB:i1, :DEPTNAME:i2, :DIVISION:i3, :LOCATION:i4,",
        ":ID:i5, :NAME:i6, :JOB:i7, :YEARS:i8, :SALARY:i9, :COMM:i10"

     do while SQLCA.SQLCODE = 0

        /* Check for nulls */
        if i1  < 0 then DEPTNUMB = nullind
        if i2  < 0 then DEPTNAME = nullind
        if i3  < 0 then DIVISION = nullind
        if i4  < 0 then LOCATION = nullind
        if i5  < 0 then ID       = nullind
        if i6  < 0 then NAME     = nullind
        if i7  < 0 then JOB      = nullind
        if i8  < 0 then YEARS    = nullind
        if i9  < 0 then SALARY   = nullind
        if i10 < 0 then COMM     = nullind

        say "Employee Id:  "ID"   Name: "NAME
        say "Job: "JOB"   Years: "YEARS
        say "Salary:  "SALARY"  Commission:  "COMM
        say

        /* Get next row */
        call sqlexec "FETCH C1 INTO ",
            ":DEPTNUMB:i1, :DEPTNAME:i2, :DIVISION:i3, :LOCATION:i4,",
            ":ID:i5, :NAME:i6, :JOB:i7, :YEARS:i8, :SALARY:i9, :COMM:i10"
     end

     call sqlexec "CLOSE C1"

 This just gives the idea.  You will have to provide such things as database
 starting and stopping, error handling, page checking, and so on.  But even if
 you don't know REXX, it's pretty simple.

 If you need more REXX sample code, take a look at the Summer '90 PS Developer,
 which has an article called "Accessing the Database from Five Different
 Languages".  (One of them is REXX). MIGRATION


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.6. MIGRATION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.6.1. Converting an OS/2 1.1 Database to 1.2 or 1.3. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0000                          ENTERED BY: Pettes, Michell H.
 FILENAME: DBMG0000.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2 +
 TIME: 12:53pm                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 The documented way is:

  1. Take the production machine off-line.
  2. Create a backup of the database on the 1.1 machine via QM's BACKUP.
  3. Install Version 1.2 or 1.3.
  4. RESTORE the database on the 1.2 or 1.3 machine.  It will be migrated
     automatically.
  5. Put the machine back on-line.

 Existing applications should run as is.  Or you can upgrade the existing
 applications as described in the Programming Reference Appendix H.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5. LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

INSTALL/REINSTALL


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1. INSTALL REINSTALL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.1. How to install LAN Requester using REINST ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0000                          ENTERED BY: Pav, Eric M.
 FILENAME: LANI0000.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.1+
 TIME: 10:53am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

  Problems with reinstalling Lan Requester using REINST.

 You must have a Communication Manager config file configured for LAN. During
 REINST ask CM to install that config file, then the LAN requester will be
 selectable.

 Note:  While you are doing REINST, the rest of your OS/2 operations are still
 operational, so you can continue doing other things while REINST is
 installing.

 Note:  Make sure you stop all network processes ( NET STOP ...) before
 beginning REINST.

 Warning: When the REINST finishes and you press the PF3 key to "complete the
 installation", it forces a re-boot, so be sure to save whatever files you are
 editing before completing REINST.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.2. First time USERID and Password. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0001                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen M.
 FILENAME: LANI0001.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 1:25pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 The first time you logon to the network after install, a default NET.ACC file
 is used to provide a user id and password.  These are:

 Admin Account Name:      USERID
 Admin Password:          PASSWORD
 Guest Account Name:      GUEST
 Guest Password:          (no password)
 Role:                    STANDALONE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.3. Can't Start Messenger. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0002                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen M.
 FILENAME: LANI0002.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 1:27pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 If you experience problems starting the MESSENGER  (ERROR NET:3062) make sure
 there is a directory C:\IBMLAN\LOGS. If it doesn't exist, do:

      MD C:\IBMLAN\LOGS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.4. Install of LAN Server. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0003                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen M.
 FILENAME: LANI0003.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 1:29pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 If you need to install the Lan Server, but have not yet installed the Lan
 Requester from Extended Edition, SRVINST, the installation program from Lan
 Server, will not let you install because you are missing the Requester from
 the Communications Manager. Also, REINST will only let you install what you
 already have installed. However,  there is a utility in OS2\SYSTEM called
 EECFG that will allow you to change your configuration. You will need to run
 this, select CHANGE to modify your current .CFG file and add Lan Requester to
 your configuration. Then go back to REINST and  reinstall the Communications
 Manager. The Lan Requester piece will be installed accordingly.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.5. Reinst 1.3 System Error ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0004                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen
 FILENAME: LANI0004.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.3
 TIME: 5:06pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 If you ever had an aborted install or REINST under 1.2 and a subdirectory
 (with LAN DLL's usually) called DDITEMP is under OS2\INSTALL then the EE 1.3
 Install diskette will fail (on a version check).  The remedy is to erase the
 files and remove the subdirectory.  Normally, use of the 1.2 install diskette
 after the aborted install (or REINST) would clear these files and subdirectory
 out and there would be no problem;however, this does not seem to be the case
 in all instances.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.6. Duplication of Domain Controllers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0005                          ENTERED BY: JGABAY @ ADTSUPP
 FILENAME: LANI0005.IPF             SOURCE: OS2LAN12 Forum
 DATE: 02/21/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2+
 TIME: 9:26am                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 Here is a procedure to clone the user ids from one domain to another under
 1.2.

 D1 is the domain controller with the userids, D2 is the new domain controller.
 (Both D1 and D2 represent the SERVER name on the DC).

  1. On D1, add D2 as an additional server (Definitions / Machine Parameters).

  2. On D2:

    NET STOP REQ /Y

    NET ACCOUNTS /ROLE:MEMBER

    NET START REQ /DOMAIN:D1

    NET START SRV

    If SRV doesn't start, use procedure in README file on server diskette to
    resynch password between D2 and D1.

  3. Once NETLOGON is started, wait for NET.ACC to replicate.  This will take
     several minutes.

  4. On D2:

    NET STOP REQ /Y

    NET ACCOUNTS /ROLE:PRIMARY

    NET START SRV

  5. On D1, delete the machine definition for D2. PERFORMANCE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2. PERFORMANCE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.1. Synchronizing Time ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0000                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen
 FILENAME: LANP0000.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 10:29am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

  In order to synchronize the time on the domain with that of the time on
 another domain or server, use the following:

 To synch DOMAINA with DOMAINB:
 (On DOMAINA)
   NET TIME /DOMAIN:DOMAINB /SET /YES

 To synch with any server:
   NET TIME \\servname /SET /YES


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.2. LAN Tuning Notes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0001                          ENTERED BY: JGABAY @ ADTSUPP
 FILENAME: LANP0001.IPF             SOURCE: LANDOC FORUM
 DATE: 02/14/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2+
 TIME: 11:22am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 The following is some tuning information compiled as a result of some testing
 and questions of LAN performance.

 RULES OF THUMB


  SERVER                                  Default  Tuned    Tuned
                                                   4 Sta    24 Sta

       -    cache size(see CONFIG.SYS)     64K     1560K    2M or more
       -    numreqbufs(see IBMLAN.INI)     15       40       60-90
       -    numbigbufs        "             3       12       30
       -    numfiletasks      "             4        7        8

  WORKSTATION

       -    maxwrkcache       "            64        64
       -    numworkbufs       "            15        15
       -    sizeworkbufs      "           4096K     4096K

 HEURISTICS

 This description is intended to be an aid in using Appendix A. IBMLAN.INI
 File, in the OS/2 LAN Server Network Administrator's Reference and should be
 read in conjunction with the corresponding Requester and Server sections.
 Recommended changes from default values in OS/2 LAN Server 1.1 are emphasized
 with capital letters.

 REQUESTER

 wrkheuristics= in IBMLAN.INI

 BIT  ADDITIONAL DESCRIPTION

  0  When active, allows a file opened in "deny none" sharing mode to be locked
      by the Server, as long as there are no other requests for access, so that
      buffering can be used to enhance performance.  The Server service assumes
      it is the only process active and so, can safely prevent the second
      requester from accessing the file until buffer data has been flushed
      (written to disk).  See also srvheuristics bits 1 and 15.

  1  When active, a batch file on the Server being executed on the requester
      will be kept in the requester's buffer to prevent a request across the
      LAN for each line of the batch file.  The batch file is "opened" and
      "closed" with each line executed; the "close" causes buffer data to be
      flushed.

  2  This means that files in the requester buffer will be "unlocked" in the
      buffer and processing will continue without waiting(asynchronous) for
      confirmation from the Server.  If an error should occur at the Server, it
      will be reported later.  Generally, the only errors which might occur
      later are hard media errors such as disk full or a loss of power to the
      Server. A "virtual circuit" is a NETBIOS session connection to another
      machine via a LAN.  A "2" for this bit should be stated in Appendix A as
      "Only on an OS/2 LAN Server virtual circuit" which excludes the DOS LAN
      products .

  3  Same as for bit 2 for the "close" file operation. Default should be
      changed from "0" to "1" to optimize writing of files (large and small) to
      the server.

  4  Direct named pipes and communication devices through the requester's
      buffers.

  5  Same as for bit 2 for "lock read" and "write unlock" operations.

  6  When active, a request to "open" a file will also perform a "read" of size
      "sizeworkbuf" from the beginning of the file to the requester's work
      buffer.  This is in anticipation that the data will be subsequently read
      saving an additional request across the LAN.

  7  When active, a request to read less than 512 bytes or a request resulting
      in a partial sector being read will perform read-ahead to the end of the
      sector.  This bit has no significance in the OS/2 LAN Server environment.

  8  When active, data packets larger than the LAN's transmit buffer size will
      be chained together eliminating some unnecessary acknowledgements across
      the LAN. THE DEFAULT SHOULD BE CHANGED FROM "2" to "1" to optimize record
      transfer in the OS/2 (tm) IBM LAN environment.

  9  When active and the file access mode allows, requests to read or write
      data smaller than "sizeworkbuf", will be performed locally, in the
      requester's buffer, avoiding a number of additional trips across the LAN.
      The buffer will be flushed when the file is closed or the buffer is
      needed to satisfy other requests.  This is a very big performance
      enhancer for applications which read, modify and write back small
      records.

 10  Shared access means that the file was opened in sharing mode. These
      options allow selective tuning of the buffer mode in case some
      applications may handle data in a manner which conflicts with buffering.
      The OS/2 LAN Server can determine dynamically when sequential reading or
      writing is occurring. THE DEFAULT SHOULD BE CHANGED FROM "3" to "1" to
      optimize random read of records less than 4K bytes.

 11  Appendix A erroneously identifies SMB as "System Message Block"; it should
      read "Server Message Block."  The "raw" read and write SMB protocols mean
      that data is transferred across the LAN without SMB headers. This
      methodology is used to transfer large files directly between a "big
      buffer" in the Server and "work cache" in the requester.  When this
      protocol is initiated by a large file transfer, the NETBIOS session
      involved has exclusive use of the LAN until completion.  Polling is used
      to assure that the large buffers are available prior to commencement.
      This is a significant performance enhancer for large file transfers
      across the LAN.

 12  This bit and bit 13 provide independent control over the use of "raw" SMB
      protocol for read-ahead and write-behind, respectively.  Both are active
      with default values but may be turned off should it better suit a
      particular environment.

 13  See bits 11 and 12 above.

 14  This Server Message Block(SMB) protocol is used for large "reads" if the
      large buffers described in 11 above are not available or "raw" is
      inactive.  It breaks transfers up into buffer size chunks (usually 4K)
      and chains them together to satisfy the request.  Exclusive use of the
      LAN does not occur .

 15  Same as for bit 14 but for large "write" requests.

 16  This bit has no significance in an OS/2 LAN environment.

 17  When active, requests to read small data records will cause read-ahead in
      multiples of the data record size such that a full buffer will be read
      and sent to the requester.  The last record in the buffer may not be
      complete due to multiple records not fitting evenly in the buffer. No
      data will be lost.  This bit is only significant if bit 9 is made
      inactive; this scenario will be detected by the Server forcing this
      read-ahead where small data records of the same size are being read
      sequentially.

 18  When active, requests to write small data records will cause write-behind
      in multiples of the data record size such that a full buffer will be
      written to the Server.  The last record written may not be complete due
      to multiple records not fitting evenly in the buffer.  No data will be
      lost. This bit is only significant if bit 9 is made inactive; this
      scenario will be detected by the Server forcing this write-behind where
      small data records of the same size are being written sequentially.

 19  Should not be made active in LAN Server or PCLP.

 20  This provides flexibility to the requester application as to which files,
      pipes, or devices are flushed(written to disk) from buffers when
      DosBufReset or DosClose is done. The Appendix A description states "use
      only" which is better stated "only those".  "Spin until flushed" means
      wait until confirmation before proceeding with other tasks.

 21  Encryption is not supported on OS/2 LAN Server Version 1.1.

 22  No additional comment.

 23  Appendix A is confusing.  When active, the Server will buffer all files
      opened with sharing mode "deny write". This bit provides ability to
      de-activate should some application not provide "read only" access.

 24  Essentially the same as bit 23 but looking at the file access mode "read
      only" instead of the sharing mode "deny write".  This bit provides
      ability to de-activate buffering should some application not provide
      "deny write" access.

 25  THIS DIGIT SHOULD BE CHANGED TO "1" FOR MANY EXECUTABLE FILES LOADED
      ACROSS THE LAN.  For example DW4/2 load time decreases by more than 50
      percent.  Experiment with your particular program to determine which
      option is better. Default should be changed from "0" to "1" to improve
      load time for executable files across LAN.

 26  No additional comment.

 27  Core Server means a DOS based LAN Server such as PCLP.  OS/2 LAN Server
      does not allow DOS based servers except as external resources.

 28  The Appendix A information has errors in the description of the options
      for this bit.  It should read:

                            Value     Meaning
                            0         NoAck is never used
                            1         NoAck on send only
      The default is 1. OS/2 LAN Server 1.1 will only use NoAck mode with
      "send."

 29  When active, the requester will send a requester buffer of data to the
      Server along with its request for "big buffers" to use for large file
      transfers.  This may save time if the Server has a limited number of
      "numbigbufs" in relation to the number of requesters trying to send large
      files.

 30  Values other than "1" are normally used only for debug purposes.

 31  No comment.

 SERVER

 srvheuristics= in IBM.LAN.INI

 BIT  ADDITIONAL DESCRIPTION

  0  This bit must be active here and in the requester (bit 0) for
      opportunistic locking to take effect.  See description given there.

       1  "Client" is equivalent to requester.  This bit pertains to "reading
      ahead" to the Server's buffers (big buffers and requester buffers) from
      the file system and cache.

  2  "Client" is equivalent to requester.  This bit pertains to "writing
      behind" from Server's buffers (big buffers and requester buffers) to the
      file system and cache.

  3  This bit must be active here and in the requester(bit 8) for the "chain
      send" NETBIOS command to work.

  4  THE DEFAULT FOR THIS DIGIT SHOULD BE CHANGED FROM 1 TO 0 (DEACTIVATED) to
      prevent wasted CPU cycles in an OS/2 LAN Server environment.

  5  Not significant in the OS/2 LAN Server environment; only for old DOS
      applications on DOS Server.

  6  Server priority is set to allow other applications to have CPU access
      also, if required.

  7  This bit pertains to directory searches(DosFindFirst) and provides for
      additional memory to be allocated dynamically instead of locking it up
      when it may not be needed.

  8  The scavenger is a high priority Server thread which monitors the network
      for errors, writes to the error log and audit trail, sends alerts, etc.

  9  This bit provides capability to disable read-ahead/write- behind buffering
      in case some application breaks with this significant performance
      enhancer.

 10  No additional comment.

 11  This is important to DOS requesters attempting to share programs on the
      Server.  The DOS program loader opens ".exe" and ".com" files in
      compatibility mode which would otherwise prevent sharing of that program
      file.

 12  No additional comment.

 13  Appendix A has an error; it should read "If this is set to a value larger
      than numbigbuf=, then it is reset to the value numbigbuf-1."  The use of
      64KB(big buffers) for read-ahead involves a trade-off between large file
      transfer and small record reads and writes.  As long as you have two 64KB
      buffers remaining in the Server for each requester doing concurrent large
      file transfers, then you should be able to use the remaining 64KB buffers
      for read-ahead without a penalty.

 14  If active, this bit will also convert "/" to "\" in path specifications.

 15  A file opened in "deny none" sharing mode can be locked by the Server, as
      long as there are no other requests for access to that file, so that
      buffering can be used to enhance performance.  The Server assumes
      exclusive usage of the file, and so, will prevent the second requester
      from accessing the file until buffer data has been flushed(written to
      disk). This bit sets the time at which the Server will break the lock and
      grant access to the second request.

 16  No additional comment.

            GENERAL TUNING CONSIDERATIONS

 o HEAVY RANDOM I/O USERS NEED LARGE CACHE IN SERVER

 o HEAVY FILE TRANSFER USERS NEED LOTS OF "numbigbufs" IN SERVER

 o IF MANY CONCURRENT USERS, USE LOTS OF "numreqbufs" AND "numfiletasks" IN
   SERVER

 o UNIQUE LAN ENVIRONMENT REQUIRES EXAMINATION/EXPERIMENTATION OF
   WORKSTATION/SERVER HEURISTICS OPTIONS

                 SUMMARY

 o IMPROVED PERFORMANCE OVER DOS/PCLP.

 o DEFAULT SERVER DISK CACHE IS IS INSUFFICIENT IN MOST CASES.

 o DISK CACHE DOES NOT CACHE SEQUENTIAL FILES - USE VDISK IF LARGE SHARED FILES
   ARE REGULARLY RETRIEVED FROM SERVER.

 o FILE I/O OPEN/CLOSE OVERHEAD IS HIGHER IN OS/2 THAN DOS - USE FILE SHARING
   MODES, OPENING/CLOSING FILES INFREQUENTLY (NORMALLY THIS IS THE CASE).

 o MAKE USE OF IBMLAN.INI PARAMETER OPTIONS USING THE ABOVE REFERENCED
   DOCUMENTS. LAN SERVER


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3. LAN SERVER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.1. Apply ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0000                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen
 FILENAME: LANL0000.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 10:03am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

  Granting permission to use a subdirectory does NOT grant permission to use
 any lower subdirectory.  For example, suppose you have an application ABC in
 directory C:\APPS\ABCAPP.  You create a file alias ALLAPS which is C:\\APPS,
 with universal Read and Execute permissions.  You create an application
 definition for ABC which uses ALLAPPS as its root, with the Remaining Path To
 Program = \ABCAPP to get you to the application itself.  In this case the user
 will get an access control violation.  You have granted access to C:\APPS, but
 not to C:\APPS\ABCAPP.

  However,LanServer does provide a quick way to grant access to "child" subdirectories.

  APPLY:Located in the Full Screen Interface, under Definitions-Access
 Controls-Access.  APPLY provides a tool to propagate permissions for a given
 alias. There are some cautions associated with this command.

  1. There is no function to directly undo an APPLY. Suppose you APPLY the
     profile for D: to all of the D: drive.  This action will traverse all the
     subdirectories of D:, creating individual, independent access profiles for
     each subdirectory, where all the new profiles are copies of the starting
     profile.  There is no function to automatically delete these profiles,
     though it can be done manually via Definitions- Access Control-Servers.

  2.  APPLY can have unintended results.  Suppose you attempt to undo an APPLY
     by setting the universal profile of C: to `N' (no access) and APPLYing
     that.  Users will now be unable to logon because they now have no access
     of any of the C: drive (e.g. LAN Server code and files ).  This is to say
     that their Access Control Profiles have been replaced.

  3.  If you perform an APPLY, you will REPLACE all Access Control Profiles for
     all lower level subdirectories, and access control work that was
     previously performed will be overwritten.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.2. Auditing on the Server. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0001                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen
 FILENAME: LANL0001.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 10:24am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

  You may wish to turn on the server's auditing facility to track accesses to
 various resources (Actions, Statistics and Logs, Audit trails...). Note that
 auditing does not take place unless IBMLAN.INI has been updated to enable it,
 by setting the parameter AUDITING=YES, and the AUDIT TRAIL parameter on the
 `Create An Access Control Profile' screen has been set accordingly.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.3. Access Rights ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0002                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen
 FILENAME: LANL0002.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 10:26am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 Validation processing for any access request proceeds as follows:

  1. The user gains access to a resource using an appropriate alias.  No access
     validation is done at the time of this implicit NET USE.

  2. The user attempts to open the resource, requesting the ability to perform
     certain types of operations (say Read and Write).

  3. LAN Server maps the name of the resource, as specified by the user, back
     to the name of the real resource as stored on the server.  For example,
     depending on the alias used, the user may open F:\GAZORT.TXT, which is
     really the server's C:\ASUB\BSUB\CSUB\GAZORT.TXT.  Validation is performed
     using the server's name for the file.  The specified ALIAS used to gain
     access to the file plays no role in access validation.

  4. LAN Server attempts to find an access profile for the specified resource
     (filename) being opened. If none is found, LAN Server attempts to find an
     access profile for the subdirectory containing that resource (the file),
     i.e. the "parent" subdirectory.  If none is found for this "parent"
     subdirectory in which the resource resides, the LAN Server attempts to
     find an access profile for the root of the drive containing the resource.
     Unlike PCLP and LAN Server 1.0, intervening subdirectories are not
     checked. (Pipes and printers have an artificial "root directory").

  5. If no access profile can be found (filename, immediate "parent" directory,
     or drive root directory), then access is denied.

      If an access profile is found:

  6. Is the userid named in that access profile ? If so, the permissions listed
     there govern what he can do.  No further checking is needed or performed.
     If the userid is not named, then:

  7. Is the userid's GROUP named in that access profile?  If so, the
     permissions listed there are added (union) to the universal permissions
     (next step).

  8. The universal permissions in that access profile (together with the
     GROUP's permissions, if any) determine what the user can do.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.4. Separator Page On LAN Attached Printer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0003                          ENTERED BY: JGABAY @ ADTSUPP
 FILENAME: LANL0003.IPF             SOURCE: OS2LAN12 Forum
 DATE: 02/20/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 1:23pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 MODIFIED BY: JGABAY @ ADTSUPP                     DATE: 02/20/91  TIME: 1:31pm

 To create a separator page for a LAN printer you first have to modify the
 Print Manager parameters for the queue to which the printer is attached.

 In Print Manager:

 o Select Setup+Queues then select the shared printer queue (usually LPT1Q) and
   select Change.

 o In the Network options field enter SEPARATOR="SeparatorFileName" where
   SeparatorFileName is the fully qualified name of a separator page file on
   the servers local disk, and the quotes must be present. If a DRIVER=
   statement is already present in that field, put the SEPARATOR= statement
   immediately after it.  A space should be used as separator between the
   DRIVE= and SEPARATOR= parameters.

 o Save the changes.

 It is not necessary to re-boot the system after adding,changing or deleting a
 separator page.

 The separator page file has the following format:

   @ (the 'at' character) shows the start of a special command.

 These commands are:

     @L     - character literal (all bytes until next @)
     @H     - hexadecimal literal (one byte, i.e two hex digits)
     @B@S   - print next literal in block mode
     @U     - end block mode
     @N     - User name
     @D     - Date
     @T     - Time
     @I     - Job ID
     @0     - (NB zero) end of line (newline)
     @n     - where n=number, n blank lines
     @E     - End separator page definition

 A sample banner page follows....

     @
     @H18
     @L                           Local Area Network@0
     @0
     @L                             Page Separator@0
     @0
     @L                         in the Following Document@0
     @0
     @B@S@L LAN@U@0
     @0
     @L  Token Ring LAN  /  OS/2 EE V1.2@0
     @1@L  Domain  : @H1B@H45@L******@H1B@H46@0
     @0@L  Server  : @H1B@H45@L******@H1B@H46@0
     @0@L  Printer : @H1B@H45@LIBM PROPRINTER@H1B@H46@0
     @1@L  Date    : @H1B@H45@D@H1B@H46@0
     @0@L  Time    : @H1B@H45@T@H1B@H46@0
     @0@L  Job-ID  : @H1B@H45@I@H1B@H46@0
     @0@L  Userid  : @H1B@H45@N@H1B@H46@0
     @0@L*******************************************************************@0
     @0@H1B@H45@0
     @B@S@L@N@U@0
     @0@H1B@H46@0
     @0@L*******************************************************************@0
     @E
 DOS LAN REQUESTER


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4. DOS LAN REQUESTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.1. Support of DOS LAN Requesters and AS/400 together. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0000                          ENTERED BY: Pettes, Michell H.
 FILENAME: LANN0000.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 1:36pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 IBM does officially support use of the DOS LAN Requesters and AS/ 400 PC
 Support together;  documentation for how to set up the products to share the
 LAN card is included in an appendix of the PC Support Operations Reference
 Manual.  There will not be enough memory if you attempt to use all the
 functions in both products, but there are reasonable working configurations
 using subsets of each product.

  If memory does turn out to be a problem, the combination of a 3rd party
 product called Carousel and an IBM PRPQ called WCMME (Workstation Connectivity
 Memory Management Enhancement) allows the two products to be loaded in
 separate partitions and swapped in and out with a hot key.

  If the customer is looking for "OFFICIAL" support, you may want to note that
 PC Support is not yet officially certified for Novell coexistence (although
 there is Novell support for the configuration, and IBM may add support in the
 future)...


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.2. New DLR Function call to get USERID and LOGON STATUS. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0001                          ENTERED BY: Romano, John M.
 FILENAME: LANN0001.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 1:39pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 A DLR Requester can get USERID and LOGON Status information by issuing the INT
 2A function call 7802.  This replaces the INT 21 function call 5E00 that was
 used for PCLP requesters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.3. Applying CSD's to DOS LAN Requester ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0002                          ENTERED BY: JGABAY @ ADTSUPP
 FILENAME: LANN0002.IPF             SOURCE:
 DATE: 02/13/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2/1.3
 TIME: 3:59pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 Applying OS/2 CSD updates to DOS LAN Requesters (LSP 1.2/1.3) can often be a
 tedious and time-consuming task, especially if you have to reload frequently
 or manage a large network.  The following instructions should help in
 simplifying and speeding-up the process:

  1. Install DOS LAN Requester on an OS/2 machine (it doesn't have to be your
     server).

  2. Create a file with the following entries:

     \os2

     \cmlib

     \ibmlan

     \sqllib

     \dbdrqlib

     \muglib

     These are the root directories that the CSD install program looks for.
     When it asks for a list of directories to be skipped, enter the name of
     file you just created. The program is still going to make you go through
     all the disks in set, but it goes much faster because it is not looking at
     every file in every directory in the set.

  3. After you have finished applying the CSD get a couple of blank diskettes
     and use XCOPY with the /S and /M options to backup up your work. /S and /M
     are used when there is a need to use XCOPY to copy several directories or
     an entire disk to diskettes with insufficient space.  When the target
     diskette is full, insert another diskette and execute the same XCOPY
     command as previously entered.  Repeat this procedure until the
     "Insufficient disk space" message doesn't appear and all files and
     subdirectories have been copied.  Using XCOPY in this manner avoids the
     drive/directory hassle of backup and allows you to copy these files the
     drive/directory combination of your choice.

     Warning:

  4. Before reloading/upgrading a DOS LAN Requester be sure to check the
     DOSLAN.INI file on both the system to be reloaded/upgraded and the
     diskettes you are using.  DOSLAN.INI on the diskettes will overwrite any
     customization you may have applied to the file on the target system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.4. DLR & Novell Netware Coexistence ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0003                          ENTERED BY: JGABAY @ ADTSUPP
 FILENAME: LANN0003.IPF             SOURCE:
 DATE: 02/15/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2+
 TIME: 3:04pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 MODIFIED BY: Gabay, J. T.                         DATE: 02/25/91  TIME:
                                                   10:23am

      IBM DOS Lan Requester and Novell Netware Shell Coexistence

 INTRODUCTION

 This document will briefly describe what is necessary to set up a DOS machine
 such that it can be a client to both an IBM OS/2 LAN Server and a Novell
 Netware Server.  This configuration currently applies only to the IBM
 Token-Ring LAN.  For more information please see, "IBM Personal Systems
 Technical Solutions", Issue 1, 1991 (G325-5010-00), page 17.  IBM DOS Lan
 Requester (DLR) and Novell's Netware shell can be configured to coexist in the
 same DOS client machine.  This document describes this environment and is
 divided into the following sections:

 o Modifying the "config.sys" File

 o Modifying the "autoexec.bat" File

 o Understanding the Coexistence Restrictions

 MODIFYING THE "CONFIG.SYS" FILE

 The client machine can be configured to support the coexistence environment by
 modifying the "config.sys" file.  The modifications will control which logical
 drive letters are available for use by the DLR and the Netware shell.  In
 addition, the Token-Ring adapter will be instructed to initialize an
 additional Service Access Point (SAP).

 o Logical Drive Letters The LASTDRIVE parameter in "config.sys" is used to
   control which logical drive letters are available for DLR and Netware to
   use.  The IBM DOS Lan Requester looks at LASTDRIVE as the "final" logical
   drive to assign while Netware uses LASTDRIVE as a "starting" point to assign
   logical drives.  If the default CONFIG.SYS is taken (LASTDRIVE=Z), it does
   not allow for Netware drive mappings.

   This drive assignment varies according to how many drives are desired for
   each server.  To split the number of available logical drives letters
   approximately in half, put the following statement in config.sys:
          LASTDRIVE=P This statement will divide the client machine's available
   drive letters as follows:

          A - F:  Six drives for local use; A and B for floppy's, C and D for
                  hard disks, E and F for a RAM disks, CD ROMs, etc..

          G - P:  Ten drives for DLR redirection (i.e., NET USE)

          Q - Z:  Ten drives for Novell redirection (i.e., MAP)

 o Additional Service Access Point The concurrent connection to IBM and Netware
   is handled through a single Token-Ring adapter card.  The config.sys change
   is needed so that the IBM and Netware requestors each have their own SAP.
   The device drivers that talk to the Token-Ring adapter are found in the LAN
   Support Program (LSP).  During normal  LSP installation, several "DEVICE="
   statements where added to config.sys. The following parameters must be
   appended to the existing "DEVICE=DXMT0MOD.SYS" statement which was added to
   the config.sys during LSP installation:

          O=YES ES=1

     For example:

          DEVICE=DXTM0MOD.SYS S=12 C=12 ST=12 O=YES ES=1

 MODIFYING THE "AUTOEXEC.BAT" FILE

 The sequence in which the client machine logs into the respective servers and
 performs logical drive redirections is critical in the coexistence
 environment.  The "autoexec.bat" file can be used to make sure that the proper
 sequence is followed.  In summary, the following statements should be added to
 autoexec.bat to force the proper sequence:

       NET START
       NET USE ...
       NET USE ...
       .
       .
       .
       IPX
       NET4      (assuming DOS 4.0 shell)
       Q:\login
       MAP ...
       MAP ...
       .
       .
       .

 The statements above force the IBM DOS Lan Requester to be started and all IBM
 drive letter aliases to be assigned before Netware is loaded. When the DLR is
 operational and all aliases have been assigned, the Netware shell (for DOS
 4.0) is loaded.  After the Netware shell is loaded, the "login" command is
 visible on drive "Q:" (because LASTDRIVE=P). Finally, the autoexec.bat file
 then performs Novell drive letter MAPpings.

 UNDERSTANDING THE COEXISTENCE RESTRICTIONS

 IBM DOS Lan Requester (DLR) and Novell's Netware shell can peacefully coexist
 in the same DOS client machine.  The config.sys and autoexec.bat changes show
 how this can be done with existing software and hardware products.  However,
 some restrictions apply to this environment that must be understood.  These
 restrictions are:

 o The DOS LAN Requester must be loaded and the user must logon to the IBM
   Server before the Netware requester is started.

 o After logging off the IBM Server, further logons to the IBM network are not
   possible when the Netware shell is loaded.

 o NET USEs done after the Netware shell is loaded must contain a NULL password
   override.  For example: This will NOT work: NET USE P: \\IBMSERVER\netname
     This will work   : NET USE P: \\IBMSERVER\netname ""

 o For PCLP-ES users, all of the above restrictions apply with the addition
   that logging out of the IBM Server will cancel ALL redirected drives,
   including Netware drives.  Although these restrictions do not prohibit use
   of the coexistence environment, they are somewhat inconvenient.  Included in
   this package is a small "terminate and stay ready" (TSR) program that will
   solve the login/logout restriction for DLR users (not PCLP users).  While
   the TSR (coexist.com) has not been rigorously tested by IBM, it has been
   shown to successfully allow DLR users to login and logout of IBM Servers
   while the Netware shell is loaded.  The TSR has also been shown to enable
   IBM's OfficeVision/2 LAN, OS/2 Office DOS Requester Feature to work in the
   coexistence environment.  To use "coexist.com", it must be loaded before and
   after the "NETx" shell. For example, the following modifications to
   "autoexec.bat" are necessary:

           NET START
           NET USE ...
           NET USE ...
           .
           .
           .
           IPX
           COEXIST   <------ run before NETx
           NET4
           COEXIST   <------ run after NETx
           Q:\login
           MAP ...
           MAP ...
           .
           .
           .

 Warning:

     Please note that "COEXIST.COM" is not an IBM Licensed Program Product and
     is provided "AS-IS".  It can be obtained from your IBM SE.  The SE will
     insure that the accompanying "AS-IS" licensing agreement is signed and
     mailed to the indicated address.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.5. DLR/Windows 3.0 Installation/Operation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0004                          ENTERED BY: Gabay, J. T.
 FILENAME: LANN0004.IPF             SOURCE: Doc Nr S33F-9436-00
 DATE: 03/11/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.3
 TIME: 2:02pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 MODIFIED BY: Gabay, J. T.                         DATE: 03/12/91  TIME: 2:24pm

 DOS LAN Requester 1.3/Windows 3.0

 Installation and Configuration Guidelines:

 o Windows Support Modules
 o Installing Windows
 o Using Windows / DLR
 o Remote IPL

 In addition to this reference, you may need to consult the following
 publications:

 o IBM Operating System2 Local Area Network Server Version 1.3 DOS LAN
   Requester User's Guide
 o IBM Operating System/2 Local Area Network Server Version 1.3 Getting Started
 o Operating System2 Local Area Network Server Version 1.3 Network
   Administrator's Guide
 o The documentation that came with Windows.
   CUSTOMIZATION


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.5. CUSTOMIZATION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.5.1. Fullname, Comment fields in NET WHO ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0000                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen
 FILENAME: LANC0000.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2+
 TIME: 10:31am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

  How to get data into the FULLNAME and COMMENT fields displayed in the NET WHO
 command:

 FROM the SERVER:

    NET WHO userid /FULLNAME:"This is the FULLNAME field"
    NET WHO userid /COMMENT:"This is the COMMENT field"

 FROM a WORKSTATION:

    NET ADMIN \\servername /C NET USER userid /FULLNAME:"FULLNAME"
     or
    NET ADMIN \\servername /C NET USER userid /FULLNAME:\"FULLNAME WITH SPACES\"

    Note:  the use of backslashes is necessary when using embedded blanks.
     or
    NET ADMIN \\servername /C
    NET USER userid /FULLNAME:"FULLNAME WITH SPACES"
    EXIT

 Note:  No backslashes are necessary when continuing commands on next line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.5.2. Access of CDROM across Network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0001                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen
 FILENAME: LANC0001.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.0+
 TIME: 10:42am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

  There is a way to access removable drives (i.e. CDROM) across the network:

  ON THE SERVER:

   NET SHARE cdrom=D:\
   NET ACCESS D:\ ADD userid:R:

 ON THE REQUESTER:

   NET USE D: \\servname\cdrom


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.5.3. PROFILE.CMD for all Users. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0002                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen
 FILENAME: LANC0002.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.0+
 TIME: 10:47am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

  If you would like to use a PROFILE.CMD that gets executed identically for
 every user, and still give the user the option to customize his own, the
 following procedure will work:

  1. Assign each user a common drive (Ex: R:)

  2. Assign each user a private drive at logon (Ex: S:)

  3. Create a PROFILE.CMD of:

        START /WIN R:PROFILE.CMD

        EXIT

  4. Copy this PROFILE.CMD to each user's directory.

  5. Create a PROFILE.CMD on R: that executes the repetitive tasks, and also
     add:

        IF EXIST S:PROFILE.CMD CALL S:PROFILE.CMD


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.5.4. Access Control for Files and Directories ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0003                          ENTERED BY: JGABAY @ ADTSUPP
 FILENAME: LANC0003.IPF             SOURCE: OS2LAN12 FORUM
 DATE: 02/14/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2+
 TIME: 1:32pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 Some basic rules for building access control profiles:

  1. The basic entity upon which the access control system is built is the
     "file".  In this sense, directories can also be considered to be "files".
     Inheritance of access profiles does NOT automatically propagate down the
     subdirectory tree!  Each entity may or may not have an access control
     profile.  If it does not, then a simple set of rules determines where a
     default access control profile is located.

  2. When a new entity is created it automatically gets an access control
     profile which is a copy of the profile in effect in the parent directory.
     This means that access control does propagate down subtrees as they are
     created, but via generation of explicit access control profiles.

  3. For existing subdirectory trees it is possible to force propagation of the
     access control profile of the root of the tree down the tree via an
     explicit operation by a network administrator using one of the access
     control operators from the pulldown menus.  This creates or updates all
     access control profiles below the subtree root at the instant it is
     performed only.  It does not cause any permanent change in the rules for
     new entities created after it is done.

  4. The default access control profile rules are a bit strange.  If a user
     wants to access a file which has a profile then the profile is checked for
     the user first, then any group the user is in, then the universal access
     level.  The user gets the first access level found in this profile.  If
     the file has no profile then the same process is applied to the directory
     the file is in (which may or may not have a profile).  If the directory
     does not have a profile, then a default profile for the entire physical
     drive (not the alias drive) is consulted.  This profile is identified by
     the access control entity name "C:", for instance, without the backslash
     which would make it an ALIAS for the C: root directory, which is a
     different animal entirely.
 MISCELLANEOUS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.6. MISCELLANEOUS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.6.1. Error Codes in UPMS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0000                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen
 FILENAME: LANM0000.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.1+
 TIME: 10:35am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

  If you are running User Profile Management Services (UPMS)  out of the
 Desktop Manager and receive an error, you will be referred to a 'reasoncode'.
 These are network  error codes or OS/2 error codes , so to discover which
 error occurred, use:

 (If over 2000)    HELP NETxxxx

 (If under 2000)    HELP xxxx

 where: xxxx = reason code number


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.6.2. Check For Domain Controller From Additional Server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0001                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen
 FILENAME: LANM0001.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.0+
 TIME: 2:13pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

  To Check for domain controller before starting the additional server:

 Add the following statements to the STARTUP.CMD on the additional server:

 :LOOP
 NET START SRV
 IF ERRORLEVEL 1 GOTO LOOP


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.6.3. How to get a Print Server to allow Separator Pages between Print Jobs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0002                          ENTERED BY: Pettes, Michell H.
 FILENAME: LANM0002.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 2:20pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

  Once you've designed your separator page, you need to tell the print server's
 queue to use it.

  1. Hot key to Print Manager

  2. Select "Setup" from the Action Bar.

  3. Select "Queues" from the Pull-down.

  4. Select a shared queue and press "Change".

  5. In the "Network Options" field add SEPARATOR="d:\dir\sepname.ext" and
     press "Change".

     Note:  You may need to reboot the server with all LAN goodies disabled for
     the changes to be saved.

  6. Repeat for any other shared printers.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.6.4. Quick Way To Get Adapter Address ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0003                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen
 FILENAME: LANM0003.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.0+
 TIME: 4:34pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

  A quick way to locate an adapter address is:

     TYPE C:\CMLIB\ACSLAN.LOG

 This file is created each time the driver is started.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.6.5. Back Up of NET.ACC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0004                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen
 FILENAME: LANM0004.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.0+
 TIME: 4:36pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

  The instructions for backing up the NET.ACC file before starting the LAN
 Requester given in the "Network Administrator's Guide" , page 3-6, will result
 in backing up the corrupt copy of the file before you detect that it's
 corrupt.  To avoid the problem, multi-level backups are needed.  Rather than a
 single COPY command shown in the manual, use something like:

  First Startup After Install:

      COPY C:\IBMLAN\ACCOUNTS\NET.ACC C:\IBMLAN\DCDB\DATA\NETBK.AC1

  Second Startup After Install:

      COPY C:\IBMLAN\DCDB\DATA\NETBK.AC1 C:\IBMLAN\DCDB\DATA\NETBK.AC2

      COPY C:\IBMLAN\ACCOUNTS\NET.ACC C:\IBMLAN\DCDB\DATA\NETBK.AC1

  All Times Afterwards:

      COPY C:\IBMLAN\DCDB\DATA\NETBK.AC2 C:\IBMLAN\DCDB\DATA\NETBK.AC3

      COPY C:\IBMLAN\DCDB\DATA\NETBK.AC1 C:\IBMLAN\DCDB\DATA\NETBK.AC2

      COPY C:\IBMLAN\ACCOUNTS\NET.ACC C:\IBMLAN\DCDB\DATA\NETBK.AC1

  In this way, there is a backup of the three previous startup versions of
 NET.ACC.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.6.6. Rebuilding A Corrupted NET.ACC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0005                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen
 FILENAME: LANM0005.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.0+
 TIME: 4:41pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

  If your NET.ACC file on the Domain Controller gets corrupted and you have no
 backup available, you can recopy the default file from the Extended Edition
 Diskette.  It is on the diskette in packed format (use unpack in \install).
 The format of unpack is:

      UNPACK <drive><path>fn.ft <drive><path>

  (i.e.  UNPACK A:NET.AC@ C:\IBMLAN\ACCOUNTS )

 You will need to add the SERVERNAME as a user and add it to group SERVERS.
 You can do this manually, through UPM or from the command line, but it is
 better to use the executable that install uses to do this because it will set
 things such as account disabled and account already expired for security
 purposes.  The executable is ADDSVRIN.EXE, which exists in packed form on the
 LAN SERVER diskette. The format of ADDSVRIN is:

      ADDSVRIN  machineid (1 or 2) lanroot

   where:

      machineid = servername

      1 or 2   = 1 - member, 2 - domain controller

      lanroot  = c:\ibmlan or d:\ibmlan

  The next step is only necessary for a domain controller. Unpack RSD1.EXE from
 the LAN SERVER diskette. Run:

      RSD1  lanroot  machineid

  This will create an initialized DCDB and will destroy all existing DCDB definitions.

  If you lose an Additional Server's NET.ACC, you only have to recreate the
 Access Control List for server resources on that server. The USER and GROUP
 definitions will be rebuilt from the Domain Controller the next time NETLOGON
 starts up.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.6.7. Can't Start NETLOGON - Error 3056 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0006                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen
 FILENAME: LANM0006.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.0+
 TIME: 4:54pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 If you experience the following errors starting NETLOGON:

 ERROR:NET3056 System Error
 OS/2 Error 5 has occurred
 Access Denied


 It most likely indicates your Additional Server and Domain Controller are out
 of synch. To synch back up, use the following procedure:

 Make sure server is started (NET START SERVER)
 Login as Administrator
 Make sure NETLOGON is not started (NET STOP NETLOGON)
 NET ADMIN \\DOMCONTNAME /C NET USER ADDTLSVRNAME PASSWORD

  (PASSWORD = dummy password)
 NET ACCOUNTS /ROLE:STANDALONE
 NET USER ADDTLSVRNAME PASSWORD
 NET ACCOUNTS /ROLE:MEMBER
 NET START NETLOGON


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.6.8. Error NET3195 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0007                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen M.
 FILENAME: LANM0007.IPF             SOURCE: OS2LAN12 FORUM
 DATE: 02/08/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.0+
 TIME: 11:32am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 MODIFIED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen M.                DATE: 02/11/91  TIME: 8:55am

  NET3195: The following error occurs when there is a problem with a  NET BIOS
 call.  A data structure will be displayed. This is the  Network Control Block
 structure used in the Net Bios function calls. The items of interest are :

     1st byte     command name   this is the function that failed
     2nd byte    return code     this is the return code from the failing
 function.

 In the example below the function is 0xB6
     NB_ADD_GROUP_NAME
 And the return code if 0x4F
     NB_PERM_RING_STATUS

    NET3195:  An NCB error occurred (NET1).
    The NCB is the data.
      B6 4F 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00  .O..............
      00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 53 52 56 31 33 20  ..........SRV13
      20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 00 00 00 36 DD B4 09           ...6...
      00 4F 00 00 00 00 40 08 00 00 00 00 00 00 07 00  .O....@.........

 If you have the API data structures installed with the Communication Manager,
 these codes are documented in NETB_1_C.H.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.6.9. Ethernet Thin Cable Lengths ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0008                          ENTERED BY: JGABAY @ ADTSUPP
 FILENAME: LANM0008.IPF             SOURCE: Ethernet Forum
 DATE: 02/18/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 10:26am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 A few general guidelines for Ethernet "Thin" Cabling:

 * Maximum 185 meters per segment.

 * Max 30 stations (each T connector counts as a station, as does any other
   junction (like a wall face plate).

 * There must be 0.5m (19 inches) between T connectors.

 * No loops.

 * No branch segments (don't stick another wire out of a T connector).

 * 50 ohm wire (RG58 -- *NOT* the coax used for 327x) and 50 ohm terminators.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.6.10. Initiating Ethernet's Promiscuous Mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0009                          ENTERED BY: JGABAY @ ADTSUPP
 FILENAME: LANM0009.IPF             SOURCE: Ethernet Forum
 DATE: 02/18/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2+
 TIME: 10:37am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 If an Ethernet adapter's "MAC (device) driver" supports Microsoft/3Com's NDIS
 ("Network Driver Interface Specification") interface, then one can put an
 adapter into promiscuous mode by writing an NDIS "Protocol (i.e., non-MAC
 device) driver" that issues an NDIS "SetPacketFilter" primitive (with the
 "FilterMask" set to 2 ("promiscuous")) to the MAC driver.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.6.11. Configure Ethernet Adapters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0010                          ENTERED BY: JGABAY @ ADTSUPP
 FILENAME: LANM0010.IPF             SOURCE:
 DATE: 02/18/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2+
 TIME: 1:00pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

   CONFIGURING IBM, 3COM OR WESTERN DIGITAL 802.3/ETHERNET ADAPTERS

 This is not as straightforward as for Token-Ring; please read this document
 carefully.  In most respects, it applies to the use of LAN Support Program 1.2
 for either DOS LAN Requester or PC LAN Program 1.3.  Personal
 Communications/3270, AS/400 PC Support and the 8209 LAN Bridge are also
 mentioned.

 The term 'Ethernet', as used in this document, implies both Ethernet v2 and
 802.3 unless otherwise stated.  Ethernet is no longer a trademark of Xerox
 Corporation and can therefore legitimately be used generically.

 ADAPTERS SUPPORTED

 The LAN Support Program provides support for Ethernet/DIX v2 and IEEE 802.3
 protocols under DOS with the following adapters:

   IBM PS/2 Adapter/A for Ethernet Networks

   3Com Etherlink/MC 3C523 Micro Channel adapter

   3Com Etherlink II 3C503 PC-bus adapter

   Western Digital Ethercard PLUS/A (WDLAN-EP/A-F001)

   Western Digital Ethercard PLUS (WDLAN-ERP-F001)

 NOTE.  LSP 1.2 does not support the Ungermann Bass adapters which are
 supported by OS/2 EE.

 REQUIREMENTS

 To install LSP 1.2 for Ethernet, you will need:

   Lan Support Program v1.2;

   A printed copy of DXMINFO.001 (or .DOC) from the LSP diskette;

   A printed copy of PROTOCOL.INI from the LSP diskette;

   MACETH.DOS - NDIS driver for the IBM adapter;

   MACETH2.DOS - NDIS driver for a second IBM adapter;

   ELNKMC.DOS - NDIS driver for the 3Com 3C523 Micro Channel adapter;

   ELNKII.DOS - NDIS driver for the 3Com 3C503 PC-bus adapter;

   MACWD.DOS  - NDIS driver for either Western Digital adapter.

 NOTE.  ELNKMC.DOS is not supplied with the adapter.  Later in the year, it
 will be. In the meantime, it can probably be obtained from 3Com. The driver IS
 supplied with the IBM adapter, with the 3Com PC-bus adapter and with the
 Western Digital adapters.

 PHYSICAL ATTACHMENT

 All the adapters allow two types of connection to the LAN - via a BNC
 connector to a thin-wire LAN or via a D-shell connector and AUI (Attachment
 Unit Interface) cable to a thick-wire LAN.  The adapters provide an on-board
 transceiver for the BNC connection but require an external transceiver for the
 D-shell connection.  You have to select which type of connection to use; the
 methods are described below.  The default in all cases is BNC (on-board
 transceiver).

 CONFIGURING A PS/2 MACHINE (Reference diskette)

  1. Install the adapter and run Automatic Configuration or Set Configuration
     as usual.  The ADF for the card is supplied with it.

  2. For DOS LAN Requester and PC LAN Program, the adapter you want to use must
     be the primary.  Therefore, if you have both Ethernet and Token-Ring
     adapters and want to use the Ethernet for DLR or PCLP, you must make the
     Token-Ring card 'alternate'; the Ethernet card will then be primary by
     default.

  3. IBM Adapter

     a. The Interrupt Level, Adapter I/O Range  and RAM Address Range
        definitions override those in PROTOCOL.INI.

     b. Physical Connection.  This must be set by jumpers on the adapter (even
        though this is a Micro Channel adapter).

  4. 3Com Adapters

     a. Interrupt Level.  The configuration panels will show that the 3Com card
        uses Channel 3; this is IRQ (interrupt level) 3.

     b. Physical Connection.  This is set by means of the Reference Diskette.

  5. Western Digital Adapters

     a. Adapter IO Space Definition. This specifies the start of the IO range
        used by the adapter; the default is 0x280.  This definition and those
        for RAM Address and Interrupt Level override the definitions in
        PROTOCOL.INI.

     b. Physical Connection.  This must be set by jumpers on the adapter (even
        on the Micro Channel adapter).

 INSTALLING LAN SUPPORT PROGRAM

  1. In this example, we shall assume that you want to use an IBM adapter and
     to install LSP 1.2 in a directory called LSP12 on the C: drive.

     Make the directory (md lsp12) and make it current (cd lsp12), then make A:
     the current drive.  (During installation, you can select the drive on
     which to install LSP  - but you cannot specify a subdirectory).

  2. Run DXMAID from the A drive; this will do several things:

     a. Create a CONFIG.SYS or alter the existing one (and make a backup copy
        of it).

     b. Create a LANMAN directory and copy 3 files into it C. Add a NETBIND
        command to autoexec.bat and copy NETBIND.EXE to the root of drive C:
        (but see the note in section 9).

     c. Copy into the LSP12 directory the files necessary for the configuration
        that you specify via the panels.

  3. NDIS driver.

     You must copy this into the LSP12 directory.  The CONFIG.SYS will include
     a line:  device=\lsp12\XX.dos.  You must change XX to the name of the NDIS
     driver for your adapter; these names are given in the PROTOCOL.INI file,
     which you should print and in the Requirements section of this document.

     NOTE.  If you have two 3Com adapters in the same machine, create the NDIS
     driver for the second adapter by copying ELNKxx.DOS to ELNKxx2.DOS and
     adding the appropriate line to CONFIG.SYS immediately after the first NDIS
     driver line.

  4. CONFIG.SYS

     The relevant lines of a typical CONFIG.SYS will look like this:

             device=\LANMAN\PROTMAN.EXE (/I:(d:)\LANMAN) **see note 3.
             device=\LSP12\MACETH.DOS (device=\LSP12\MACETH2.DOS)
             device=\LSP12\DXMA0MOD.SYS
             device=\LSP12\DXME0MOD.SYS 400000100101
             device=\LSP12\DXMT0MOD.SYS S=12 C=12 ST=12 O=N  **see notes 1 & 2

     NOTE 1.  The O=N parameter is essential; if it is omitted or is O=Y, the
     LSP will try to open the adapter but will fail and you will get the
     message:  DXMT0 32E - Initialization or open error on adapter n.  The
     reason for this is that the NETBIND command (see section 9) must have been
     issued before the adapter is opened.  The DOS Lan Requester or PC LAN
     Program will open the adapter when they are started.

     NOTE 2.  The DLR installation process puts O=Y.  Depending on how  you are
     installing the DLR, you may get the chance to change this parameter during
     the installation process; if not, you must change it manually.

     NOTE 3.  If you install LSP 1.2 on a drive other than the boot drive, the
     LANMAN directory will be created on that drive, not on the boot drive.  In
     this case, you must add the /I:path parameter shown in the example above,
     so that PROTMAN knows where to find PROTOCOL.INI; by default, it looks for
     it in the LANMAN directory on the boot drive.  If you do not do this, you
     will get the messages:

             PRO0003 PROTOCOL.INI open failure
             MAC0001 Initialization failure
             PRO0023 Cannot find Protocol Manager

  5. LANMAN Directory

     DXMAID will create a LANMAN directory, into which it will put 3 files

      PROTMAN.EXE  - the protocol manager

      PROTOCOL.INI - the protocol manager's parameter file

      PRO.MSG    - a message file (this is created from the PROMSG.nnn
    file for your language).

  6. PROTOCOL.INI

     This is a text file which provides parameters for PROTMAN.EXE.  It is a
     good idea to print this because you may need to alter it and because
     reading it helps in understanding how the Ethernet systems work.

     You must set the BINDINGS= statement in this file to match the type(s) of
     adapter(s) you have; the default is for the 3Com MC adapter.  Note that
     you can define an Ethernet adapter as alternate (secondary) by putting a
     comma before the entry in the Bindings field - eg. BINDINGS = ,WDMAC.

  7. ADDING THE IBM ADAPTER DEFINITIONS TO PROTOCOL.INI

     The simplest way to do this is to copy the Western Digital section, twice,
     onto the root of PROTOCOL.INI and then modify it as follows:

     a. Change the heading to 'IBM PS/2 Adapter/A for Ethernet Networks'

     b. Change the BINDINGS module name from WDMAC to IBMAC (primary) and
        IBMAC2 (alternate).

     c. Change the DriverName to MACETH$ (pri), MACETH2$ (alt)**

     d. Change the RamAddress defaults to 0xC800

     e. Remove the remark about the IOBase parameter (invalid)

     f. Change the IOBase defaults to 0x200

     g. Remove the ; (semicolon) before the IOBase parameter (if you do not,
        the driver will not load - see section 3 of 'Configuring a PS/2
        machine')

        The IBM primary adapter section should look like this:

                ; -----------  IBM PS/2 Adapter/A for Ethernet Networks  ------------

                  [IBMAC]
                    DriverName = MACETH$
                    IRQ = 3
                    RamAddress = 0xC800
                    IOBase = 0x200
                    ReceiveBuffers = 16
                    ReceiveChains = 16
                    MaxRequests  = 10
                    MaxTransmits = 10
                    ReceiveBufSize = 256

  8. USING TWO LAN ADAPTERS

     a. Token-Ring or PC Network with Ethernet

        1. If you use a PC Network adapter with either a Token-Ring or an
           Ethernet adapter, the PCN adapter must be primary.  To configure the
           Ethernet adapter as alternate, put a comma before the module name in
           the BINDINGS = definition of PROTOCOL.INI, for example: ,IBMAC.

        2. Bear in mind that the DLR and PCLP  can use only the primary adapter
           if two of any kind are installed.  PC/3270 can use either or both.

     b. TWO ETHERNET ADAPTERS

        1. You can use two IBM or 3Com adapters in the same machine but only
           one Western Digital (there is no secondary NDIS driver and a renamed
           copy of the driver is not valid).  You can also use two Ethernet
           adapters of different makes.

        2. You need a command in CONFIG.SYS for the NDIS driver for each
           adapter. These commands must be consecutive, primary first.

        3. A driver for the second IBM adapter is provided (MACETH2.DOS).  For
           the 3Com adapter, you must create a driver by copying the primary
           driver and adding 2 to the name, eg. ELNKMC2.DOS.

     c. BINDINGS =.  The PROTOCOL.INI file gives examples of how to specify
        this command when you are using two adapters.  The sequence of the
        values in the BINDINGS = command determines the assignment (pri/alt).

  9. NETBIND Command

     DXMAID will put the command "NETBIND" as the first command in AUTOEXEC.BAT
     (but will not create autoexec.bat if this does not already exist) and will
     copy NETBIND.EXE to the root directory of the boot drive.  NETBIND will be
     in the LSP directory anyway; you can change its path if you like and
     delete the copy from the root.

     NOTE.  If you install LSP 12 on a drive other than the boot drive, the
     NETBIND command will not be put into autoexec.bat, nor will it be copied
     to the root of the boot drive.

 10. PERSONAL COMMUNICATIONS/3270

     If you want to run PC/3270 at the same time as the DLR or PCLP, you must
     add ES=1 EST=n (where n = the number of gateways the machine must use) to
     the DXMT0MOD line.  If you have only these two parameters here, they will
     cause LSP to open the adapter, so you must add O=N.

     NOTE 1.  The maximum PIU size allowed for PC/3270 on Ethernet is 1490; if
     it is set higher, you will get MACH682 in the OIA.

     NOTE 2.  Only the network station configuration is supported with
     Ethernet; the gateway is not supported (though tests have shown that it
     works perfectly well).

 11. AS/400 PC SUPPORT

     The default frame size in PCS is 1994; if you use this, you will get
     internal router errors (5123).  You must change the TRMF frame-size entry
     to 1496 or less.

 12. EXTENDED/EXPANDED MEMORY

     The use of high memory is supported with Ethernet for the DOS LAN
     Requester and most other applications that can use high memory.  Note,
     however, that Personal Communications/3270 is not supported in this
     environment.

     HIMEM.SYS, which allows applications to use the first 64kb of memory above
     1Mb (as exTENded memory) is supplied with the DLR.  This version, 2.04,
     has been superseded by v2.6, which is supplied with OS/2 EE  CSD WRx4064.
     Also supplied with the CSD is EMM386, which is an exPANded memory manager
     (LIM EMS v4) and works with HIMEM.

     The DLR is supposed to be able to use either extended or expanded memory
     (/HIM or /EMS) but we have found that /EMS sometimes hangs the machine and
     that it is better to use /HIM.  The memory saving is the same.

     NOTE. The version of EMM386 supplied on the CSD is faulty and a
     replacement is now available; the file sizes are 60964 and 61040
     respectively. The versions of HIMEM and EMM386 supplied with Microsoft
     Windows 3 can also be used.

 13. 8209 LAN Bridge

     The DLR, PCLP and PC/3270 work well across an 8209 to a server.  You must
     ensure that the 8209 is configured to support the correct protocol:

      Mode Priority 1 = Ethernet, 2 = 802.3)

      NETBIOS support is enabled (Forward LLC traffic, mode 1 = Y).

    NOTE.  Ethernet systems generally allow a maximum frame size of 1514 bytes.
    It is necessary to limit the transmit buffer size of Token-Ring devices to
    less than 1500 bytes if they are to communicate with Ethernet devices
    through an 8209; if you do not, applications may fail to load and files to
    copy etc.

    The default transmit buffer size on an OS/2 system is 1944 bytes when
    configured for Token-Ring; we suggest that you reduce it to 1496, which is
    the default used by OS/2 when configured for Ethernet.

 14. PROTOCOL to be used - 802.3 or Ethernet

     The default protocol for all the supported adapters is 802.3; this is also
     the default for LSP 1.2.  If you want to change to Ethernet on a DOS
     machine, you must add a parameter, thus:

           device=\lsp12\DXME0MOD.SYS 400000000001,,1

     The final figure, 1, indicates that Ethernet/DIX is to be used.

     Note the extra comma, which indicates the omission of the workarea
     parameter (adapter buffer space), ie. that the default will be used. If
     you want to increase the workarea, add a figure from 8 - 64 between the
     two commas (see DXMINFO section 10-5).

     NOTE 1.  All the Ethernet devices that must communicate with each other
     must be using the same protocol - either Ethernet/DIX or 802.3.  The
     defaults are as follows:

       LAN Support Program     802.3

       OS/2 EE Comms Manager   Ethernet/DIX

       8209 LAN Bridge        Ethernet/DIX

    So you will probably have to change something.  In the case of the DLR, if
    one of the systems is set for the wrong protocol, the DLR will start but,
    when you try to log on, you will get the message:

      NET248 Cannot contact the domain controller (which is not documented)

    NOTE 2.  In OS/2 EE CM, you can select the protocol in the IEEE 802.2
    profile of LAN Feature Profiles.

 15. SUMMARY of things to be careful about

     a. Obtaining and configuring the NDIS driver - see 3

     b. Adding O=N to DXMT0MOD .SYS - see 4, note 1

     c. The parameter for PROTMAN.EXE - see 4, note 3

     d. The BINDINGS= statement in PROTOCOL.INI - see 6, 8

     e. The IOBase definition for the IBM adapter - see 7

     f. The NETBIND program and command - see 9

     g. PC/3270's PIU size - see 10

     h. AS/400 PCS frame size - see 11

     i. The OS/2 CM transmit buffer size - see 13

     j. Configuring the correct protocol - see 13, 14


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.6.12. Message Name Not Added Error ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0011                          ENTERED BY: JGABAY @ ADTSUPP
 FILENAME: LANM0011.IPF             SOURCE: OS2LAN12 Forum
 DATE: 02/20/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2+
 TIME: 12:22pm                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 Problem: Logon results in the following message:

 The user ID was not added as a message name.

 Causes:

 o Both the machine name defined in IBMLAN.INI, and the userid defined in UPM
   are the same.

 o Occasionally the duplicate name may be on a separate LAN which is connected
   to yours by a bridge and/or backbone.

 Solutions:

 o Change UPM userid.

 o Change machine name defined in IBMLAN.INI (DOSLAN.INI for DLR).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6. OS/2 BASE OPERATING SYSTEM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

INSTALL/REINSTALL


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1. INSTALL/REINSTALL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.1. Installing dual boot feature after OS/2 is already installed. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0000                          ENTERED BY: Pettes, Michell H.
 FILENAME: OS2I0000.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/04/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 6:23pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 You do not need to reinstall OS/2 in order to get the dual boot feature. If
 you already have 1.2 installed, and you can get a copy of BOOT.COM (from the
 install diskettes) and BOOT.DOS, (from someone that has dual boot installed),
 the following will work:

  1. Copy BOOT.COM to C:\OS2:  UNPACK A:BOOT.CO@ C:\OS2

  2. Copy BOOT.DOS to C:\OS2\SYSTEM

  3. Create CONFIG.DOS and AUTOEXEC.DOS in C:\OS2\SYSTEM, containing the
     CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT you want to use when booting DOS.

  4. Get the DOS system files (IBMBIO.COM and IBMDOS. COM) into the correct
     place.  The simplest way to do this is to boot DOS, copy them from the DOS
     boot diskette, and run DVOO (from the PCTOOLS archive) if you have a DOS
     3.3-compatible partition, or VOODOO (available by REQUEST NONAME FROM
     RF17GDLE AT RALVM5) to put the files in place.

 ALTERNATIVE:  An alternate way to get the files in place is to use FILEMAN (or
               whatever you're comfortable with that can copy hidden files) to
               copy them from the DOS boot disk after clearing out the first
               two directory entries.  (Don't forget that the volume label is a
               directory entry, which does not show up in the FILEMAN or File
               Manager lists.  The LABEL command can be used to delete the
               volume label, and later recreate it.)

 It is strongly recommended that you use DVOO or VOODOO; it makes it much
 easier to get the DOS boot files in the right place. Just be sure you follow
 the directions exactly (run CHKDSK first, etc.).

  Now, you can do a BOOT /DOS to start DOS running.  If the boot record you
 copied in step 2 is not from the same DOS level as the one you want to use
 from the dual boot, have the correct level diskette in the A drive when you do
 the BOOT /DOS, and when DOS comes up, do a SYS C:.

 If you don't have access to a BOOT.DOS, you can create one by copying the
 first sector from a bootable DOS diskette.  (Use Norton Utilities, Disk
 Repair, DEBUG, or whatever.)

 Note:  This will make OS/2 happy as far as letting you execute BOOT /DOS, but
 will not create the right boot sector for a fixed disk. Do BOOT /DOS with the
 DOS boot diskette in the A drive, and once DOS is up, do a SYS C: to create a
 valid boot record.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.2. Reinstalling CONFIG.SYS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0001                          ENTERED BY: Pav, Eric M.
 FILENAME: OS2I0001.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/04/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 6:38pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 Since the config.sys file IS NOT updated by the reinstallation, you MUST
 complete the following steps to insure that all devices, paths, etc. are set
 accordingly.

  1. Make a backup of your current config.sys.

  2. Reinstall.

  3. Compare the new config.sys with the backup.

  4. Add any statements from the backup that are not in the new config.sys
     (i.e. path and device statements).

  5. Save config.sys.

  6. Reboot.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.3. Enabling COMx Ports ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0002                          ENTERED BY: Pav, Eric M.
 FILENAME: OS2I0002.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/04/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 6:41pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 During an OS/2 standard install, all COMxx.SYS files have been copied onto
 disk, but the DEVICE=COMxx.SYS statements have NOT been written into the
 config.sys file. You must type these statements in manually in order for the
 ports to become active.

 Note:  During a selective install, and by choosing serial device support, the
 files have been copied onto disk, and the DEVICE=COMxx.SYS statements have
 been added to the config.sys file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.4. Undocumented FDISK parameters. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0003                          ENTERED BY: Pav, Eric M.
 FILENAME: OS2I0003.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/04/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 6:45pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 Below are the undocumented parameters discovered in the FDISK command on the
 OS/2 1.2 installation diskette:

 Parameter                  Description

 /d                         Delete all partitions on first drive.

 /D                         Same as /d.

 /SiStiMInStaOlChECk        Checks a drive to see if it is already partitioned.

 /SiStiMInStaOlChECk:nn     This will check the primary partition size against
                            the specified size (nn) in megabytes. Results are
                            returned via ERRORLEVEL.

 /SiStiMInStaOlMaKE         Partitions the drive.

 /SiStiMInStaOlMaKE:nn      Create a primary partition on size nn.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.5. OS/2 1.3 Installation diskette failure - SYS1045 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0004                          ENTERED BY: Pettes, Michell H.
 FILENAME: OS2I0004.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/04/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.3
 TIME: 7:09pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 If you ever had an aborted install, REINST or whatever under 1.2 and a
 Subdirectory (with LAN DLL's usually) called DDITEMP is under OS2\INSTALL then
 the EE1.3 Install diskette will fail (on a version check).  The remedy is to
 erase the files and remove the subdirectory.  Normally, use of the 1.2 install
 diskette after the aborted install (or REINST) would clear these files and
 subdirectory out and there would be no problem. For whatever reason, we have
 found several machines where the files remained...and that causes the 1.3
 install error.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.6. Installing OS/2 on the D: drive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0005                          ENTERED BY: Pav, Eric M.
 FILENAME: OS2I0005.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/04/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 7:24pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 Can you put OS/2 on the D: drive?

 The base OS/2 code MUST be on the C: drive.  You may put any of the Extended
 Edition components on any of the other drives.

 Once you install the system, you have the ability to move most of the OS/2
 code to D: drive, but you have to change the paths in CONFIG.SYS.

 Note:  When a CSD is applied, it assumes that all of the base code is on the
 C: drive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.7. Redefining a Primary Partition when Installing OS/2 EE 1.2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0006                          ENTERED BY: Pav, Eric M.
 FILENAME: OS2I0006.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 8:23am                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 This is documented in the Getting Started section `Options Before Installing.'

  1. Backup all partitions on the disk drive.
  2. Boot the installation diskette from drive A:.
  3. When the IBM logo screen is displayed, press the ESC key.
  4. Delete all partitions on the fixed disk by typing the instruction FDISK
     /D.
  5. Reboot the installation diskette (CTL-ALT-DEL).
  6. Follow the instructions on your screen to complete installation of OS/2.

   This will create and format a primary partition, and install OS/2 on it.

   You can create other partitions with the FDISKPM command in OS/2.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.8. Updating your OS/2 Boot Diskette ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0007                          ENTERED BY: Pav, Eric M.
 FILENAME: OS2I0007.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 8:27am                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 Below is a short .CMD file you can use after installing each CSD to bring your
 OS/2 boot diskette up to the current level. Since your STARTUP.CMD and
 CONFIG.SYS on the diskette will be different from that on your hardfile, they
 should be read only on the diskette.

 BOOTUPDT.CMD

  @echo off
  sysinstx a:
  replace c:\*.* a: /u
  replace c:\os2\*.* a: /u
  replace c:\os2\dll\*.* a: /u
  replace c:\os2\system\*.* a: /u
 PERFORMANCE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2. PERFORMANCE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.1. Optimizing OS/2 1.2 Memory Usage ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0000                          ENTERED BY: Pettes, Michell H.
 FILENAME: OS2P0000.IPF             SOURCE: OS/2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 8:37am                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 Some swapping is normal for OS/2.  The Information and Planning Guide states
 that 2.5 MB swapper.dat is a typical average and still gives good performance.
 Use the worksheets in the Information and Planning Guide to establish your
 recommended memory requirements.

 Trade-off of application-area RAM to disk-cache RAM is a hard problem since we
 do not give any tools to help in this area.  The size of swapper.dat is NOT a
 good indicator for OS/2 1.2. Right now, Swapper preallocates disk space that
 usually ends up never being used.

 A tool on OS2TOOLS called THESEUS can help answer the question of how much
 memory is needed on a system for good performance by measuring the system's
 working-set memory usage. This is the tool used to develop the I&PG memory
 numbers. Beware, this tool is for the "technically inclined".

 Many users can control the amount of memory their system requires and thus the
 level of performance. OS2TOOLS is Real Goodness. However, people also need to
 understand that things like PMLOGO (just for example - not being picked on)
 take up a relatively large amount of memory for the function they provide.
 Folks with relatively small system memory and concerns about the performance
 should consider all the things they have active on their system, make a list
 of relative priority, and not automatically start the less important programs.
 On the other hand, some programs take a Long Time to start, and it is better
 to start those in startup.cmd and let them swap in-and-out as usage demands.
 Anybody with limited RAM and also using DOS Box should get the OS/2 SE 1.2
 refresh (or EE 1.2) and use memman=move,swap,SWAPDOS. This is almost like
 adding a half-megabyte of memory to your system.

 If you don't (or seldom) print large documents, and if you don't print two
 things at once, another way to save a couple hundred K is to disable
 print-spooling (in 1.2, one does this from a pull-down on the spooler panel).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.2. Obtaining maximal memory by changing MEMMAN= and THREADS= parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0001                          ENTERED BY: Pettes, Michell H.
 FILENAME: OS2P0001.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 8:42am                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 Beginning with SE 1.2 refresh and EE 1.2, you can obtain maximal memory by
 making two  changes to your CONFIG.SYS file. The configuration statement
 MEMMAN can be specified  as SWAPDOS.  This allows the DOS mode memory
 (approximately 500 KB) to be used by OS/2 applications when the DOS mode is
 not actively running in the foreground.

 (Syntax: MEMMAN=MOVE,SWAP,SWAPDOS)

 Also, OS/2 puts a limit on the number of threads that can be active in the
 system at any given time and sets aside 2k of RAM for each active thread.
 While changing THREADS= does not change number of active threads, it does put
 a cap on the maximum number of active threads.  The static requirements for
 THREADS= is about 92 bytes of low-fixed per THREAD.  Since it is low-fixed,
 reducing THREADS= can increase the size of the DOS BOX.  Without DOS BOX,
 changing THREADS=128 to THREADS=64 gives approximately 6K more free memory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.3. Putting .; in the LIBPATH in CONFIG.SYS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0002                          ENTERED BY: Pav, Eric M.
 FILENAME: OS2P0002.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 8:44am                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 Put .;(period semicolon) at the beginning of the LIBPATH in CONFIG.SYS.

 This way, the .DLL's can be kept in the directory where the rest of a package
 is kept, and the system will find them.  For some reason, OS/2 doesn't search
 the current directory for .DLL's before searching the LIBPATH.  Adding the
 current directory to the beginning of the LIBPATH rectifies the inconsistency.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.4. Causes for Swapping ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0003                          ENTERED BY: Pav, Eric M.
 FILENAME: OS2P0003.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 8:47am                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 Swapping occurs when:

  1. there is a request to allocate memory AND
  2. there is not enough contiguous free space to satisfy the request AND
  3. the system can not find enough movable/free blocks which can be moved
     around to create one single contiguous block which is large enough for the
     request.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.5. How to get more memory for DOS Box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0004                          ENTERED BY: Akers, Jim L.
 FILENAME: OS2P0004.IPF             SOURCE:
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 8:51am                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 |*** UPDATED FOR V1.2 ***

 Compatibility Box Memory Tip #1

 Don't load device drivers that you are not using! For example, many people
 have COM02.SYS loaded even though they never use it.

 Compatibility box memory tip #2

 To gain an extra 4K of DOS-box memory, remove or REMark out the TRACE=OFF
 statement in your CONFIG.SYS. Any TRACE statement will automatically allocate
 a 4K RAS Trace buffer. TRACE was the default in V1.1. In V1.2, this line was
 removed from default config.sys. Folks who migrated from 1.1 may still have
 this line.

 Compatibility box memory tip #3

 Part of the standard AUTOEXEC.BAT is the APPEND terminate-stay-resident
 program.  Many folks don't use APPEND, however it is indirectly used by a few
 DOS commands, for example, MORE. If you don't need APPEND, then remark or
 remove this line from your autoexec and save 5K. If you later get a SYS0318
 message, that means you should replace it.

 Compatibility box memory tip #4

 This tip is primarily useful for Extended Edition (especially LAN)
 configurations. The technique is to experiment with different ordering of
 device drivers. Sometimes this can gain/lose a couple K of memory. Beware, the
 ordering of some inter-dependent device drivers cannot be altered (POINTDD
 before MOUSE, etc).

 Compatibility box memory tip #5

 EGA.SYS provides "DosBox EGA Register Interface". This means it *may* provide
 a greater level of compatibility for EGA programs which run in the DosBox. If
 you find you don't need it, you can REMark out the EGA.SYS statement in your
 CONFIG.SYS and add 2K to your DosBox.

 Compatibility box memory tip #6

 For systems with mouse, here is a tip to save 1K (every K adds up!). Add the
 parameter QSIZE=3 to your mouse driver (MOUSE0X.SYS for V1.1 -or- MOUSE.SYS
 for V1.2). QSIZE defaults to 10 if it is not specified.

 Compatibility box memory tip #7

 The CONFIG.SYS statement THREADS= controls how many execution threads an OS/2
 system can concurrently run. The OS/2 SE default is 64. The OS/2 EE default is
 255. Every 12 or 13 threads cost 1K of DosBox. I recommend that you *not*
 reduce SE threads below 64 or EE threads less than 128. THREADS=128 is
 adequate for many simpler EE environments. Changing to THREADS=128 will add
 about 10K to your EE DosBox size . *Warning* The message you receive when you
 run out of threads is not intuitive -  it is the infamous return code 8, "out
 of memory" message.

 Compatibility box memory tip #8

 OS/2 EE V1.2 has a device driver called R0CSDD.SYS. This is the 'EE Common
 Services' device driver. Someday in the future it really may be common and
 needed by all. However, I have found that it can be removed from most systems
 (it appears to now only be required with SDLC and Multifunction adapter). It
 is very small, but remark out R0CSDD and save a half K.

 Compatibility box memory tip #9

 OS/2 SE V1.2 has a device driver called DOS.SYS. This driver allows Dual Boot
 and also allows DOS Programs to be 'launched' from the OS/2 menus. If you use
 neither of these features then remove DOS.SYS and add a little more to the
 dosbox.

 Compatibility box memory tip #10

 Upgrade. The Dos Box in OS/2 V1.2 is larger than V1.1. For LAN users, the EE
 V1.2 CSD '4064' or later NETBDD.SYS should be used to gain back another 16K of
 DOSbox.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.6. Optimizing CONFIG.SYS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0005                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen M.
 FILENAME: OS2P0005.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.0+
 TIME: 8:53am                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 Some things to change in your CONFIG.SYS to optimize performance:

 Change BUFFERS to 30-40. OS\2 default is 60.
 Change your SWAPPATH to your least frequently used drive.
 Put least used subdirectories at end of path. (this includes \CMDLIB and
 \SQLLIB for Extended Edition)
 Change PROTECTONLY to YES if you do NOT need the Dos Box.
 CUSTOMIZATION


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3. CUSTOMIZATION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3.1. The first physical group in the desktop window. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0000                          ENTERED BY: Pettes, Michell H.
 FILENAME: OS2C0000.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 9:53am                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 Under OS/2 1.2, the FIRST physical group in the desktop window is the one that
 is opened at startup time.  To get your group to be the first, point with
 mouse, press button 1, press and hold button 2, drag item to new location,
 release button 2.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3.2. Defining Window Size ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0001                          ENTERED BY: Pav, Eric M.
 FILENAME: OS2C0001.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 9:56am                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 Press and hold the Shift key. While doing that, use the mouse to select the
 lower right corner and drag it to the desired point.  Release the mouse button
 and the shift key. Now, look at the drive access light flicker - That is
 OS2.INI being updated.  Future windows are now set to the new size.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3.3. Increasing lines in the OS/2 Window. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0002                          ENTERED BY: Pav, Eric M.
 FILENAME: OS2C0002.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 10:00am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

  There is a simple command you can use to allocate more lines in an OS/2
 Window.  Just type:

 MODE co80,N

 Where N is the number of lines(1 to 102).  The default is 25.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3.4. Starting Groups without a STARTUP.CMD. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0003                          ENTERED BY: Pav. Eric M.
 FILENAME: OS2C0003.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.3
 TIME: 10:04am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 This is how to start different GROUPS without using a STARTUP.CMD for OS/2 SE
 1.3.

 Warning: This only works for OS/2 1.3.

  1. Go to Desktop Manager.

  2. Press PF10, and select Group.

  3. Select Properties. The Properties dialog box will let you specify which
     group is to be opened when the system is started.  It will also ask you if
     you want it opened minimized.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3.5. Loading customized Desktop Managers onto other machines. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0004                          ENTERED BY: Pav, Eric M.
 FILENAME: OS2C0004.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 10:23am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 How to copy identical Desktop Managers and Printer setups from one machine to
 another without having to manually set it up on each machine.

  1. Boot with a DOS diskette.

  2. Copy files OS2.INI and OS2SYS.INI into the C:/OS2 directory.

  3. Reboot OS/2.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3.6. Larger Fonts for the OS/2 Full-Screen. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0005                          ENTERED BY: Pav, Eric M.
 FILENAME: OS2C0005.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 10:26am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 To get a larger font in an OS/2 full screen session, type the following
 command at an OS/2 full screen prompt: MODE xxNN,rows

  where

 xx        Display mode. CO is for color, BW is for without color, and MONO is
           for monochrome.

 NN        Characters per line(cpl).  Both CO and BW have either 40 or 80 cpl
           and monochrome always has 80 cpl.

 rows      Number of rows. Valid row options are 12, 25, 43, or 50, depending
           on which display adapter is attached.

 EXAMPLE:

    MODE CO40,12


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3.7. Setting up OS/2 for Dual Screens. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0006                          ENTERED BY: Pav, Eric M.
 FILENAME: OS2C0006.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 10:29am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 The support for dual displays is dependent on an 8514/A adapter card,
 connected to an 8514 monitor and another monitor connected to the VGA
 connector. The lines required in the CONFIG.SYS file are:

  SET VIDEO_DEVICES=VIO_IBMVGA, VIO_IBM8514A

  SET VIO_IBMVGA=DEVICE(BVHVGA)

  SET VIO_IBM8514A=DEVICE(BVH8514A)

 Then COPY or UNPACK (or check and see if they are already there) the files to
 the /OS2/DLL directory using the following:

  UNPACK A:IBMBGA.DL@ C:/OS2/DLL

  UNPACK A:BVHVGA.DL@ C:/OS2/DLL

  UNPACK A:BVH8514A.DL@ C:/OS2/DLL

 The last step is to:    COPY C:/OS2/DLL/IBMBGA.DLL C:/OS2/DLL/DISPLAY.DLL

 Now reboot.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3.8. Printer Setup for 1.2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0007                          ENTERED BY: Pettes, Michell H.
 FILENAME: OS2C0007.IPF             SOURCE: Communications Manager System Test
                                    Division.
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 10:33am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 o 1.0 INSTALLING PRINTER DRIVERS

    - 1.1 Parallel Printers

        1. From the OS/2 full-screen prompt, copy the printer driver from
           diskette onto the root.

        2. Select "Desktop Manager" from the Task List.

        3. Select "Utilities" from the Desktop Manager Panel.

        4. Select "Control Panel" from the Utilities Panel.

        5. F10 to get to the Action Bar.

        6. Select "Installation" from the menu.

        7. Select "Add a Printer Driver" from the Pull-down.

        8. Change the Drive (A:\) to (C:\).

        9. Select option to "Add".

       10. Verify that the "Add Printer Driver" panel has been updated and
           lists the added printer drivers.

       11. Select the Printer Driver just added.

       12. Select the option to "Add".

    - 1.2 Serial Printers

      Note:  When dealing with Serial Printers, you must set up a second
      printer in Print Manager (i.e. a DUMMY PRINTER)

      See the section on "Setting Up Printers and Queues".

      ASIDE:  YOU CANNOT USE A SERIAL PRINTER AND SDLC ON AN AT MACHINE BECAUSE
      THEY USE THE SAME INTERRUPT LEVEL.

        1. From an OS/2 full-screen prompt, edit the "Config.sys" file.

        2. Enter the following statements:

          DEVICE=C:\OS2\COM01.SYS (for an AT)
          DEVICE=C:\OS2\COM02.SYS (for a PS/2)

        3. From an OS/2 full-screen prompt, copy the printer driver from
           diskette onto the root.

        4. Select "Desktop Manager" from the Task List.

        5. Select "Utilities" from the Desktop Manager Panel.

        6. Select "Control Panel" from the Utilities Panel.

        7. F10 to get to the Action Bar.

        8. Select "Installation" from the menu.

        9. Select "Add a Printer Driver" from the Pull-down.

       10. Change the Drive (A:\) to (C:\).

       11. Select option to "Add".

       12. Verify that the "Add Printer Driver" panel has been updated and
           lists the added printer drivers.

       13. Select the Printer Driver just added.

       14. Select the option to "Add".

       15. From the "Control Panel", F10 to "Options"

       16. Select "Communications Port" from the Pull-down.

       17. Select the appropriate communications settings.

       18. From an OS/2 full-screen prompt, enter the following commands.

          o CD C:\SPOOL
          o SPOOL /D:device_name O:com_port

             where:

             device_name = the device selected in the "Add Printer" panel of
             Print Manager.
             com_port = the communications port selected in the "Communications
             Port" panel of Desktop Manager.

             This command redirects the data from the dummy printer to the
             serial printer.

          o MODE com_port baud,parity,word_length,stop_bits

            where:

             com_port = the communications port selected in the "Communications
             Port" panel of Desktop Manager.
             baud = the baud rate selected in the "Communications Port" panel
             of Desktop Manager.
             parity = the parity selected in the "Communications Port" panel of
             Desktop Manager.
             word_length = the word length selected in the "Communications
             Port" panel of Desktop Manager.
             stop_bits = the stop bits selected in the "Communications Port"
             panel of Desktop Manager.

             This command sets the mode for the Communications Port.

 o 2.0 SETTING UP PRINTERS AND QUEUES

    - 2.1 Setting up Printers in Print Manager

       o 2.1.1 Change a Printer

           1. Hot key to Print Manager.

           2. F10 to get to the Action Bar.

           3. Select "Setup" from the menu.

           4. Select "Printers" from the Pull-down.

           5. Select the option to "Change".

           6. Enter the printer "Name".

             PRINTERn (where  n = the number associated with the printer)

           7. Enter the "Device".

             LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, COM1, COM2, or COM3 (depending on the device and
             the number of printers)

           8. Select the "Printer Driver" to be used with the printer.

           9. Verify that the default driver updates to match the printer
              driver selected above.

          10. Select the option to "Change".

          11. Select OK from the "Printers" panel.

          12. Then go to 2.2.1 (Change a Queue) and follow the instruction.

       o 2.1.2 Add a Printer

           1. Hot key to Print Manager.

           2. F10 to get the Action Bar.

           3. Select "Setup" from the menu.

           4. Select "Printers" from the Pull-down.

           5. Select the option to "Add".

           6. Enter the printer "Name".

             PRINTERn (where n = the number associated with the printer)

           7. Enter the "Device".

             LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, COM1, COM2, or COM3 (depending on the device and
             the number of printers)

           8. Select the "Printer Driver" to be used with the printer.

           9. Verify that the default driver updates to match the printer
              driver selected above.

          10. Select the option to "Add".

          11. Verify the list is updated.

          12. Select OK from the "Printers" panel.

          13. Then go to 2.2.1 (Change a Queue) and follow the instructions.

       o 2.1.2 Delete a Printer

           1. Hot key to Print Manager.

           2. F10 to get to the Action Bar.

           3. Select "Setup" from the menu.

           4. Select "Printers" from the Pull-down.

           5. Select the option to "Delete".

           6. Select YES from the Confirmation Panel.

           7. Verify the list is updated.

           8. Select OK from the "Printers" panel.

    - 2.2 Setting up Queues in Print Manager

       o 2.2.1 Change a Queue

           1. Hot key to Print Manager.

           2. F10 to get to the Action Bar.

           3. Select "Setup" from the menu.

           4. Select "Queues" from the Pull-down.

           5. Select the option to "Change".

           6. Enter the queue "Name".

             LPTnQ (where n = the number of associated with the queue)

           7. Select the "Printer" to be used by this queue.

           8. Select the option to "Change".

           9. Select OK from the "Queues" panel.

       o 2.2.2 Add a Queue

           1. Hot key to Print Manager.

           2. F10 to get to the Action Bar.

           3. Select "Setup" from the menu.

           4. Select "Queues" from the Pull-down.

           5. Select the option to "Add"

           6. Enter the queue "Name".

             LPTnQ (where n = the number associated with the queue)

           7. Select the "Printer" to be used by this queue.

           8. Select the option to "Add".

           9. Verify the list us updated.

          10. Select OK from the "Queues" panel.

       o 2.2.3 Delete a Queue

           1. Hot key to Print Manager.

           2. F10 to get to the Action Bar.

           3. Select "Setup" from the menu.

           4. Select "Queues" from the Pull-down.

           5. Select the option to "Delete".

           6. Select YES from the Confirmation Panel.

           7. Verify the list is updated.

           8. Select OK from the "Printers" panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3.9. What does the IOPL command in CONFIG.SYS do? ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0008                          ENTERED BY: Pav, Eric M.
 FILENAME: OS2C0008.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.0+
 TIME: 10:37am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 When IOPL authority is granted to an application, it enables that application
 to perform I/O (e.g. INPUT and OUTPUT instructions) and directly controls I/O
 devices.

 Normally, applications do not need this authority. OS/2 1.0 only allowed an
 IOPL=YES/NO statement in CONFIG.SYS, which basically said if you need IOPL
 authority for any application, then you give it to all applications.

 From OS/2 1.1 on, we can now specify specific modules which are authorized for
 IOPL.

 This command is useful, because it adds an extra layer of protection which may
 help if an application runs amok and accidentally tries to perform some direct
 I/O.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3.10. Changing the Cursor Speed. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0009                          ENTERED BY: Pav, Eric M.
 FILENAME: OS2C0009.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 10:41am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 Cursor speed too slow?

 To change the cursor speed, just place the Reference disk in the A: drive, and
 switch to the DOS box. Type A:SETRATE and you can set the cursor speed without
 booting the reference diskette.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3.11. Saving Windows under Desktop. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0010                          ENTERED BY: Pav, Eric M.
 FILENAME: OS2C0010.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 10:45am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 To save the postions of the windows, put them where and how you like them,
 then choose Save from the Desktop menu in the Desktop Manager.

 Next time you start CM, the windows should come up in the saved positions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3.12. Creating an OS/2 Bootable Diskette. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0011                          ENTERED BY: Pav, Eric M.
 FILENAME: OS2C0011.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.1 1.2
 TIME: 10:48am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 To create an OS/2 bootable diskette, do the following instuctions:

 For OS/2 1.1:

  1. Copy the Corrective Service diskette #1 to a second diskette. Do all
     further work on the copy.

  2. Clear the read only attributes on the following files:

    /csf.exe
    /fixos2.exe
    /sysfix.com
    /readme.txt
    /readme.doc
    /wr*.001
    /config.sys

  3. Delete the following files:

    /csf.exe
    /fixos2.exe
    /sysfix.com
    /readme.txt
    /readme.doc
    /wr*.001
    /fix/os2/*.*

  4. Remove the following directories:

    /fix/os2
    /fix

  5. Change the PROTSHELL statement of the /CONFIG.SYS file to:

        PROTSHELL=CMD.EXE

  6. Create a /STARTUP.CMD if desired.

   For OS/1.2:

  1. Copy the OS/2 1.2 INSTALL diskette to a second diskette.  Do all further
     work on the copy.

  2. Delete the files:

    *.RC@
    SYSINSTX.COM
    SYSINST?.EXE
    FDISK.COM
    CPYRIGHT.DAT
    INSTALL.LOG
    VDISK.SYS

  3. Edit the CONFIG.SYS and change to your specifications.  The following
     changes are necessary:

     PROTSHELL=A:/CMD.EXE
     LIBPATH=.;A:/
     PATH=.;A:/
     DPATH=.;A:/
     PROTECTONLY=YES

  4. Create a STARTUP.CMD, if desired.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3.13. Closing the STARTUP.CMD window. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0012                          ENTERED BY: Pav, Eric M.
 FILENAME: OS2C0012.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 10:51am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 To close and remove the STARTUP.CMD window after it has completed processing,
 simply type exit at the end of your STARTUP.CMD file.  To remove the window
 manually, bring the window into focus, and at the command prompt type exit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3.14. Removing the DOS Box. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0013                          ENTERED BY: Pav, Eric M.
 FILENAME: OS2C0013.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 10:53am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 How to turn the DOS box off.

 To deactivate the DOS box in OS/2 1.2, edit the PROTECTONLY=NO line in
 config.sys to PROTECTONLY=YES, then reboot.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3.15. Creating an icon for a Group Window. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0014                          ENTERED BY: Pav, Eric M.
 FILENAME: OS2C0014.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 10:56am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 To add an icon to a GROUP line item in a GROUP window, do the following steps.

  1. Create the .CMD file and add it to your GROUP.
  2. Create the .ICO file for use with the .CMD file.
  3. Put the .ICO and .CMD files in the same directory.
  4. Name the .ICO file the same as the .CMD file.

   Now, try it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3.16. Adding PASTE to an OS/2 Window Session. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0015                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen M.
 FILENAME: OS2C0015.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.3
 TIME: 10:58am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 In OS/2 vs. 1.3 you can enable PASTE to the CLIPBOARD from a text window. The
 default is shipped with PASTE disabled. To add this feature:

  1. Start an OS/2 Window session

  2. Select the Menu Icon in left hand corner

  3. Use the keyboard to cursor down to MARK

  4. Press Shift-Enter

  5. Close the window

 All new sessions of OS/2 Windows will contain PASTE in their menu. MIGRATION


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.4. MIGRATION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.4.1. Running DOS Applications on HPFS. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0000                          ENTERED BY: Pav, Eric M.
 FILENAME: OS2G0000.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 11:06am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 Running DOS Applications with  the High Performance File System.

 DOS applications running in the DOS compatibility session of OS/2 can access
 files in HPFS (but cannot use long file names).  If you physically boot DOS,
 it cannot access HPFS drives.  You need to keep your boot partition as a FAT
 partition if you want to boot DOS using the dual boot feature.

 If you currently have only one partition and it is a FAT partition. Your
 choices are:

  1. Stay the way you are.  You can boot DOS and OS/2, access all your files,
     and won't have to reformat, but will not have HPFS.

  2. Reformat your partition to HPFS.  You can only boot OS/2, and you will
     have to backup and restore all your files you want to save.

  3. Create two partitions:  the first one FAT, the second HPFS.  You can boot
     OS/2 and DOS. DOS can access the FAT partition only, while OS/2 can access
     both.  You will have to run FDISK and reformat both your partitions, so
     you will have to backup and restore all the files you want to keep.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.4.2. How to setup Disk Partitions when wanting to Migrate from 1.1 to 1.2 and Add Dual Boot. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0001                          ENTERED BY: Pettes, Michell H.
 FILENAME: OS2G0001.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.1 1.2
 TIME: 11:08am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 If you have 1.1 now you already have a DOS partition.  Before installing 1.2,
 install DOS 4.0.  Then when you install 1.2, you'll get dual boot AS LONG AS
 YOU DON'T FORMAT THE PARTITION.  So that DOS and OS/2 1.2 will work nicely
 together, it is suggested that you put 1.2 on your C: (FAT) drive (40-50MB)
 and a D: (HPFS) drive (3-8MB) for SWAPPER.DAT.  To do this, you'll probably
 have to FDISK (boot DOS install diskette and ESC) first, then install DOS,
 then 1.2.  Don't forget to save a copy of the important stuff from 1.1 like
 OS2.INI, CONFIG.SYS, AUTOEXEC.BAT, etc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.4.3. Installing EE 1.2 with Dual Boot over EE 1.1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0002                          ENTERED BY: Pav, Eric M.
 FILENAME: OS2G0002.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.1 1.2
 TIME: 11:14am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 Here are the steps to install Extended Edition 1.2 with Dual Boot when
 Extended Edition 1.1 is already installed.

 Note:  This only works if your hard disk is partitioned into C: and D: drives,
 having only Extended Edition 1.1 on the C: drive.

  1. Copy the following files from the C: drive to D: drive for safekeeping:

     /AUTOEXEC.BAT
     /CONFIG.SYS
     /OS2INIT.CMD
     /STARTUP.CMD
     /OS2/OS2.INI

  2. Boot a DOS 4.01 diskette.

  3. FORMAT C: /S

  4. Copy the DOS AUTOEXEC.BAT and the OS/2 CONFIG.SYS to C:/.

  5. MKDIR C:/OS2

  6. Copy the saved OS2.INI from D: to C:/OS2. This allows the install process
     to migrate your personalizations from 1.1 to 1.2.

  7. Install EE 1.2.

  8. By hand, compare the backup CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files with the new
     CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files, and make any necessary modifications in
     the path and device statements.

  9. Reboot and you're finished.
 MISCELLANEOUS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.5. MISCELLANEOUS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.5.1. Create an OS/2 Bootable Diskette to provide an OS/2 Command Prompt. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0000                          ENTERED BY: Pettes, Michell H.
 FILENAME: OS2M0000.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 11:19am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 The generic way (without using another disk as a master, i.e. the installation
 disk) is as follows:

 o Format a disk without system.

 o Copy the program 'SYSINSTX.COM' from OS\2 installation disk.

 o Make the C drive the current drive

 o Type 'SYSINSTX a:'

   where  a = the drive in which your formatted disk is inserted.

 o You now need to copy cmd.exe, all required DLLs (check with CHK4DLLS form
   OS2TOOLS), and appropriate CONFIG.SYS and STARTUP.CMD onto the disk.

 To create a bootable diskette from an installation diskette:

 Use the following commands (write protect installation: diskette):

  1. diskcopy a:

  2. erase a:*.*@

  3. erase a:sysinst*.*

  4. e a:config.sys (EDLIN, or EPM, EOS2, etc.)

   protshell=cmd.exe

 To create a bootable diskette from CSD Diskette #1:

 Use the following commands (write protect CSD diskette):

  1.  diskcopy a:

  2.  erase a:\fix\*.*

  3.  rmdir a:\fix

  4.  attrib -R a:*.*@

  5.  attrib -R a:csf.exe

  6.  attrib -R a:config.sys

  7.  erase a:*.*@

  8.  erase a:csf.exe

  9.  e a:config.sys (EDLIN, or EPM, EOS2, etc.)

   protshell=cmd.exe


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.5.2. Icon Editor tips. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0001                          ENTERED BY: Pettes, Michell H.
 FILENAME: OS2M0001.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 11:23am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

  1. How to convert a pointer into a bitmap

     Load the pointer into iconedit.  Select all of the image. Cut it into the
     clipboard.  Create a blank bitmap.  Paste the image into the bitmap, and
     save.

  2. How to get characters into a bitmap

     Run the font editor.  Select a character and cut it into the clipboard. Go
     back to the icon editor and paste.

     Note:  You can also get the magnify package which allows you to copy a
     part of the screen in the clipboard. Then you can use CUADRAW or PMDRAW to
     draw neat things, like fonts or metafiles, and cut that and paste it in
     your bitmap!

  3. How to delete CGA, VGA, or BGA images without losing any other images.

     In 1.2 you can create icons images for many different devices. Suppose you
     make a really great BGA icon and find that it looks terrible when shown on
     a VGA screen.  The icon editor lets you edit just the VGA copy and fix it
     up without changing the BGA version.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.5.3. Printer Spooler Problem - error message PVM5005 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0002                          ENTERED BY: Pettes, Michell H.
 FILENAME: OS2M0002.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 11:26am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 While (presumably) the .INI file may be bad, check out these things first:

  1. If you have added any RUN= statements to your CONFIG.SYS, REM them out and
     reboot.  If the spooler starts okay now, delete the RUN statements from
     the CONFIG.SYS and start the programs from STARTUP.CMD instead.

  2. Run CHKDSK C: /F to see if there are any problems on the hard disk.  If
     yes, run CHKDSK C: /F until no errors are reported.  Reboot and try to
     start the spooler.

  3. Backup all the files in C:\SPOOL to another directory, erase C:\SPOOL\*,
     and try to start the spooler.

  4. If all of the above fail, boot from the Install disk, backup OS2.INI and
     OS2SYS.INI, and use MAKEINI to rebuild those two files.  Reboot and try to
     start the spooler.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.5.4. How to switch between VGA and BGA on OS/2 EE 1.2. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0003                          ENTERED BY: Pettes, Michell H.
 FILENAME: OS2M0003.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 11:28am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 If you have installed an 8514/a adapter and want OS/2 Presentation Manager to
 use the full resolution of the screen, these are the steps you should follow.

 o How to Switch between VGA and BGA on OS/2 EE 1.2

   If you didn't have an 8514/a adapter in your machine when you installed
   OS/2, your default configuration is currently VGA (640 x 480).

   If you change your hardware so that your 8514 monitor is now connected to an
   8514/a video adapter you can use the 8514's much higher resolution of 1024 x
   768 (known as "BGA" (perhaps for "BIG Video Adapter"?)).

   That works out to 307,000 pels for VGA versus 786,000 for BGA - an increase
   of 156%

   The main benefit of BGA resolution to the end-user of developer is a much
   greater amount of visual information on the screen at once WITHOUT lessening
   the clarity and readability of that information.

   Note:  A BGA "desktop" is two and a half times as spacious as a VGA desktop.
   Also, an 8514/a adapter as sold in the USA, requires an additional memory
   kit in order to work as BGA.  You must move a jumper to activate the
   additional memory.  If you do not have the additional memory installed, do
   NOT read further!

 o How to Make the Switch to BGA

   Switching from VGA to BGA on OS/2 1.1 is a simple process (just follow 1b,
   3, 4, 5 below).

   In OS/2 1.2 the process is not quite as simple, since you'll also need to
   edit your Config.Sys file.  Even so, the process is straightforward and can
   be done in less than 5 minutes.  Later, if need be, you can as easily switch
   back from BGA to VGA.)

   The 5 steps in moving from VGA to BGA resolution are:

     1. Place three files into your C:\OS2\DLL directory:

       a. IBMVGA.DLL....... Driver for VGA resolution
       b. IBMBGA.DLL ....... Driver for BGA resolution
       c. BVH8514A.DLL ..... Something else needed for BGA resolution (?)

       You can get these files from the original OS/2 1.2 installation
       diskettes) ("Unpack" them using the Upack.Exe utility on the diskette)
       -- or from anyone who's already using BGA on OS/2 1.2.

     2. Edit your OS/2 1.2 CONFIG.SYS  file.  There will be 3 lines that look
        (almost exactly) like this:

       DevInfo=Scr,Vga,C:\OS2\VioTbl.Dcp
       Set Video_Devices=VIO_IBMVga
       Set VIO_IBMVga=Device(BVHVga)

       (I freely use caps and lowercase for improved readability; OS/2 doesn't
       mind.) These lines determine the type of video driver you'll be using.
       Right now, they are set for VGA.  To switch to BGA, change them to read:

       DevInfo=Scr,Bga,C:\OS2\VioTbl.Dcp

       Set Video_Devices=VIO_IBM8514a

       Set VIO_IBM8514a=Device(BVHVga,BVH8514a)

       (For future ease-of-switching, you might just comment out the 3 original
       lines (place "REM" in front of each line), and ADD in the 3 new lines.)

     3. Reboot your system with DOS, so you can replace OS/2's current video
        driver file with the new one you need.  (OS/2 won't let you fiddle with
        its driver files WHILE IT'S RUNNING - not even from within the DOS
        Compatibility Box.)

        Note:  If your C: drive is HPFS you cannot boot with DOS. In this case
        boot with the OS/2 1.2 INSTALL diskette and when you get the IBM Logo -
        press escape.  You can now follow the rest of these instructions.

     4. From DOS, change directory into C:\OS2\DLL and do:

        copy IBMBGA.DLL DISPLAY.DLL

     5. Reboot OS/2 (from disk) and see what happens. If all is well, OS/2 will
        be using the newly- replaced Display.Dll file from \OS2\DLL as the main
        video driver. You'll right off notice that the hourglass figure is
        smaller and more precisely drawn.  A great many other differences will
        be obvious as you run your usual PM programs...

 o How to Switch Back to VGA

   You may will want to switch BACK to VGA resolution some time (say, to see
   how you program looks on a vanilla VGA monitor.).  To make this switch,
   re-edit your CONFIG.SYS file to use the VGA lines.  Then reboot your system
   with DOS, change directory into C:\OS2\DLL, and do:

   copy  IBMVGA.DLL  DISPLAY.DLL

   and reboot with OS/2.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.5.5. File Manager Directory Default to D: ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0004                          ENTERED BY: Pav, Eric M.
 FILENAME: OS2M0004.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 11:31am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 Defaulting the Directory Tree to the D: drive.

 o If you invoke the File Manager from a command line:

     1. Set the current directory to D: before invoking it.

 o If you invoke the File Manager from Group-Main:

     1. Select File Manager as the object.

     2. Select Program from the action bar.

     3. Select Properties... from the pull down menu.

     4. Make the Working directory "D:\".

     5. Select the Change pushbutton.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.5.6. Determining level of OS/2 fixes. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0005                          ENTERED BY: Pav, Eric M.
 FILENAME: OS2M0005.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 11:35am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 To check a machine for the current and previous levels of all components of
 OS/2, simply type SYSLEVEL at an OS/2 command prompt.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.5.7. Left-handed Mouse. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0006                          ENTERED BY: Pav, Eric M.
 FILENAME: OS2M0006.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 11:37am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 Your left-hand can use the mouse while the right-hand uses keypad navigation,
 special function keys, and the enter key.  With a right-handed mouse, you must
 CONSTANTLY switch between the keypad, mouse, and the enter key.  Try it! You
 will become more productive and create less errors moving back and forth from
 the mouse to the keyboard. The left-handed mouse simply makes sense.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.5.8. Locking in an OS/2 Full-Screen. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0007                          ENTERED BY: Pav, Eric M.
 FILENAME: OS2M0007.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 11:40am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 One way to get an OS/2 full screen application to lock in ( without
 Presentation Manager ) is to change your PROTSHELL line in your CONFIG.SYS to
 :  PROTSHELL=C:/OS2/CMD.EXE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.5.9. Erratic Mouse Pointer Movement with Stationary Mouse. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0008                          ENTERED BY: Pav, Eric M.
 FILENAME: OS2M0008.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.0+
 TIME: 11:42am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 Erratic movements by the mouse pointer when the mouse is stationary is not a
 software problem. It's simply a sign that you need to clean your mouse. If you
 remove the track ball, you'll notice that the rollers probably have
 accumulated dirt or lint on them.  Cleaning the rollers should solve your
 problem.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.5.10. Improving the IBM Mouse Performance. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0009                          ENTERED BY: Pav, Eric M.
 FILENAME: OS2M0009.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 11:45am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 To improve the response time and performance of your IBM mouse, try this:

 Get a hold of the Microsoft mouse driver and load it onto your machine. Then
 edit your CONFIG.SYS by replacing the following lines:


    DEVICE=C:/OS2/IBMMOU02.SYS
    DEVICE=C:/OS2/MOUSE.SYS TYPE=IBMMOU$

 with these lines:


    DEVICE=C:/OS2/msps202.sys
    DEVICE=C:/OS2/MOUSE.SYS TYPE=msps2$

 Now reboot.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.5.11. How to Remove OS/2 from your machine. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0010                          ENTERED BY: Pav, Eric M.
 FILENAME: OS2M0010.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 11:47am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 To remove OS/2 for your harddisk:

  1. Boot with OS/2 install disk and Escape out of logo screen. This will give
     you a full-screen OS/2 session.

  2. Enter FDISK /D - this will remove all partitions.

  3. Boot DOS from floppy and run FDISK as usual.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.5.12. The Function of the Printer Drivers in OS/2 1.2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0011                          ENTERED BY: Pav, Eric M.
 FILENAME: OS2M0011.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 11:50am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 The job of the IBM4201 driver is to help transform a PM presentation space
 into ProPrinter output.  You may have noticed that the PM versions of
 applications no longer include printer device drivers.  They draw to the
 presentation space and depend on OS/2 to provide the drivers. For example, the
 Windows version of MICROGRAPHX DESIGNER had seven diskettes, while the PM
 version only two (an EXE, a HELP file, and four DLLs).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.5.13. The Purpose of the file EADATA.SF in OS/2 1.3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0012                          ENTERED BY: Pav, Eric M.
 FILENAME: OS2M0012.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.3
 TIME: 11:57am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 This file contains the extended attributes for your files and was created when
 you started using the traditional FAT (File Allocation Table) file system
 under OS/2 1.2.

 FAT directories cannot handle the extended attribute information so the system
 creates the file for you in the directory where you put the file.

 More and more programs are using the EA area to store information about their
 files. These include the OS/2 System editor, REXX command files, the File
 System, etc.

 It is very strongly suggested that you leave this file alone.

 If you access the same files from a non-OS/2 version of DOS, you may
 occasionally run into problems in OS/2. The OS/2 command CHKDSK can be used to
 recover from several kinds of problems related to this file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.5.14. Changing Directories using HPFS. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0013                          ENTERED BY: Pav, Eric M.
 FILENAME: OS2M0013.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/05/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 11:59am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 To issue the CD (change directory) command, when using HPFS, and the directory
 name contains spaces, you must place quotation marks around the full name. For
 example, to change to the directory named Bookmanager Library, you must type:

   CD "Bookmanager Library"

 Otherwise the CD command will treat the HPFS full name as two names and create
 two different directories, Bookmanager and Library.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.5.15. Disabling Hard-Error Popup Messages ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0014                          ENTERED BY: O'Reilly, Kathleen M.
 FILENAME: OS2M0014.IPF             SOURCE: OS2 FORUMS
 DATE: 02/20/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.1+
 TIME: 1:17pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

  If you do not like the pop-system error messages that occur when protection
 violation occurs, or when a disk drive is not ready, etc...  There is a line
 you can add to your CONFIG.SYS to disable this feature:

    AUTOFAIL=YES

 Note:  This will not get rid of the protection violations; however, the
 program will not display the screen dump, rather just end the program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7. PRESENTATION MANAGER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

WINDOWS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.1. WINDOWS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.1.1. Windows to PM/PM to Windows Conversion Reference ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0000                          ENTERED BY: Gabay, J. T.
 FILENAME: PMPW0000.IPF             SOURCE:
 DATE: 02/27/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 5:22pm                       CSD LEVEL: GA

 MODIFIED BY: Gabay, J. T.                         DATE: 03/06/91  TIME: 4:45pm

 The following is a list of Windows and Presentation Manager calls and
 structures with brief descriptions.  Double-clicking on the function will
 bring up a footnote window with the syntax for the call and a more detailed
 definition. When applicable, the definition is follow by additional
 references.  If an additional reference is highlighted, a more detailed
 explanation can be found in a programmer's reference.

 Due to the dynamic nature of Windows and Presentation Manager, it is next to
 impossible to present all available function calls.  Check your programmer's
 reference for complete listings.

 Window Function                    Description
 AccessResource                     Sets file pointer for read access
 AddAtom                            Creates an atom for a character string
 AddFontResource                    Adds a font resource
 AdjustWindowRect                   Converts client rectangle to window
                                    rectangle
 AllocResource                      Allocates memory for a resource
 AnsiLower                          Converts string to lower case
 AnsiNext                           Returns pointer to next character in string
 AnsiPrev                           Retreives a pointer to previous character
 AnsiToOem                          Converts ANSI string to OEM string
 AnsiUpper                          Convert string or character to uppercase
 AnyPopup                           Indicates if popup style window is visible
 Arc                                Draws an arc
 BeginPaint                         Prepares window for painting
 BitBlt                             Moves bitmap to destination device
 BringWindowToTop                   Brings child window to the top
 CallMsgFilter                      Passes message and code to filter
 CallWindowProc                     Passes message information
 Catch                              Copies execution environment to a buffer
 ChangeClipboardChain               Removes window from viewer chain
 ChangeMenu                         Changes a menu
 CheckDlgButton                     Places or removes a check
 CheckMenuItem                      Sets or removes a check from a menu
 CheckRadioButton                   Checks and unchecks buttons
 ChildWindowFromPoint               Determines window with point
 ClientToScreen                     Converts client coordinates to screen
 ClipCursor                         Restricts the cursor
 CloseClipboard                     Closes the clipboard
 CloseMetaFile                      Closes the metafile
 CloseSound                         Closes play device
 CloseWindow                        Closes a window
 CombineRgn                         Combines two regions
 CopyMetaFile                       Copies a metafile
 CopyRect                           Copies an existing rectangle
 CountClipboardFormats              Retrives number of formats in clipboard
 CountVoiceNotes                    Count number of voices in queue
 CreateBitmap                       Creates a bitmap
 CreateBitmapIndirect               Creates a bitmap
 CreateBrushIndirect                Creates a logical brush
 CreateCaret                        Creates a caret
 CreateCompatibleBitmap             Creates a compatable bitmap
 CreateCompatibleDC                 Creates a display context
 CreateDC                           Creates a display context
 CreateDialog                       Creates a modeless dialog box
 CreateDialogIndirect               Creates a modeless dialog box
 CreateDiscardableBitmap            Creates a discardable bitmap
 CreateEllipticRgn                  Creates an elliptical region
 CreateFont                         Creates a logical font
 CreateFontIndirect                 Creates a logical font
 CreateHatchBrush                   Creates a hatch brush
 CreateIC                           Creates an information context
 CreateMenu                         Creates an empty menu
 CreateMetaFile                     Creates a metafile display context
 CreatePatternBrush                 Creates a pattern brush
 CreatePen                          Creates a logical pen
 CreatePenIndirect                  Creates a logical pen
 CreatePolygonRgn                   Creates a polygon region
 CreateRectRgn                      Creates a rectangular region
 CreateSolidBrush                   Creates a solid brush
 CreateWindow                       Creates a window
 DefWindowProc                      Default message processing
 DeleteAtom                         Deletes an atom
 DeleteDC                           Deletes a display context
 DeleteMetaFile                     Deletes a meta file
 DeleteObject                       Deletes an object
 DestroyCaret                       Destroys a caret
 DestroyMenu                        Destroys a menu
 DestroyWindow                      Destroys a window
 DeviceModes                        Displays a dialog box for setting printer
                                    modes
 DialogBox                          Creates a modal dialog box
 DialogBoxIndirect                  Creates a modal dialog box
 DispatchMessage                    Dispatches a message
 DlgDirList                         Fills list box with directory names
 DlgDirSelect                       Copies selction from list box
 DPtoLP                             Converts device points into logical points
 DrawIcon                           Draws an icon
 DrawMenuBar                        Draws a menu bar
 DrawText                           Draws text
 EmptyClipboard                     Empties the clipboard
 EnableMenuItem                     Enables a menu item
 EnableWindow                       Enables or disables input to window
 EndDialog                          Ends a dialog
 EndPaint                           Ends window repainting
 EnumChildWindows                   Enumerates child windows
 EnumClipboardFormats               Enumerate formats in clipboard
 EnumFonts                          Enumerate Fonts
 EnumObjects                        Enumerate pens or brushes
 EnumProps                          Enumerates each property of hwnd
 EnumWindows                        Enumerates windows
 EqualRgn                           Compares two regions
 Escape                             Accesses special device facilities
 EscapeCommFunction                 Executes communication escape function
 ExcludeClipRect                    Creates a new clipping region
 FatalExit                          Halts windows
 FillRect                           Fills a given rectangle
 FillRgn                            Fills a region
 FindAtom                           Retrieves an atom
 FindResource                       Finds a resource
 FindWindow                         Finds a window
 FlashWindow                        Flashes a window
 FloodFill                          Fills an area of display
 FlushComm                          Flushes characters from device
 FrameRect                          Draws a border for a rectangle
 FrameRgn                           Draws a border for a region
 FreeLibrary                        Removes a library module
 FreeProcInstance                   Removes function instance entry
 FreeResource                       Removes a resource
 GetActiveWindow                    Retrieves handle of active window
 GetAtomHandle                      Retrieves handle of atom string
 GetAtomName                        Retrieves atom name
 GetBitmapBits                      Copies bits into buffer
 GetBitmapDimension                 Retrieves bitmap dimensions
 GetBkColor                         Retrieves background color
 GetBkMode                          Retrieves background mode
 GetBrushOrg                        Retrieves the brush origin
 GetBValue                          Retrieves the blue value
 GetCaretBlinkTime                  Retrieves caret blink rate
 GetClassLong                       Retrieves class information
 GetClassName                       Retreives the class name
 GetClassWord                       Retrieves window class information
 GetClientRect                      Copies client coordinates
 GetClipboardData                   Retrieves data from the clipboard
 GetClipboardFormatName             Copies format name
 GetClipboardOwner                  Retrieves handle of clipboard owner
 GetClipboardViewer                 Retrieves handle of clipboard viewer
 GetClipBox                         Copies rectangle from clip region
 GetCodeHandle                      Retrieves the handle of a code segment
 GetCurrentPosition                 Retrieves current position
 GetCurrentTime                     Retrieves current time
 GetCursorPos                       Retrieves cursor position
 GetDC                              Retrieves a display context
 GetDeviceCaps                      Retrieves device characteristics
 GetDlgItem                         Retrieves handle of dialog item
 GetDlgItemInt                      Translates text into integer
 GetDlgItemText                     Retrieves dialog item's text
 GetDoubleClickTime                 Retrieves double click time
 GetEnvironment                     Retrieves environment
 GetFocus                           Retrieves handle of window with focus
 GetGValue                          Retreives the green value of given color
 GetInstanceData                    Copies instance data
 GetKeyState                        Retrieves state of virtual kay
 GetMapMode                         Retrieves current mapping  mode
 GetMenu                            Retrieves handle of menu
 GetMenuString                      Retrieves menu text
 GetMessage                         Retrieves a message
 GetMessagePos                      Retrieves mouse position
 GetMessageTime                     Retrieves message time
 GetMetaFile                        Creates handle for a metafile
 GetMetaFileBits                    Retrieves metafile as bits
 GetModuleFileName                  Retrieves module filename
 GetModuleHandle                    Retrieves module handle
 GetModuleUsage                     Retrieves module reference count
 GetNearestColor                    Retrieves nearest color
 GetObject                          Retrieves object
 GetParent                          Retrieves handle of parent window
 GetPixel                           Retrieves RGB color of pixel
 GetPolyFillMode                    Retrieves polygon-filling mode
 GetProcAddress                     Retrieves function address
 GetProfileInt                      Retrieves integer value from win.ini
 GetProfileString                   Retrieves profile string
 GetProp                            Retrieves data handle from property list
 GetRelAbs                          Retreives the relabs flag
 GetROP2                            Retrieves current drawing mode
 GetRValue                          Retrieves the red value of a color
 GetScrollPos                       Retrieves the elevator position
 GetScrollRange                     Retrieves the scroll range
 GetStockObject                     Retrieves handle to stock pen
 GetStretchBltMode                  Retrieves stretching mode
 GetSubMenu                         Retrieves handle of popup menu
 GetSysColor                        Retrieves the system color
 GetSysModalWindow                  Retrieves handle of system-modal window
 GetSystemMenu                      Retrieves system menu handle
 GetSystemMetrics                   Retrieves information about system metrics
 GetTextColor                       Retrieves current text color
 GetTextFace                        Retrieves font's facename
 GetTextMetrics                     Retrieves font metrics
 GetThresholdStatus                 Retrieves threshold event status
 GetUpdateRect                      Retrieves update rectangle
 GetVersion                         Retrieves version number
 GetViewportExt                     Retrieves viewport extents
 GetViewportOrg                     Retrieves viewport coordinates
 GetWindowExt                       Retrieves window's coordinates
 GetWindowLong                      Retrieves window information
 GetWindowOrg                       Retrieves window origin
 GetWindowRect                      Retrieves screen coordinates of window
 GetWindowText                      Retrieves window text
 GetWindowWord                      Retrieves information about the window
 GlobalAlloc                        Allocates memory from global heap
 GlobalCompact                      Compacts memory
 GlobalDiscard                      Discards global memory
 GlobalFlags                        Retrieves memory type
 GlobalFree                         Frees global memory
 GlobalHandle                       Retrieves handle of global memory
 GlobalLock                         Locks global memory
 GlobalReAlloc                      Reallocates global memory
 GlobalSize                         Retrieves size of global memory block
 GlobalUnlock                       Unlocks global memory
 GrayString                         Writes grayed characters
 HideCaret                          Hides the caret
 HiliteMenuItem                     Highlights the menu item
 InflateRect                        Expands or shrinks the rectangle
 InitAtomTable                      Initializes atom hash table
 InSendMessage                      Queries if window is processing a message
 IntersectClipRect                  Forms a new clipping region
 IntersectRect                      Finds rectangle intersection
 InvalidateRect                     Invalidates a rectangle
 InvalidateRgn                      Invalidates a region
 InvertRect                         Inverts a rectangle
 InvertRgn                          Inverts a region
 IsChild                            Queries if window is a child
 IsClipboardFormatAvailable         Indicates if format is available
 IsDialogMessage                    Queries if message is for dialog
 IsDlgButtonChecked                 Indicates if button is checked
 IsIconic                           Queries if window is iconic
 IsWindow                           Queries if window handle is valid
 IsWindowEnabled                    Indicates if window input is enabled
 IsWindowVisible                    Indicates if window is visible
 KillTimer                          Stops the timer event
 LineDDA                            Computes successive points
 LineTo                             Draw a line
 LoadAccelerators                   Loads accelerator table
 LoadBitmap                         Loads a bitmap
 LoadCursor                         Loads the cursor resource
 LoadLibrary                        Loads a library module
 LoadMenu                           Loads a menu
 LoadResource                       Loads a resource
 LoadString                         Loads a string
 LocalAlloc                         Allocates local memory
 LocalCompact                       Compacts local memory
 LocalDiscard                       Discards local memory
 LocalFlags                         Retrieves status of local memory block
 LocalFree                          Frees local memory
 LocalFreeze                        Prevents memory compaction
 LocalHandle                        Retrieves handle of local memory
 LocalHandleDelta                   Sets number of new handle entries
 LocalInit                          Initializes local memory
 LocalLock                          Locks a memory block
 LocalMelt                          Compliment  of LocalFreeze function
 LocalNotify                        Sets callback function
 LocalReAlloc                       Reallocate memory block
 LocalSize                          Retrieves size of local memory block
 LocalUnlock                        Unlocks local memory
 LockData                           Locks data segment
 LockResource                       Locks a resource
 LockSegment                        Locks a segment
 LPtoDP                             Converts logical points to device points
 MakeProcInstance                   Retrieves an instance address
 MapDialogRect                      Converts dialog coordinates to screen
                                    coordinate
 MessageBeep                        Generates a beep
 MessageBox                         Creates a message box
 MoveTo                             Moves to a point
 MoveWindow                         Moves a window
 OemToAnsi                          Converts OEM string to ANSI
 OffsetClipRgn                      Moves a clipping region
 OffsetRect                         Moves a rectangle
 OffsetRgn                          Moves a region
 OpenClipboard                      Opens a clipboard
 OpenFile                           Opens a file
 OpenIcon                           Opens an iconized window
 OpenSound                          Opens sound playing device
 PaintRgn                           Fills a paint region
 PatBlt                             Creates a bit pattern
 PeekMessage                        Peeks at the message queue
 PlayMetaFile                       Plays a metafile
 Polygon                            Draws a polygon
 Polyline                           Draws a set of line segments
 PostAppMessage                     Posts a message to the application
 PostMessage                        Posts a message
 PostQuitMessage                    Posts a WM_QUIT message
 PtInRect                           Indicates if point is in rectangle
 PtInRegion                         Indicates if point is in region
 PtVisible                          Tests if point is visible
 Rectangle                          Draws a rectangle
 RectVisible                        Determines if rectangle is visible
 RegisterClass                      Registers a window class
 RegisterClipboardFormat            Registers a clipboard format
 RegisterWindowMessage              Defines a new window message
 ReleaseCapture                     Releases mouse input capture
 ReleaseDC                          Releases a display context
 RemoveFontResource                 Removes font from system table
 RemoveProp                         Removes name from property list
 ReplyMessage                       Replies to a message
 RestoreDC                          Restores a display context
 RoundRect                          Draws a rounded rectangle
 SaveDC                             Saves a device context
 ScreenToClient                     Converts screen coordinates to client
                                    coordinate
 ScrollWindow                       Scrolls contents of a window
 SelectClipRgn                      Selects a clipping region
 SelectObject                       Selects an object
 SendDlgItemMessage                 Sends a message to a dialog item
 SendMessage                        Sends a message
 SetActiveWindow                    Sets the active window
 SetBitmapBits                      Sets bitmap bits
 SetBitmapDimension                 Sets bitmap dimensions
 SetBkColor                         Sets background color
 SetBkMode                          Sets background mode
 SetBrushOrg                        Sets brush origin
 SetCapture                         Sets mouse capture
 SetCaretBlinkTime                  Sets caret blink rate
 SetCaretPos                        Sets caret position
 SetClassLong                       Sets long in WNDCLASS structure
 SetClassWord                       Sets word in class structure
 SetClipboardData                   Copies handle of data into clipboard
 SetClipboardViewer                 Sets clipboard viewer
 SetCursor                          Sets the cursor shape
 SetCursorPos                       Sets the cursor position
 SetDlgItemInt                      Sets dialog text to an integer
 SetDlgItemText                     Sets dialog text
 SetEnvironment                     Sets the environment
 SetFocus                           Sets the focus
 SetMapMode                         Sets mapping mode
 SetMenu                            Sets the window menu
 SetMetaFileBits                    Creates a memory metafile
 SetPixel                           Draws a pixel
 SetPolyFillMode                    Sets polygon filling mode
 SetProp                            Copies string to property list
 SetRect                            Fills a RECT structure
 SetRectEmpty                       Sets rectangle dimensions to empty
 SetRelAbs                          Sets the relabs flag
 SetResourceHandler                 Sets function address of resource handler
 SetROP2                            Sets current drawing mode
 SetScrollPosF                      Sets scroll bar box
 SetScrollRange                     Sets scroll bar range
 SetSoundNoice                      Sets sound noise
 SetSysColors                       Sets the system colors
 SetSysModalWindow                  Makes window system-modal
 SetTextColor                       Sets text color
 SetTimer                           Creates a system timer
 SetViewportExt                     Sets viewport  extent
 SetViewportOrg                     Sets viewport origin
 SetVoiceAccent                     Sets voice accent
 SetVoiceEnvelope                   Sets voice envelope
 SetVoiceNote                       Sets voice note
 SetVoiceQueueSize                  Sets voice queue size
 SetVoiceSound                      Sets voice sound
 SetVoiceThreshold                  Sets voice threshold
 SetWindowExt                       Sets window extent
 SetWindowLong                      Changes the window attribute
 SedWindowOrg                       Sets window origin
 SetWindowPos                       Sets window position, size, ordering
 SetWindowHook                      Installs a hook function
 SetWindowText                      Sets window caption
 SetWindowWord                      Changes window attribute
 ShowCaret                          Shows a caret
 ShowCursor                         Shows the cursor
 ShowWindow                         Displays or removes a window
 SizeofResource                     Retrieves size of resource
 StartSound                         Starts sound
 StopSound                          Stops sound
 StretchBlt                         Moves a bitmap
 SwapMouseButton                    Swaps left and right mouse button
 SyncAllVoices                      Sunchronize voices
 TextOut                            Writes a character string
 Throw                              Restores execution environment
 TranslateAccelerator               Translate a keyboard accelerator
 TranslateMessage                   Translates virtual keystrokes
 UnionRect                          Stores union of rectangles
 UnlockData                         Unlocks data segment
 UnlockSegment                      Unlocks a segment
 UnrealizeObject                    Resets origin of brush
 UpdateWindow                       Notifies application of updating need
 ValidateRect                       Validates a rectangle
 ValidateRgn                        Validates a region
 WaitMessage                        Waits for a message
 WaitSoundState                     Waits for sound
 WindowFromPoint                    Identifies window containing point
 WinMain                            Main entry point
 WriteProfileString                 Writes a string to win.ini

 PM Function                        Description
 DevCloseDC                         Closes a display context
 DevEscape                          Accesses special device facilities
 DevOpenDC                          Creates a display context
 DevQueryCaps                       Retrieves device characteristics
 DosAllocHuge                       Allocates memory from global heap
 DosAllocSeg                        Allocates memory from one segment
 DosFreeModule                      Removes a library module
 DosFreeSeg                         Frees global memory
 DosGetEnv                          Retrieves environment
 DosGetHugeShift                    Allocates memory from global heap
 DosLoadModule                      Loads a library module
 DosLockSeg                         Locks global memory
 DosMemAvail                        Compacts memory
 DosOpen                            Opens a file
 DosReallocHuge                     Reallocates global memory
 DosReallocSeg                      Reallocates global memory
 DosScanEnv                         Retrieves environment
 DosSubAlloc                        Allocates memory from a segment
 DosSubFree                         Frees memory from a segment
 DosSubSet                          Prepare a segment for sub-allocation
 DosUnlockSeg                       Unlocks global memory
 EM_CLEAR
 EM_COPY
 EM_CUT
 EM_PASTE
 GpiBeginArea                       Draws a polygon
 GpiBitBlt                          Moves bitmap to destination device
 GpiCharString                      Writes a character string
 GpiCombineRegion                   Combines two regions
 GpiConvert                         Converts device points into logical points
 GpiCopyMetaFile                    Copies a metafile
 GpiCreateBitmap                    Creates a bitmap
 GpiCreateLogFont                   Creates a logical font
 GpiCreatePS                        Sets mapping mode
 GpiCreateRegion                    Creates a rectangular region
 GpiDeleteBitMap                    Deletes a bitmap
 GpiDeleteMetaFile                  Deletes a meta file
 GpiDeleteSetId                     Deletes an object
 GpiDestroyPS                       Closes the metafile
 GpiDeleteBitMap                    Deletes a region
 GpiEqualRegion                     Compares two regions
 GpiFillPath                        Fills an area of display
 GpiIntersectClipRect               Forms a new clipping region
 GpiLine                            Draw a line
 GpiLoadBitmap                      Loads a bitmap
 GpiLoadFonts                       Adds a font resource
 GpiLoadMetaFile                    Creates handle for a metafile
 GpiMove                            Fills an area of display
 GpiOffsetClipRegion                Moves a clipping region
 GpiOffsetRegion                    Moves a region
 GpiPaintRegion                     Draws a border for a region
 GpiPlayMetaFile                    Plays a metafile
 GpiPtInRegion                      Indicates if point is in  region
 GpiQueryAttrs                      Retrieves current text color
 GpiQueryBackColor                  Retrieves background color
 GpiQueryBackMix                    Retrieves background mode
 GpiQueryBitmapBits                 Copies bits into buffer
 GpiQueryBitmapDimension            Retrieves bitmap dimensions
 GpiQueryClipBox                    Copies rectangle from clip region
 GpiQueryColorIndex                 Draws a pixel
 GpiQueryCurrentPosition            Retrieves current position
 GpiQueryDeviceBitmapFormats        Creates a compatable bitmap
 GpiQueryFontMetrics                Retrieves font's facename
 GpiQueryFonts                      Enumerate Fonts
 GpiQueryMetaFileBits               Retrieves metafile as bits
 GpiQueryMetaFileLength             Retrieves metafile length
 GetMetaFileBits                    Retrieves metafile as bits
 GpiQueryMix                        Retrieves current drawing mode
 GpiQueryModelTransformMatrix       Retrieves viewport extents
 GpiQueryNearestColor               Retrieves nearest color
 GpiQueryPS                         Retrieves current mapping mode
 GpiQueryPatternRefPoint            Retrieves the brush origin
 GpiQueryPel                        Retrieves RGB color of pixel
 GpiRestorePS                       Restores a display context
 GpiSaveMetaFile                    Saves a metafile
 GpiSavePS                          Saves a device context
 GpiSetArcParams                    Draws an arc
 GpiSetAttrMode                     Selects an object
 GpiSetAttrs                        Sets text color
 GpiSetBackColor                    Sets background color
 GpiSetBackMix                      Sets background mode
 GpiSetBitmapBits                   Sets bitmap bits
 GpiSetBitmapDimension              Sets bitmap dimensions
 GpiSetBitmapId                     Creates a pattern brush
 GpiSetClipRegion                   Selects a clipping region
 GpiSetColor                        Sets pixel color
 GpiSetMetaFileBits                 Creates a memory metafile
 GpiSetMix                          Fills a region
 GpiSetModelTransformMatrix         Sets viewport extent
 GpiSetPattern                      Sets pattern to fill a region
 GpiSetPatternRefPoint              Sets brush origin
 GpiSetPel                          Draws a pixel
 GpiUnloadFonts                     Removes font from system table
 WM_BUTTON1DOWN
 WM_BUTTON1UP
 WM_BUTTON2DOWN
 WM_BUTTON2UP
 WM_BUTTON3DOWN
 WM_BUTTON3UP
 WM_CHAR
 WM_ERASEBACKGROUND
 WM_FORMATFRAME
 WM_HITTEST
 WM_INITDLG
 WM_QUERYWINDOWPARAMS
 WM_SETFOCUS
 WM_SETWINDOWPARAMS
 WM_SHOW
 WinAddAtom                         Creates an atom for a character string
 WinAlarm                           Generates a beep
 WinAllocMem                        Allocates local memory
 WinBeginEnumWindows                Enumerates child windows
 WinBeginPaint                      Prepares window for painting
 WinCalcFrameRect                   Converts client rectangle to window
                                    rectangle
 WinCatch                           Copies execution environment to a buffer
 WinCloseClipbrd                    Closes the clipboard
 WinCopyRect                        Copies an existing rectangle
 WinCpTranslateString               Converts OEM string to ANSI
 WinCreateAtomTable                 Initializes atom hash table
 WinCreateCursor                    Creates a caret
 WinCreateHeap                      Main entry point
 WinCreateDlg                       Creates a modeless dialog box
 WinCreateMsgQueue                  Creates a message queue
 WinCreateStdWindow                 Creates a window
 WinCreateWindow                    Creates an empty menu
 WinDefWindowProc                   Default message processing
 WinDeleteAtom                      Deletes an atom
 WinDestroyCursor                   Destroys a caret
 WinDestroyHeap                     Destroys a heap
 WinDestroyMsgQueue                 Destroys a message queue
 WinDestroyWindow                   Destroys a window
 WinDismissDlg                      Ends a dialog
 WinDispatchMsg                     Dispatches a message
 WinDlgBox                          Creates a modal dialog box
 WinDrawBorder                      Draws a border for a rectangle
 WinDrawPointer                     Draws an icon
 WinDrawText                        Draws text
 WinEmptyClipbrd                    Empties the clipboard
 WinEnableWindow                    Enables or disables input to window
 WinEnableWindowUpdate              Draws a menu bar
 WinEndEnumWindows                  Ends enumerating child windows
 WinEndPaint                        Ends window repainting
 WinEnumClipbrdFmts                 Retrives number of formats in clipboard
 WinExcludeUpdateRegion             Copies rectangle from clip region
 WinFillRect                        Fills a given rectangle
 WinFindAtom                        Retrieves an atom
 WinFlashWindow                     Flashes a window
 WinFocusChange                     Sets the focus
 WinFreeMem                         Frees local memory
 WinGetCurrentTime                  Retrieves current time
 WinGetKeyState                     Retrieves state of virtual kay
 WinGetMsg                          Retrieves a message
 WinGetNextWindow                   Retrieves next window
 WinGetPS                           Retrieves a display context
 WinInSendMsg                       Queries if window is processing a message
 WinInflateRect                     Expands or shrinks the rectangle
 WinInitialize                      Main entry point
 WinIntersectRect                   Finds rectangle intersection
 WinInvalidateRect                  Invalidates a rectangle
 WinInvalidateRegion                Invalidates a region
 WinInvertRect                      Inverts a rectangle
 WinIsChild                         Queries if window is a child
 WinIsWindow                        Queries if window handle is valid
 WinIsWindowEnabled                 Indicates if window input is enabled
 WinIsWindowVisible                 Indicates if window is visible
 WinLoadAccelTable                  Loads accelerator table
 WinLoadDlg                         Creates a modeless dialog box
 WinLoadMenu                        Loads a menu
 WinLoadPointer                     Loads the cursor resource
 WinLoadString                      Loads a string
 WinMakePoints                      Converts client coordinates to screen
 WinMakeRect                        Copies rectangle from clip region
 WinMapDlgPoints                    Converts dialog coordinates to screen
                                    coordinate
 WinMapWindowPoints                 Converts screen coordinates of window
                                    points
 WinMessageBox                      Creates a message box
 WinNextChar                        Returns pointer to next character in string
 WinOffsetRect                      Moves a rectangle
 WinOpenClipbrd                     Opens a clipboard
 WinPeekMsg                         Peeks at the message queue
 WinPostMsg                         Posts a message
 WinPostQueueMsg                    Posts a message to the application
 WinPrevChar                        Retreives a pointer to previous character
 WinProcessDlg                      Queries if message is for dialog
 WinPtInRect                        Indicates if point is in rectangle
 WinQueryActiveWindow               Retrieves handle of active window
 WinQueryAtomName                   Retrieves atom name
 WinQueryClassInfo                  Retrieves class information
 WinQueryClassName                  Retreives the class name
 WinQueryClipbrdData                Retrieves data from the clipboard
 WinQueryClipbrdFmtInfo             Indicates if format is available
 WinQueryClipbrdOwner               Retrieves handle of clipboard owner
 WinQueryDlgItemShort               Translates text into integer
 WinQueryDlgItemText                Retrieves dialog item's text
 WinQueryFocus                      Retrieves handle of window with focus
 WinQueryMsgPos                     Retrieves mouse position
 WinQueryMsgTime                    Retrieves message time
 WinQueryPointerPos                 Retrieves cursor position
 WinQueryProfileInt                 Retrieves integer value from win.ini
 WinQueryProfileString              Retrieves profile string
 WinQuerySysColor                   Retrieves the system color
 WinQuerySysModalWindow             Retrieves handle of system-modal window
 WinQuerySysPointer                 Loads the cursor resource
 WinQuerySysValue                   Retrieves caret blink rate
 WinQuerySystemAtomTable            Copies format name
 WinQueryUpdateRect                 Retrieves update rectangle
 WinQueryVersion                    Retrieves version number
 WinQueryWindow                     Retrieves handle of parent window
 WinQueryWindowPos                  Queries if window is iconic
 WinQueryWindowRect                 Copies client coordinates
 WinQueryWindowText                 Retrieves window text
 WinQueryWindowULong                Retrieves window information
 WinQueryWindowUShort               Retrieves information about the window
 WinReallocMem                      Allocates local memory
 LocalReAlloc                       Allocates local memory
 WinRegisterClass                   Registers a window class
 WinReleasePS                       Releases a display context
 WinScrollWindow                    Scrolls contents of a window
 WinSendDlgItemMsg                  Places or removes a check
 WinSendMsg                         Changes a menu
 WinSetAccelTable                   Translate a keyboard accelerator
 WinSetActiveWindow                 Sets the active window
 WinSetCapture                      Releases mouse input capture
 WinSetClipbrdData                  Copies handle of data into clipboard
 WinSetClipbrdViewer                Removes window from viewer chain
 WinSetDlgItemShort                 Sets dialog text to an integer
 WinSetDlgItemText                  Sets dialog text
 WinSetHook                         Installs a hook function
 WinSetParent                       Sets the window menu
 WinSetPointer                      Sets the cursor shape
 WinSetPointerPos                   Sets the cursor position
 WinSetRect                         Fills a RECT structure
 WinSetRectEmpty                    Sets rectangle dimensions to empty
 WinSetSysColors                    Sets the system colors
 WinSetSysModalWindow               Makes window system-modal
 WinSetSysValue                     Sets caret blink rate
 WinSetWindowPos                    Brings child window to the top
 WinSetWindowText                   Sets window caption
 WinSetWindowULong                  Changes the window attribute
 WinSetWindowUShort                 Changes window attribute
 WinShowCursor                      Hides the caret
 WinShowPointer                     Shows the cursor
 WinShowWindow                      Displays or removes a window
 WinStartTimer                      Creates a system timer
 WinStopTimer                       Stops the timer event
 WinTerminate                       Main exit point
 WinThrow                           Restores execution environment
 WinUnionRect                       Stores union of rectangles
 WinUpdateWindow                    Notifies application of updating need
 WinUpper                           Convert string or character to uppercase
 WinUpperChar                       Convert string or character to uppercase
 WinValidateRect                    Validates  a rectangle
 WinValidateRegion                  Validates a region
 WinWaitMsg                         Waits for a message
 WinWindowFromID                    Retrieves handle of dialog item
 WinWindowFromPoint                 Determines window with point
 WinWriteProfileString              Writes a string to win.ini


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.1.2. PM to Windows Conversion Aid ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0001                          ENTERED BY: Gabay, J. T.
 FILENAME: PMPW0001.IPF             SOURCE: OS2WIN3 Forum
 DATE: 03/07/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 11:55am                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 Here is a short list indicating where an adequate windows function exist and
 where we have to do some C- implementation.

  PRESENTATION MANAGER
  (GPI Function Calls)    adequate implementation  C-implementation
                          with WINDOWS-function    required/possible

  GpiAssociate                                        dummy
  GpiBeginArea                                        YES
  GpiCharStringAt                YES
  GpiCreateLogColorTable         YES
  GpiCreatePS                                         YES
  GpiDeleteBitmap                YES
  GpiDestroyPS                                        dummy
  GpiEndArea                     YES
  GpiErase                       YES
  GpiLoadBitmap                  YES
  GpiMove                                             YES
  GpiPolyLine                    YES
  GpiQueryBitmapParameters       YES
  GpiQueryColor                  YES
  GpiQueryDevice                 YES
  GpiQueryFontMetrics                                 YES
  GpiQueryFonts                  YES
  GpiSetCharSet                  YES
  GpiSetColor                                         YES

  PRESENTATION MANAGER
  (WIN Function Calls)    adequate implementation  C-implementation
                          with WINDOWS-function    required/possible

  WinAddAtom                                          YES
  WinAddProgram                  NOT AVAILABLE
  WinAddSwitchEntry              NOT AVAILABLE
  WinAlarm                       YES
  WinAssociateHelpInstance       YES
  WinBeginEnumWindows            YES
  WinBeginPaint                  YES
  WinCreateAtomTable                                  YES
  WinCreateHelpInstance          YES
  WinCreateMsgQueue              dummy
  WinCreateStdWindow             YES
  WinCreateWindow                YES
  WinDefDlgProc                  dummy
  WinDefWindowProc               YES
  WinDeleteAtom                                       YES
  WinDestroyAccelTable           dummy
  WinDestroyAtomTable            dummy
  WinDestroyHelpInstance         YES
  WinDestroyMsgQueue             dummy
  WinDestroyWindow                                    YES
  WinDismissDlg                                       YES
  WinDispatchMsg                 YES
  WinDlgBox                                           YES
  WinDrawBitmap                  YES
  WinDrawText                    YES
  WinEnableWindow                                     YES
  WinEnableWindowUpdate          YES
  WinEndEnumWindows              YES
  WinEndPaint                    YES
  WinFillRect                    YES
  WinFindAtom                                         YES
  WinFreeErrorInfo               dummy
  WinGetErrorInfo                dummy
  WinGetLastError                dummy
  WinGetMsg                                           YES
  WinGetNextWindow               YES
  WinGetPS                       YES
  WinGetSysBitmap                YES
  WinInitialize                  YES
  WinInvalidateRect                                   YES
  WinInvalidateRegion            YES
  WinIsWindow                                         YES
  WinIsWindowEnabled                                  YES
  WinIsWindowVisible                                  YES
  WinLoadAccelTable                                   YES
  WinLoadDlg                                          YES
  WinLoadMenu                    YES
  WinLoadPointer                                      YES
  WinLoadString                                       YES
  WinLockWindowUpdate            YES
  WinMapDlgPoints                                     YES
  WinMessageBox                  YES
  WinPeekMsg                                          YES
  WinPostMsg                     YES
  WinQueryActiveWindow                                YES
  WinQueryAnchorBlock            dummy
  WinQueryAtomName
  WinQueryDlgItemText                                 YES
  WinQueryFocus                                       YES
  WinQueryPointer                YES
  WinQueryProfileInt                                  YES
  WinQueryProfileSize            dummy
  WinQueryProfileString                               YES
  WinQuerySwitchList                                  YES
  WinQuerySysPointer                                  YES
  WinQuerySysValue               YES
  WinQueryWindow                 YES
  WinQueryWindowPos              YES
  WinQueryWindowProcess          dummy
  WinQueryWindowPtr              YES
  WinQueryWindowRect                                  YES
  WinQueryWindowText             YES
  WinQueryWindowTextLength       YES
  WinQueryWindowULong            YES
  WinQueryWindowUShort           YES
  WinRegisterClass                                    YES
  WinReleasePS                   YES
  WinScrollWindow                YES
  WinSendDlgItemMsg              YES
  WinSendMsg                     YES
  WinSetActiveWindow                                  YES
  WinSetDlgItemText                                   YES
  WinSetFocus                                         YES
  WinSetMultWindowPos            YES
  WinSetOwner                    YES
  WinSetParent                                        YES
  WinSetPointer                                       YES
  WinSetPresParam                YES
  WinSetRect                     YES
  WinSetWindowPos                                     YES
  WinSetWindowPtr                YES
  WinSetWindowText                                    YES
  WinSetWindowULong              YES
  WinSetWindowUShort             YES
  WinShowWindow                                       YES
  WinStartTimer                                       YES
  WinStopTimer                                        YES
  WinSubclassWindow              YES
  WinSwitchToProgram                                  YES
  WinTerminate                   dummy
  WinTranslateAccel                                   YES
  WinValidateRect                                     YES
  WinWindowFromID                YES
  WinWriteProfileString                               YES


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.1.3. PM/Windows Clipboard Compatability Chart ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 TIP# 0002                          ENTERED BY: Gabay, J. T.
 FILENAME: PMPW0002.IPF             SOURCE: OS2WIN3 Forum
 DATE: 03/07/91                     RELEASE LEVEL: 1.2
 TIME: 12:30pm                      CSD LEVEL: GA

 Here is a Clipboard compatibility chart:

 (Some function call have been truncated in order to get required information
 to display on the same line.)

  ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
  Γöé        PM        Γöé       WIN3       Γöé     Description     ΓöéCompΓöé
  Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
  Γöé                  ΓöéChangeClipboardChaΓöéRemove a clip viewer Γöé    Γöé
  Γöé                  ΓöéCountClipboardFormΓöéHow many clip formatsΓöé    Γöé
  Γöé                  ΓöéGetClipboardFormatΓöéGet reg clip format  Γöé    Γöé
  Γöé                  ΓöéGetPriorityClipboaΓöéGet best format      Γöé    Γöé
  ΓöéWinOpenClipbrd()  ΓöéOpenClipboard()   ΓöéOpen the Clipboard   Γöé C2 Γöé
  ΓöéWinCloseClipbrd() ΓöéCloseClipboard()  ΓöéClose the Clipboard  Γöé C1 Γöé
  ΓöéWinEmptyClipbrd() ΓöéEmptyClipboard()  ΓöéClear  Clipboard     Γöé C1 Γöé
  ΓöéWinEnumClipbrdFmtsΓöéEnumClipboardFormaΓöéList stored formats  Γöé C1 Γöé
  ΓöéWinQueryClipbrdDatΓöéGetClipboardData()ΓöéGet data from clip   Γöé C1 Γöé
  ΓöéWinQueryClipbrdFmtΓöéIsClipbrdFormatAvaΓöéIs named format availΓöé C1 Γöé
  ΓöéWinQueryClipbrdVieΓöéGetClipboardViewerΓöéGet first clipbd viewΓöé C1 Γöé
  Γöé                  ΓöéRegisterClipboardFΓöéEstablish new clip foΓöé    Γöé
  ΓöéWinSetClipbrdData ΓöéSetClipboardData  ΓöéPut data into clipbd Γöé C2 Γöé
  ΓöéWinSetClipbrdOwnerΓöéSetClipboardData  ΓöéSet clipboard owner  Γöé C2 Γöé
  ΓöéWinSetClipbrdVieweΓöéSetClipboardViewerΓöéAdd to cb view chain Γöé C1 Γöé
  ΓöéWinQueryClipbdOwneΓöéGetClipboardOwner ΓöéWhich window owns cb Γöé C1 Γöé
  ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

   C1 = trivial compatibility
   C2 = compatibility with some effort
   C3 = major incompatibility


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These are the Categories that intend to be covered under
Compilers/Languages/Toolkit.

 o C/2
 o COBOL/2
 o FORTRAN/2
 o PASCAL/2
 o REXX
 o Toolkit
 o Miscellaneous


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These are the Categories that intend to be covered under Communications
Manager.

 o Install/Reinstall
 o Performance
 o Emulation Services
 o Host Print
 o Programming Support
 o Customization
 o Migration
 o Miscellaneous


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These are the Categories that intend to be covered under Database Manager.

 o Install/Reinstall
 o Performance
 o Query Manager
 o Remote DB Services
 o Database Services
 o Customization
 o Migration
 o Miscellaneous


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These are the Categories that intend to be covered under LAN Manager.

 o Install/Reinstall
 o Performance
 o Lan Server
 o Lan Requester
 o Dos Lan Requester
 o Customization
 o Migration
 o Miscellaneous


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These are the Categories that intend to be covered under OS/2 Base Operating
System.

 o Install/Reinstall
 o Performance
 o Customization
 o Migration
 o Miscellaneous


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These are the Categories that intend to be covered under Presentation Manager.

 o Dialog Manager
 o Messaging
 o Windows
 o Graphical Programming Interface
 o Menus
 o Dialog Boxes
 o Miscellaneous


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows Support Modules

OS2 LAN Server 1.3 provides compatibility with Windows. This chapter describes
the Windows dynamic link libraries (DLLs) and the Windows message pop-up
facility. It also discusses code page considerations.

Dynamic Link Libraries

To do network tasks such as displaying active servers, browsing available
resources, and managing print queues, Windows requires the use of network
application programming interfaces (APIs). Support for these APIs resides in
the dynamic link libraries NETAPI.DLL and PMSPL.DLL.

Message Pop-Up Facility

The message pop-up facility for Windows is WINPOPUP.EXE. The WINPOPUP.EXE file
is used in conjunction with the MSGPOPUP.EXE file. The MSGPOPUP.EXE file is
loaded into memory when the /POP parameter is included in the NET START
command. The WINPOPUP.EXE file displays received messages in a pop-up panel
while the Windows full-screen interface is active.

The NETAPI.DLL, PMSPL.DLL, and WINPOPUP.EXE files are provided on the DOS LAN
Requester diskettes and are installed with DOS LAN Requester.

Code Page Considerations

All servers and requesters in a domain should use the same national language
and code page. Windows only supports code page 819. OS/2 and DOS do not support
this code page. Systems with a national language other than US English may have
some characters that do not print or display correctly when sent from a Windows
workstation to a non-Windows workstation.

To avoid this problem, Windows users should only use the Windows message
facility to send messages to other Windows users. The NET SEND command or DOS
LAN Requester full-screen interface can be used to send messages to non-Windows
users. Also, Windows users should use a local printer rather than a network
printer. Documents created through Windows may not print correctly on a network
printer.

For more information on code pages, refer to OS/2 LAN Server 1.3 Getting
Started.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Installing Windows on a DOS LAN Requester

This section describes how to install Windows for use with DOS LAN Requester
and provides example AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS files. You must follow the
steps in this chapter as well as the steps in the Windows documentation to
install Windows for use with DOS LAN Requester. Windows can be installed before
or after DOS LAN Requester is installed. For more information about installing
DOS LAN Requester, refer to the OS2 LAN Server 1.3 DOS LAN Requester User's
Guide.

Installing Windows after DOS LAN Requester Is Installed

If you want to install Windows after DOS LAN Requester is installed, you must
edit the DOSLAN.INI file for Windows support, and then install Windows. The
DOSLAN.INI file is in the DOSLAN subdirectory if you installed DOS LAN
Requester using the supplied defaults. To install Windows after DOS LAN
Requester is installed:

 Add the following parameters to the DOSLAN.INI file:

    /NMS:1 (2 if you want to receive messages)
    /NVS:1
    /API

    Note:  Make sure that the value for the /NVS parameter is at least equal to
    the number of servers in the domain. Otherwise, the Windows Browse function
    may not detect all servers in the domain. You can specify these parameters
    in any order. For more information about these parameters, refer to the OS2
    LAN Server 1.3 DOS LAN Requester User's Guide.

 Add the following parameters to the DOSLAN.INI file if you want to receive
 pop-up messages:

    /NMS:2 (minimum for receiving messages)
    /POP

 Start DOS LAN Requester.
 At the DOS command prompt, type: Y (when prompted) or NET START
 Install Windows using the Windows documentation.
 Exit Windows and restart the workstation.
 Start DOS LAN Requester.
 At the DOS command prompt, type: Y (when prompted) or NET START

 Note:  Logging on and off through Windows is not supported in this
 environment.
 Type NET, and then use the full-screen interface to log on.
 Add the following line to the WIN.INI file if you want WINPOPUP support loaded
 each time you start Windows:

  load=WINPOPUP

 Start Windows.
  At the DOS command prompt, type:

   WIN

 Now, you must set up Windows for use with DOS LAN Requester by selecting LAN
 Manager 2.0 Enhanced (or 100% compatible) as the network type.

 To reconfigure Windows to support network activities:

  1. Start DOS LAN Requester.
  2. At the DOS command prompt, type: Y (when prompted) or NET START
  3. Start Windows.
  4. At the DOS command prompt, type:

           WIN

  5. Select Windows Setup from the Windows Main window.
  6. Select Options from the action bar.
  7. Select Change system settings from the Options pull-down.
  8. Select LAN Manager 2.0 Enhanced (or 100% compatible).

     Note:  Windows prompts you for the correct diskette so that it can load
     the network driver that is appropriate for the network you selected.
  9. Exit Windows and restart the workstation.
 10. Start DOS LAN Requester.
 11. At the DOS command prompt, type: Y (when prompted) or NET START

     Note:  Logging on and off through Windows is not supported in this
     environment.
 12. Type NET, and then use the full-screen interface to log on.
 13. Start Windows.
 14. At the DOS command prompt, type:

           WIN

 Installing DOS LAN Requester after Windows Is Installed

  1. Exit Windows.
  2. Install DOS LAN Requester according to the instructions in the OS2 LAN
     Server 1.3 DOS LAN Requester User's Guide.
  3. Add the following parameters to the DOSLAN.INI file:

    /NMS:1 (2 if you want to receive messages)
    /NVS:1
    /API

    Note:  Make sure that the value for the /NVS parameter is at least equal to
    the number of servers in the domain. Otherwise, the Windows Browse function
    may not detect all servers in the domain. You can specify these parameters
    in any order. For more information about these parameters, refer to the OS2
    LAN Server 1.3 DOS LAN Requester User's Guide.

  4. Add the following parameters to the DOSLAN.INI file, if you want to
     receive pop-up messages:

    /NMS:2 (minimum for receiving messages)
    /POP

  5. Start DOS LAN Requester.
  6. At the DOS command prompt, type: Y (when prompted) or NET START

     Note:  Logging on and off through Windows is not supported in this
     environment.
  7. Type NET, and then use the full-screen interface to log on.
  8. Add the following line to the WIN.INI file if you want WINPOPUP support
     loaded each time you start Windows:

          load=WINPOPUP

  9. Start Windows.
 10. At the DOS command prompt, type:

           WIN

 11. Set up Windows for use with DOS LAN Requester as follows:

    Select Windows Setup from the Windows Main window.

    Select Options from the action bar.

    Select Change system settings from the Options pull-down.

    Select LAN Manager 2.0 Enhanced (or 100% compatible).

    Exit Windows and restart the workstation.

 12. Start DOS LAN Requester.
 13. At the DOS command prompt, type: Y (when prompted) or NET START

     Note:  Logging on and off through Windows is not supported in this
     environment.
 14. Type NET, and then use the full-screen interface to log on.
 15. Start Windows.
 16. At the DOS command prompt, type:

           WIN

 Example AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS Files

 You may need to modify the AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS files on your
 workstation to use Windows with DOS LAN Requester.

 The following are examples of files on different IBM Personal System/2*
 workstations that are changed so that Windows and DOS LAN Requester can be
 used together.

 Example Files for the Model 50-286

 In this example, the Model 50-286 has 2MB of expanded memory. DOS LAN
 Requester is already installed.

 The AUTOEXEC.BAT file looks like this before installing Windows:

  @ECHO OFF
  SET COMSPEC=C:\DOS\COMMAND.COM
  VERIFY OFF
  PATH=C:\DOSLAN;C:\DOS;C:\DOSTOOLS
  APPEND C:\DOS
  PROMPT $P$G
  VER
  @ECHO OFF
  YNPROMPT Y N 30 Start DOS LAN Requester (Y/N)?
  IF ERRORLEVEL 1 GOTO NODLR
  NET START
  IF ERRORLEVEL 1 GOTO NODLR
  CALL INITFSI.BAT
  :NODLR

 After Windows is installed, the AUTOEXEC.BAT file is changed to look like
 this:

  @ECHO OFF
  SET COMSPEC=C:\DOS\COMMAND.COM
  VERIFY OFF
  PATH=C:\WINDOWS;C:\DOSLAN;C:\DOS;C:\DOSTOOLS
  APPEND C:\DOS
  PROMPT $P$G
  VER
  @ECHO OFF
  YNPROMPT Y N 30 Start DOS LAN Requester (Y/N)?
  IF ERRORLEVEL 1 GOTO NODLR
  NET START
  IF ERRORLEVEL 1 GOTO NODLR
  CALL INITFSI.BAT
  :NODLR
  SET TEMP=C:\WINDOWS\TEMP

 The CONFIG.SYS file looks like this before installing Windows:

  BREAK=ON
  BUFFERS=20
  FILES=30
  LASTDRIVE=Z
  SHELL=C:\COMMAND.COM /E:2000 /P
  DEVICE=C:\DOS\XMA2EMS.SYS FRAME=C000 P255=D400
  DEVICE=DXMA0MOD.SYS 001
  DEVICE=DXMC0MOD.SYS
  DEVICE=DXMT0MOD.SYS S=12 C=14 ST=12
  FCBS=16,8

 After Windows is installed, the CONFIG.SYS file is changed to look like this:

  BREAK=ON
  BUFFERS=20
  FILES=30
  LASTDRIVE=Z
  SHELL=C:\COMMAND.COM /E:2000 /P
  DEVICE=C:\HIMEM.SYS
  DEVICE=DXMA0MOD.SYS 001
  DEVICE=DXMC0MOD.SYS
  DEVICE=DXMT0MOD.SYS S=12 C=14 ST=12
  FCBS=16,8
  DEVICE=C:\WINDOWS\SMARTDRV.SYS 320

 Example Files for the Model 65-386SX

 In this example, the Model 65-386SX has 3MB of extended memory.

 The AUTOEXEC.BAT file looks like this before installing DOS LAN Requester and
 Windows:

  @ECHO OFF
  SET COMSPEC=C:\COMMAND.COM
  PATH=C:\DOS40X;C:\;C:\DOSTOOLS
  APPEND C:\DOSTOOLS
  PROMPT $P$G

 After Windows is installed, the AUTOEXEC.BAT file is changed to look like
 this:

  @ECHO OFF
  SET COMSPEC=C:\COMMAND.COM
  PATH=C:\WINDOWS;C:\DOS40X;C:\;C:\DOSTOOLS
  APPEND C:\DOSTOOLS
  PROMPT $P$G
  SET TEMP=C:\WINDOWS\TEMP

 After Windows and DOS LAN Requester are installed, the AUTOEXEC.BAT file is
 changed to look like this:

  @ECHO OFF
  SET COMSPEC=C:\COMMAND.COM
  PATH=C:\DOSLAN;C:\WINDOWS;C:\DOS40X;C:\;C:\DOSTOOLS
  APPEND C:\DOSTOOLS
  PROMPT $P$G
  SET TEMP=C:\WINDOWS\TEMP
  @ECHO OFF
  YNPROMPT Y N 30 Start DOS LAN Requester (Y/N)?
  IF ERRORLEVEL 1 GOTO NODLR
  NET START
  IF ERRORLEVEL 1 GOTO NODLR
  CALL INITFSI.BAT
  :NODLR

 The CONFIG.SYS file looks like this before installing DOS LAN Requester and
 Windows:

  BREAK=ON
  BUFFERS=30
  FILES=100
  LASTDRIVE=Z
  SHELL=C:\COMMAND.COM /E:2000 /P
  DEVICE=C:\LSP200\DXMA0MOD.SYS 001
  DEVICE=C:\LSP200\DXMC0MOD.SYS
  DEVICE=C:\LSP200\DXMT0MOD.SYS S=12 C=14 ST=12
  FCBS=16,8

 After Windows is installed, the CONFIG.SYS file is changed to look like this:

  BREAK=ON
  BUFFERS=30
  FILES=100
  LASTDRIVE=Z
  SHELL=C:\COMMAND.COM /E:2000 /P
  DEVICE=C:\HIMEM.SYS
  DEVICE=C:\LSP200\DXMA0MOD.SYS 001
  DEVICE=C:\LSP200\DXMC0MOD.SYS
  DEVICE=C:\LSP200\DXMT0MOD.SYS S=12 C=14 ST=12
  FCBS=16,8
  DEVICE=C:\WINDOWS\SMARTDRV.SYS 2048 512

 In this example, the CONFIG.SYS file is not changed after DOS LAN Requester is
 installed.

 Example Files for the Model 70-386

 In this example, the Model 70-386 has 1.5MB of extended memory. DOS LAN
 Requester is already installed.

 The AUTOEXEC.BAT file looks like this before installing Windows:

  @ECHO ON
  PATH=C:\DOSLAN;C:\DOS33;C:\DOSTOOLS
  APPEND=C:\DOSTOOLS;C:\DOS33
  PROMPT [CLI $P]
  CLS
  :EXIT
  @ECHO OFF
  YNPROMPT Y N 30 Start DOS LAN Requester (Y/N)?
  IF ERRORLEVEL 1 GOTO NODLR
  NET START
  IF ERRORLEVEL 1 GOTO NODLR
  CALL INITFSI.BAT
  :NODLR

 After Windows is installed, the AUTOEXEC.BAT file is changed to look like
 this:

  @ECHO ON
  PATH=C:\WINDOWS;C:\DOSLAN;C:\DOS33;C:\DOSTOOLS
  APPEND=C:\DOSTOOLS;C:\DOS33
  PROMPT [CLI $P]
  CLS
  :EXIT
  @ECHO OFF
  YNPROMPT Y N 30 Start DOS LAN Requester (Y/N)?
  IF ERRORLEVEL 1 GOTO NODLR
  NET START
  IF ERRORLEVEL 1 GOTO NODLR
  CALL INITFSI.BAT
  :NODLR
  SET TEMP=C:\WINDOWS\TEMP

 The CONFIG.SYS file looks like this before installing Windows:

  DEVICE=C:\LSP200\DXMA0MOD.SYS
  DEVICE=C:\LSP200\DXMC0MOD.SYS
  DEVICE=C:\LSP200\DXMT0MOD.SYS S=12 C=14 ST=12
  SHELL=C:\COMMAND.COM /E:2000 /P
  STACKS=30,128
  LASTDRIVE=Z
  FILES=30
  BUFFERS=20
  FCBS=16,8

 After Windows is installed, the CONFIG.SYS file is changed to look like this:

  DEVICE=C:\HIMEM.SYS
  DEVICE=C:\LSP200\DXMA0MOD.SYS
  DEVICE=C:\LSP200\DXMC0MOD.SYS
  DEVICE=C:\LSP200\DXMT0MOD.SYS S=12 C=14 ST=12
  SHELL=C:\COMMAND.COM /E:2000 /P
  STACKS=30,128
  LASTDRIVE=Z
  FILES=30
  BUFFERS=20
  FCBS=16,8
  DEVICE=C:\WINDOWS\SMARTDRV.SYS 768 256


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Using Windows with DOS LAN Requester

Before using Windows, you must start DOS LAN Requester. The NET START command
must include the /NMS:1, /NVS:1, and /API parameters. The value for the /NVS
parameter must be at least equal to the number of servers on the domain.

Windows lets you:

 o Log on and off
 o Redirect filesets and drives
 o Redirect printers
 o Send messages
 o Look at shared resources
 o Configure ports for network printers.

 Logging On and Off

 When Windows and DOS LAN Requester are properly installed, you can log on to
 OS2 LAN Server 1.3 from the DOS command prompt or the DOS LAN Requester
 full-screen interface. You can use resources through Windows that were shared
 by logon assignments.

 Note:  If you are running DOS LAN Requester and Windows on a 386-based
 workstation, end the Windows session before issuing the NET LOGOFF command
 from the DOS command prompt.

 Redirecting Filesets and Drives

 From Windows you can access shared file resources (filesets) on a server. To
 redirect filesets from Windows:

  1. Select File Manager from the Windows Main window.
  2. Select Disk from the action bar.
  3. Select Connect Net Drive from the Disk pull-down. The Connect Network
     Drive window is displayed.
  4. Specify the drive letter to be connected to the fileset in the Drive
     Letter window.
  5. Specify the network path to the fileset in one of the following ways:

    o Type the network path (alias or UNC name).
    o Select Browse from the Connect Network Drive window:

        a. Select the domain.
        b. Select the appropriate server.
        c. Highlight the resource to be redirected, and then select OK.

  6. Type the password to access the fileset (if required). The password does
     not display.
  7. Select Connect from the Connect Network Drive window.

 An icon for the newly connected drive is displayed at the top of the File
 Manager window.

 Note:  All device redirection should be established through Windows,
 particularly if you run Windows in 386 enhanced mode.

 Otherwise, you might have to close and open Windows File Manager again to make
 the redirected resources display.

 Redirecting Printers

 From Windows you can redirect a local port to use a shared printer on a
 server. To redirect printers from Windows:

  1. Select Control Panel from the Windows Main window.
  2. Select Printers from the Control Panel window.
  3. Select Network from the Printers window. The Printers - Network
     Connections window is displayed.
  4. Specify the port you want to connect to a network printer in the Port
     window.
  5. Specify the network path to the printer in one of the following ways:

    o Type the network path (alias or UNC name).
    o Select Browse from the Printers - Network Connections window:

        a. Select the domain.
        b. Select the appropriate server.
        c. Highlight the printer to be connected, and then select OK.

  6. Type the password to access the printer (if required). The password does
     not display.
  7. Select Connect from the Printers - Network Connections window.
  8. Select OK.
  9. Select OK.

 Note:  When you are using the Print Screen function, the output in real mode
 and standard mode is placed in the Clipboard. The output in 386 enhanced mode
 goes directly to the queue.

 Sending Messages

 From Windows you can send and receive messages across the LAN. To send
 messages across the LAN from Windows:

  1. Select Control Panel from the Windows Main window.
  2. Select Network from the Control Panel window.
  3. Select Message from the action bar.
  4. Select Send from the Message pull-down.
  5. Type the user ID of the user to whom you want to send the message.
  6. Type the message you want to send.
  7. Select Send.

 Note:  To receive messages while you are using Windows, the following must be
 true:

 o The RCV configuration is in the DOSLAN.INI file or in the NET START command.
 o The following line is in the WIN.INI file:

      load=WINPOPUP

 o The PATH statement in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file points to the directory
   containing the WINPOPUP.EXE file.

 Looking at Shared Resources

 To look at the shared filesets on a server:

  1. Select File Manager from the Windows Main window.
  2. Select Disk from the action bar.
  3. Select Connect Net Drive from the Disk pull-down.
  4. Select Browse from the Connect Network Drive window.
  5. Select the domain.
  6. Select the appropriate server.

 The resources currently shared on that server display in the Resources box.

 Viewing Shared Printers

 To look at the shared printers on a server:

  1. Select Control Panel from the Windows Main window.
  2. Select Printers from the Control Panel window.
  3. Select Network from the Printers window. The Printers - Network
     Connections window is displayed.
  4. Select Browse from the Printers - Network Connections window.
  5. Select the domain.
  6. Select the appropriate server.

 The printers currently shared on that server display in the Resources box.

 Configuring Ports for Network Printers

 To configure ports for network printers:

  1. Select Printers from the Windows Control Panel window.
  2. Select Add Printer from the Printers window.
  3. Select the print driver for the network printer you want to use from the
     List  of Printers window.
  4. Select Install from the Printers window. If the driver already exists,
     select Current.
  5. Make sure that the newly installed printer is highlighted in the Installed
     Printers list, and then select Configure from the Printers window.
  6. Select the port number for the network port, and then select Setup from
     the Printers - Configure window.
  7. Complete the information for the printer you have selected in the pop-up
     window, and then select OK.
  8. Select OK from the Printers - Configure window.
  9. Highlight the new printer, and then select Active from the Status box.
 10. Select the new printer to make it the default printer, and then select OK
     to exit the Printers window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Remote IPL

You can use Windows on DOS LAN Requester workstations that require remote IPL.
Set up Windows to run on remote-IPL workstations in one of the following ways:

 o Share the Windows directory as a fileset available to users on remote-IPL
   workstations.
 o Define Windows as a private application for users on remote-IPL
   workstations.
 o Define Windows as a shared application for users on remote-IPL workstations.

 This section describes how to set up Windows to run on remote-IPL workstations
 and how to use Windows from those workstations.

 Sharing the Windows Directory as a Fileset

 You must install a shared copy of Windows on a server before Windows can be
 shared with users at remote-IPL workstations. Follow the instructions in the
 Windows documentation to install a shared copy of Windows.

 After you have installed a shared copy of Windows, you can share that Windows
 directory on the server. Follow the instructions in the OS2 LAN Server 1.3
 Network Administrator's Guide to create an alias and an access control profile
 for the Windows directory.

 To customize Windows for your user ID:

  1. Assign the Windows fileset to a local drive letter.
  2. Make the Windows fileset current.
  3. At the DOS command prompt, type:

          SETUP /N

  4. Specify that you want Setup to install Windows on your personal directory.
     Your personal directory can be on a local fixed disk or on a network
     drive. For example, if you type:

          C:\MYWINDIR
     ,

     Setup copies the Windows files you customize to the C:\MYWINDIR directory.

     Note:  If you want to define Windows as a private application in the DOS
     LAN Requester Served Applications group, specify a personal directory on a
     network drive.
  5. Follow the instructions in the Setup panels to complete the installation.
  6. Edit the PROGMAN.INI file Groups statements to match the drive letter you
     assigned to the Windows fileset.

 Note:  Make sure that the PATH statement in your workstation's AUTOEXEC.BAT
 file includes the drive letter you assigned to the Windows fileset.

 Defining Windows as a Private Application

 After you customize Windows, you can define it as a private application in the
 DOS LAN Requester Served Applications group. To define Windows as a private
 application:

  1. Make the Served Applications group the current group.
  2. Select Program from the action bar.
  3. Select Add from the Program pull-down.
  4. Select Private Application.
  5. Type the name you want for your Windows application, and then press Enter.
  6. Complete the Application Details panels as follows:

     a. Type the description of your Windows application the way you want it to
        display in the Served Applications group.
     b. Type WIN.EXE in the DOS Command Line field.
     c. Select Yes in the Collect Parameters field.
     d. Select No in the Set Current Fileset and Additional Filesets fields,
        and then press Enter.
     e. In the Application Details - Program Package Fileset panel, select the
        fileset that contains your Windows personal directory, and then press
        Enter.
     f. In the Application Details - Program Package Path panel, type the path
        (beginning with a backslash character (\)) to your personal directory,
        and then press Enter.
     g. Select No in the Specify Drive field, and then press Enter.

 Defining Windows as a Shared Application

 You can define Windows as a shared application on your network. Before
 defining Windows on the network, make sure that DOS Image Support has been
 installed on the server that is sharing Windows. For more information about
 DOS Image Support, refer to OS/2 LAN Server 1.3 Getting Started.

 To define Windows as a shared application:

  1. Install Windows in the DOS compatibility box of an OS/2 Server. Accept the
     Windows defaults during installation.

     Note:  If you have Windows search your fixed disk for applications, you
     might receive error messages indicating that Windows cannot read the
     drive. You can cancel the error message and continue. Some OS/2 files are
     protected. This protection creates the error message.
  2. Change the network to LANMAN as follows:

     a. If Windows is not  running, at the DOS command prompt, type:

                WIN

     b. Make the Windows Main window active.
     c. Select the Windows Setup icon.
     d. Select Options from the action bar.
     e. Select Change System Settings from the Options pull-down.
     f. Select LAN Manager 2.0 Enhanced (or 100% compatible).
     g. Follow the Windows panel instructions for inserting diskettes.
     h. If your mouse is not working, you need to use Setup to select the
        appropriate mouse driver. For more information, refer to the Windows
        documentation.

  3. Define an alias for the Windows directory as follows:

     a. Select Definitions from the LAN Requester Main panel.
     b. Select Aliases from the Definitions pull-down.
     c. Select Files from the Aliases pull-down.
     d. Select New, and then select Actions from the action bar.
     e. Select Create from the Actions pull-down. The following is an example
        alias:

                Alias:                     WINDOWS
                Description:               Windows 3.0
                Server name:               WINSRV
                Server path to directory:  C:\WINDOWS
                Maximum number of users:   15
                When shared:               As required by user

  4. Create an access control profile.

     a. Select Definitions from the LAN Requester Main panel.
     b. Select Access Control from the Definitions pull-down.
     c. Select the Windows alias.
     d. Select Actions from the action bar.
     e. Select Create from the Actions pull-down.
     f. Select the access permissions you want to give users.

        Note:  From the Actions pull-down, you can specify special access
        control for certain groups of users. For more information, refer to the
        OS/2 LAN Server Version 1.3 Network Administrator's Guide.

  5. Apply the access control profile.

     a. Select Definitions from the LAN Requester Main panel.
     b. Select Access Control from the Definitions pull-down.
     c. Select the Windows alias.
     d. Select Actions from the action bar.
     e. Select Apply from the Actions pull-down.

  6. Define a shared application as follows:

     a. Select Definitions from the LAN Requester Main panel.
     b. Select Applications from the Definitions pull-down.
     c. Select Public DOS Applications from the Applications pull-down.
     d. Select New, and then select Actions from the action bar.
     e. Select Create from the Actions pull-down.

        The following is an example of a shared application:

                Application ID:            WINDOWS
                Description:               Windows 3.0
                DOS command line:          win
                Alias:                     WINDOWS
                Remaining path to program: \
                Assigned drive:            G
                Prompt user for parameter: YES

  7. Add the application to the user's served applications group:

     a. Select the Windows application.
     b. Select Selector from the action bar.
     c. Select Add from the Selector pull-down.
     d. Select the user IDs that you want to have access to Windows.

  8. Change the path to the .GRP files:

     a. Select OS/2 Full Screen from the Group - Main panel.
     b. Change to the directory in which Windows is installed.
     c. Edit the PROGMAN.INI file. At the DOS command prompt, type:

                E PROGMAN.INI

        Change the paths for the group statements to the drive and path
        assigned to the application.

        The following is an example of the group statements path:

                GROUP1=G:\MAIN.GRP
                GROUP2=G:\ACCESSOR.GRP
                GROUP3=G:\GAMES.GRP

  9. Exit Windows and restart the workstation.

 Remote-IPL

 To run Windows from the DOS command prompt:

  1. Assign the Windows fileset to the drive letter you used to customize
     Windows. Use a logon assignment to make this an automatic assignment every
     time you log on.
  2. Make your personal Windows directory current.
  3. At the DOS command prompt, type:

          WIN

 To run Windows as a private application

  1. In the DOS LAN Requester full-screen interface, make the Served
     Applications group the current group.
  2. Select the Windows application.
  3. When prompted for parameters, type one of the following:

    /R        To run Windows in real mode
    /S        To run Windows in standard mode
    /3        To run Windows in 386 enhanced mode.

  4. Press Enter.

 To run Windows as a shared application

  1. In the DOS LAN Requester full-screen interface, make the Served
     Applications group the current group.
  2. Select Windows from the Served Applications panel.
  3. When prompted for parameters, type one of the following:

    /R        To run Windows in real mode
    /S        To run Windows in standard mode
    /3        To run Windows in 386 enhanced mode.

  4. Press Enter.

 For more information about running Windows in the real, standard, or 386
 enhanced mode, refer to the Windows documentation.

 When running Windows as a shared application, the users will not be able to
 customize their system configurations, hardware, or Windows environment
 without affecting other users. To avoid problems, the network administrator
 should set the .INI files in the Windows directory to read-only. The network
 administrator should configure the hardware for all users.

 Windows Image Support

 Use the following definition file to create an image with extended memory and
 support for Windows:

  ;   IBM DLR RIPL image definition for a PC with
  ;   3.5" 1.4M A: diskette.  Requester will be a
  ;   redirector; Windows support is included.
  3.5/1.4M                         ;Define diskette type
  ?:\IBMLAN\DOSLAN\NET\STD_CFG.SYS CONFIG.SYS
  ?:\IBMLAN\DOSLAN\NET\STD_AUT.BAT AUTOEXEC.BAT
  ?:\IBMLAN\DOSLAN\NET\STD_SET.BAT SETENV.BAT
  ?:\IBMLAN\DOSLAN\NET\INT21USE.COM
  ?:\IBMLAN\DOSLAN\NET\SMDISP.EXE
  ?:\IBMLAN\DOSLAN\NET\XSRW.SM
  ?:\IBMLAN\DOSLAN\NET\NET.COM
  ?:\IBMLAN\DOSLAN\NET\NETWORK.MSG
  ?:\IBMLAN\DOSLAN\NET\NETWORK1.CMD
  ?:\IBMLAN\DOSLAN\DOS\VDISK.SYS
  ?:\IBMLAN\DOSLAN\NET\REDIR40.EXE
  ?:\IBMLAN\DOSLAN\NET\XSI4.EXE
  ?:\IBMLAN\DOSLAN\NET\MSGSRVR.EXE
  ?:\IBMLAN\DOSLAN\NET\MSGPOPUP.EXE
  ;   Statements added for Windows Support
  ?:\IBMLAN\DOSLAN\NET\DOSLAN.INI
  ?:\IBMLAN\DOSLAN\WINDOWS\RAMDRIVE.SYS
  ?:\IBMLAN\DOSLAN\WINDOWS\HIMEM.SYS

 Use the following STD_CFG.SYS file to support extended memory and a RAM drive:

  SHELL=A:\COMMAND.COM /E:2000 /P
  LASTDRIVE=~~~~~B
  FILES=30
  BUFFERS=10
  BREAK = ON
  FCBS=16,8
  DEVICE = HIMEM.SYS
  DEVICE = RAMDRIVE.SYS 1024 /E

 To support the NET START parameters needed to run Windows with DOS LAN
 Requester on a remote-IPL workstation, you must add a DOSLAN.INI file to your
 image definition files. For information about adding a DOSLAN.INI file to your
 image definition files, refer to the OS2 LAN Server 1.3 Network
 Administrator's Guide.

 Use the following DOSLAN.INI file to enable API support for Windows:

  RDR ~~~~~~~~2 ~~~~~~~~6
  /SRV:8  /ASG:29 /NBC:4  /NBS:1K /BBC:1  /BBS:4K /PBC:4
  /PBS:128 /PFS:32 /PFT:900 /PWT:250 /KUC:600 /KST:600
  /WRK:1111211012 /RPL /NVS:4 /NMS:4 /API

 For more information about remote-IPL files, refer to the OS2 LAN Server 1.3
 Network Administrator's Guide.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

int AccessResource(hInst, hResInfo);
    HANDLE hInst;
    HANDLE hResInfo;

Presentation Manager No equivalent

This Windows function sets a file pointer for read access to resource


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

ATOM AddAtom(lpString);
     LPSTR lpString;

Presentation Manager

ATOM WinAddAtom(hAtomTab, pString);
     HATOMTBL hAtomTab;
     PSZ pString;

This Windows function creates an atom for character string lpString. The


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

SHORT AddFontResource(lpFileName);
      LPSTR lpFileName;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiLoadFonts(hab, pszFilename).
     HAB hab;
     PSZ pszFilename;
p. This Windows function adds font resource in lpFileName to Windows font
table. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent and loads fonts from the
specified resource file. All fonts in this file become available for any
application to use.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID AdjustWindowRect(lpRect, lStyle, fMenu);
     LPRECT lpRect;
     LONG lStyle;
     BOOL fMenu;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinCalcFrameRect(hwndFrame, prcl, fClient);
     HWND hwndFrame;    /* handle of window */
     PRECTL prcl;
     BOOL fClient;

This Windows function converts client rectangle to a window rectangle, assuming
that the window had the specified style and menus. The Presentation Manager
function is similar, but hwndFrame must be the handle to an existing frame
window, and fClient should be FALSE.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HANDLE AllocResource(hInst, hResInfo, dwSize);
       HANDLE hInst;
       HANDLE hResInfo;
       DWORD dwSize;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function allocates dwSize bytes of memory for resource hResInfo.
There is no Presentation Manager equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BYTE AnsiLower(lpString);
     LPSTR lpString;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function converts character string (or character if lpString


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

LPSTR AnsiNext(lpCurChar);
      LPSTR lpCurChar;

Presentation Manager

LPSTR WinNextChar(wIdPage, pCurChar);
      USHORT wIdPage;
      PSZ pCurChar;

This Windows function returns a long pointer to next character in the string
lpCurChar. The Presentation Manager function takes the identifier of the code
page, but is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

LPSTR AnsiPrev(lpStart, lpCurChar);
      LPSTR lpStart;
      LPSTR lpCurChar;

Presentation Manager

PSZ WinPrevChar(hab, idcp, idcc, pszStart, psz);
    HAB hab;
    USHORT idcp;
    USHORT idcc;
    PSZ pszStart;
    PSZ psz;

This Windows function returns a long pointer to previous character in the
string lpStart with lpCurChar pointing to the current character. The
Presentation Manager function takes the identifier of the code page, but is
equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL AnsiToOem(lpAnsiStr, lpOemStr);
     LPSTR lpAnsiStr;
     LPSTR lpOemStr;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinCpTranslateString(hab, cpSrc, pszSrc, cpDst, cchDestMax, pchDest);
     HAB hab;
     USHORT cpSrc;
     PSZ pszSrc;
     USHORT cpDst;
     USHORT cchDestMax;
     PSZ pchDest;

This Windows function converts the ANSI string to OEM character string. The
Presentation Manager function is equivalent, translating a string from one code
page to another.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BYTE AnsiUpper(lpString);
     LPSTR lpString;

Presentation Manager

USHORT WinUpper(hab, idcp, idcc, psz);
       HAB hab;
       USHORT idcp;
       USHORT idcc;
       PSZ psz;

USHORT WinUpperChar(hab, idcp, idcc, c);
       HAB hab;
       USHORT idcp;
       USHORT idcc;
       USHORT c;

This Windows function converts the character string (or character if lpString
high word is zero) to uppercase. Presentation Manager functions take the
identifier of the code page, but are equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL AnyPopup();

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function indicates whether or not a popup style window is visible
on the screen. There is no Presentation Manager equivalent. In order to
determine this under Presentation Manager, one must enumerate all windows, ask
if any are of the popup style, and ask if any of these are currently visible.

See Also:

 WinBeginEnumWindows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL Arc(hDC, X1, Y1, X2, Y2, X3, Y3, X4, Y4);
     HDC hDC;
     SHORT X1;
     SHORT Y1;
     SHORT X2;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiSetArcParams(hps, parcp)
     HPS hps;
     PARCPARAMS parcp;

LONG GpiPointArc(hps, pptl)
     HPS hps;
     PPOINTL pptl;

The Windows function draws an arc from (X3, Y3) to (X4, Y4) using the current
pen and moving counterclockwise with arc's center at center of rectangle given
by X1, Y1 and X2, Y2. In Presentation Manager, GpiMove sets the current point.
The Presentation Manager application should then call GpiPointArc to with
pPointL pointing to 2 long points. The arc will pass through the first point
and will end on the second point. The current point is updated to be the second
point. Note that in Presentation Manager all coordinates are expressed in
absolute mode and that the coordinate system origin is different from that of
Windows.

See Also:

 GpiMove


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HDC BeginPaint(hwnd, lpPaint);
    HWND hwnd;
    LPPAINTSTRUCT lpPaint;

Presentation Manager

HPS WinBeginPaint(hwnd, hPS, pWUpdateRect);
    HWND hwnd;
    HPS hPS;
    PWRECT pWUpdateRect;

The Windows function prepares window for painting, filling structure at lpPaint
with painting data. If the Presentation Manager function has created its own
window display context, it should passed in a handle to a presentation space in
hPS. If using display context from the cache, it can pass in NULL for the hPS.
If it doesn't need the update rectangle, it can pass in NULL for pWUpdateRect.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL BitBlt(hDest, X, Y, wWidth, wHeight, hSrc, XSrc, YSrc, dwROP);
     HDC hDest;
     short X;
     short Y;
     short wWidth;
     short wHeight;
     HDC hSrc;
     short XSrc;
     short YSrc;
     DWORD dwROP;

Presentation Manager

LONG GpiBitBlt(hpsTarg, hpsSrc, cPoints, paptlPoints, lRop, flOptions)
     HPS hpsTarg;
     HPS hpsSrc;
     LONG cPoints;
     PPOINTL paptlPoints;
     LONG lRop;
     LONG flOptions;

The Windows function moves a bitmap from source device to destination device,
with dwRop describing how source, destination, and possibly brush bits are to
be combined. GpiBitBlt encompasses the functionality present in BitBlt and
StretchBitBlt. For non-stretched blitting, lMode should be BLTMODE_NOSCALE.
lNum should be 3, and pPointL should be an array with the the top right corner
of the destination blit area, and the bottom left corner of the source blit
area.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID BringWindowToTop(hwnd);
     HWND hwnd;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinSetWindowPos(hwnd, hwndInsertBehind, x, y, cx, cy, fs)
     HWND hwnd;
     HWND hwndInsertBehind;
     SHORT x;
     SHORT y;
     SHORT cx;
     SHORT cy;
     USHORT fs;

This Windows function brings a popup or child window to top of stack of
overlapping windows. Presentation Manager function can be called with
SWP_ZORDER in wCmd and HWND_TOP in hwndInsertBehind. This function can be used
to set the window order in a more generalized manner than the Windows function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL CallMsgFilter(lpMsg, wCode);
     LPMSG lpMsg;
     INT wCode;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function passes message and code to the current message-filter
function which was set using SetWindowsHook. There is no Presentation Manager
equivalent to this function. In Presentation Manager, the application sees all
messages and sorts them as desired. Under Presentation Manager, you must call
the filter function directly.

See Also:

 SetWindowHook


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

LONG CallWindowProc(lpProc, hwnd, wMessage, wParam, lParam);
     FARPROC lpProc;
     HWND hwnd;
     unsigned wMessage;
     WORD wParam;
     LONG lParam;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function passes message information to the function specified by
lpPrevWndFunc. There is no Presentation Manager equivalent, but the procedure
specified by lpProc may be called directly with the proper parameters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

INT Catch(lpCatchBuf);
    LPCATCHBUF lpCatchBuf;

Presentation Manager


SHORT WinCatch(pCatchBuf)
      PCATCHBUF pcatchbuf;

This Windows function copies the current execution environment to buffer
lpCatchBuf. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows


BOOL ChangeClipboardChain(hWnd, hWndNext);
     HWND hWnd;
     HWND hWndNext;

Presentation Manager


BOOL WinSetClipbrdViewer(hab, hwnd)
     HAB hab;
     HWND hwnd;

This Windows function removes hWnd from the clipboard viewer chain, making
hWndNext the descendant of hWnd's ancestor in the chain. In Presentation
Manager there is no equivalent function; there is only one clipboard viewer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL ChangeMenu(hMenu, wId, lpNewItem, wIdNewItem, wChange);
     HMENU hMenu;
     WORD wId;
     LPSTR lpNewItem;
     WORD wIdNewItem;
     WORD wChange;

Presentation Manager

MRESULT WinSendMsg(hwnd, msg, mp1, mp2)
        HWND hwnd;
        USHORT msg;
        MPARAM mp1;
        MPARAM mp2;

This Windows function appends, inserts, deletes, or modifies a menu item in
hMenu. In Presentation Manager, the application must send messages to the menu
in order to modify its structure. Note that the style for the about box has
changed in Presentation Manager; instead of using the ChangeMenu call to add
the about command to the system menu, the Presentation Manager application
should include the about command at the end of the files menu if present. Here
is a partial list of the messages which the Presentation Manager application
can send to the menu control in order to modify its structure:

Value                    Meaning
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
MM_ITEMIDFROMPOSITION    lParam1 is position, return is id
MM_ITEMPOSITIONFROMID    lParam1 is id, return is position
MM_QUERYITEM             lParam1 is id, lParam2 is PMENUITEM
MM_SETITEM               lParam1 is id, lParam2 is PMENUITEM
MM_DELETEITEM            lParam1 is id, return is count of remaining items
MM_INSERTITEM            lParam1 is PMENUITEM, lParam2 is PSZ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID CheckDlgButton(hDlg, wId, wCheckPos);
     HWND hDlg;
     int wId;
     WORD wCheckPos;

Presentation Manager

MRESULT WinSendDlgItemMsg(hwndDlg, idItem, msg, mp1, mp2)
        HWND hwndDlg;
        USHORT idItem;
        USHORT msg;
        MPARAM mp1;
        MPARAM mp2;

This Windows function places or removes check next to button, or changes state
of 3-state button. The Presentation Manager function can be used to send
BM_SETCHECK message with desired check position in the low word of mp1.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL CheckMenuItem(hMenu, wId, wCheck);
     HMENU hMenu;
     WORD wId;
     WORD wCheck;

Presentation Manager

MRESULT WinSendMsg(hwnd, msg, mp1, mp2)
        HWND hwnd;
        USHORT msg;
        MPARAM mp1;
        MPARAM mp2;

This Windows function sets check or removes check from a menu item. In
Presentation Manager, application can send MM_SETATTR message to menu window
handle. Set mp1 to be menu id in low word and bIncludeSubmenus (usually TRUE)
in high word. Set mp2 to be MIA_CHECKED in low word and either MIA_CHECKED or 0
in high word. To uncheck a menu item, for example, send MAKELONG(MIA_CHECKED,
0) as the last parameter. Return value is old check state of item.

See Also:

 WinSendMsg


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID CheckRadioButton(hDlg, wIdFirst, wIdLast, wIdCheck);
     HWND hDlg;
     INT wIdFirst;
     INT wIdLast;
     INT wIdCheck;

Presentation Manager

MRESULT WinSendDlgItemMsg(hwndDlg, idItem, msg, mp1, mp2)
        HWND hwndDlg;
        USHORT idItem;
        USHORT msg;
        MPARAM mp1;
        MPARAM mp2;

This Windows function checks wIdCheck button and unchecks all other radio
buttons in the group from wIdFirst to wIdLast. The Presentation Manager
function can be used to send BM_SETCHECK message with desired check position in
low word of lParam1. The application must then send message to every radio
button control in desired group. This can avoided by using the AUTORADIOBUTTON
style for radio button controls, which causes the radio buttons to be checked
and unchecked automatically.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HWND ChildWindowFromPoint(hWndParent, Point);
     HWND hWndParent;
     POINT Point;

Presentation Manager

HWND WinWindowFromPoint(hwnd, pptl, fChildren, fLock)
     HWND hwnd;
     PPOINTL pptl;
     BOOL fChildren;
     BOOL fLock;
This Windows function determines which, if any, child window of hWndParent
contains Point. The Presentation Manager function can be called with fEnumChild
set to FALSE. This function returns hWndParent if pWPoint is in the parent
window but not in any of the child windows.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID ClientToScreen(hWnd, lpPoint);
     HWND hWnd;
     LPPOINT lpPoint;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinMakePoints(hab, pwpt, cwpt)
     HAB hab;
     PWPOINT pwpt;
     SHORT cwpt;

BOOL WinMapWindowPoints(hwndFrom, hwndTo, pptl, cwpt)
     HWND hwndFrom;
     HWND hwndTo;
     PPOINTL pptl;
     SHORT cwpt;

This Windows function converts client coordinates into equivalent screen
coordinates in place. The Presentation Manager function can be called with
hWndTo set to HWND_DESKTOP to convert points from the window to the screen. The
points in the array should be long points, the function WinMakePoints may be
called to convert word points into long points.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID ClipCursor(lpClipRect);
     LPRECT lpClipRect;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent.

This Windows function restricts the mouse cursor to a given rectangle on the
screen.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL CloseClipboard();

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinCloseClipbrd(hab)
     HAB hab;    /* handle to an anchor block */
This Windows function closes the clipboard. The Presentation Manager function
is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HANDLE CloseMetaFile(hDC);
       HANDLE hDC;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiDestroyPS(hps)
     HPS hps;

HMF DevCloseDC(hdc)
    HDC hdc;    /* handle to device context */

This Windows function closes the metafile and creates a metafile handle. In PM,
if a presentation space is associated with the hDC, it should be reassociated
to another display context or deleted using GpiDestroyPS. DevCloseDC then ends
the metafile definition and returns the handle to the metafile.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID CloseSound();

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function closes play device after flushing voice queues and
freeing buffers. There is no Presentation Manager equivalent; sound functions
are not supported in Presentation Manager.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

INT CloseWindow(hWnd);
    HWND hWnd;

Presentation Manager

MRESULT WinSendMsg(hwnd, msg, mp1, mp2)
        HWND hwnd;
        USHORT msg;
        MPARAM mp1;
        MPARAM mp2;

This Windows function closes the specified window. The Presentation Manager
application should send a WM_SYSCOMMAND message to the frame window with
SC_MINIMIZE in the low word of mp1. This will iconize the window.

See Also:

 WinSendMsg


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

SHORT CombineRgn(hDest, hSrc1, hSrc2, wMode);
      HRGN hDest;
      HRGN hSrc1;
      HRGN hSrc2;
      SHORT wMode;

Presentation Manager

LONG GpiCombineRegion(hps, hrgnDest, hrgnSrc1, hrgnSrc2, cmdMode)
     HPS hps;
     HRGN hrgnDest;
     HRGN hrgnSrc1;
     HRGN hrgnSrc2;
     LONG cmdMode;

This Windows function combines, using wMode function, two existing regions into
a new region. The Presentation Manager function performs the same function. All
the regions specified must belong to the same device class (as specified by
hDC). The lMode parameter has changed, see translations for RGN_* symbols.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HANDLE CopyMetaFile(hScrMetaFile, lpFileName);
       HANDLE hScrMetaFile;
       LPSTR lpFileName;

Presentation Manager

HMF GpiCopyMetaFile(hmfSrc)
    HMF hmfSrc;

BOOL GpiSaveMetaFile(hmf, pszFilename)
     HMF hmf;
     PSZ pszFilename;

This Windows function copies source metafile to lpFileName and returns the new
metafile. In Presentation Manager, GpiCopyMetaFile copies the metafile to
another in memory metafile structure. This structure can then be written to a
file using the GpiSaveMetaFile call which creates the file and frees the
resources given by hMF.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

INT CopyRect(lpDest, lpSrc);
    LPRECT lpDest;
    LPRECT lpSrc;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinCopyRect(hab, prclDst, prclSrc)
     HAB hab;
     PRECTL prclDst;
     PRECTL prclSrc;

This Windows function makes a copy of an existing rectangle. The Presentation
Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

INT CountClipboardFormats();

Presentation Manager

USHORT WinEnumClipbrdFmts(hab, fmt)
       HAB hab;
       USHORT fmt;

This Windows function retrieves a count of the number of formats the clipboard
can render. In Presentation Manager, the application can use the enumeration
function to count the number of formats.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WORD CountVoiceNotes(wVoice);
     WORD wVoice;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function returns number of notes in voice queue wVoice. There is
no Presentation Manager equivalent; sound functions are not supported in
Presentation Manager.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HBITMAP CreateBitmap(wWidth, wHeight, cPlanes, cBitsPixel, lpBits);
        SHORT wWidth;
        SHORT wHeight;
        BYTE cPlanes;
        BYTE cBitsPixel;
        LPSTR lpBits;

Presentation Manager

HBITMAP GpiCreateBitmap(hps, pbmphNew, flOptions, pbInitData, ppmiInfoData)
        HPS hps;
        PBITMAPINFOHEADER pbmphNew;
        ULONG flOptions;
        PBYTE pbInitData;
        PBITMAPINFO ppmiInfoData;

The Windows function creates a bitmap having the specified width, height, and
bit pattern. The Presentation Manager function creates a bitmap and returns the
handle. If hDC is not null, Presentation Manager attempts to use the storage in
the specified device for the bitmap. lpInfo contains the format of the bitmap,
and lUsage contains a 0 in bit position 2 if the bitmap can be discarded.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HBITMAP CreateBitmapIndirect(lpBitMap);
        BITMAP FAR * lpBitMap;

Presentation Manager

HBITMAP GpiCreateBitmap(hps, pbmphNew, flOptions, pbInitData, ppmiInfoData)
        HPS hps;
        PBITMAPINFOHEADER pbmphNew;
        ULONG flOptions;
        PBYTE pbInitData;
        PBITMAPINFO ppmiInfoData;

The Windows function creates a bitmap with the width, height and bit pattern
given by lpBitMap. The Presentation Manager function creates a bitmap and
returns the handle. If hDC is not null, Presentation Manager attempts to use
the storage in the specified device for the bitmap. lpInfo contains the format
of the bitmap, and lUsage contains a 0 in bit position 2 if the bitmap can be
discarded.

See Also:

 GpiCreateBitmap


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HBRUSH CreateBrushIndirect(lpLogBrush);
       LOGBRUSH FAR * lpLogBrush;

Presentation Manager No equivalent p. The Windows function creates a logical
brush with the style, color, nd pattern given by lpLogBrush. In Presentation
Manager, brushes aren't objects, however, there is a structure called
AREABUNDLE which holds the attributes used for interiors and bitblts.

See Also:

 AREABUNDLE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID CreateCaret(hwnd, hBitMap, wWidth, wHeight);
     HWND hwnd;
     HBITMAP hBitMap;
     INT wWidth;
     INT wHeight;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinCreateCursor(hwnd, x, y, cx, cy, fs, prclClip)
     HWND hwnd;
     SHORT x;
     SHORT y;
     SHORT cx;
     SHORT cy;
     USHORT fs;
     PRECTL prclClip;
This Windows function creates caret for hWnd using hBitmap, or, solid cursor if
hBitmap is NULL. In Presentation Manager, text carets are restricted to be of
certain styles, instead of a general bitmap. The wType parameter should be set
to one of the following styles: CURSOR_SOLID, CURSOR_HALFTONE, CURSOR_RECT,
CURSOR_FRAME, and CURSOR_FLASH.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HBITMAP CreateCompatibleBitmap(hDC, wWidth, wHeight);
        HDC hDC;
        SHORT wWidth;
        SHORT wHeight;

short SetMapMode(hDC, wMapMode);
      HDC hDC;
      SHORT wMapMode;

Presentation Manager

BOOL DevQueryCaps(hdc, lStartitem, cItems, alItems)
     HDC hdc;            /* handle to device context      */
     LONG lStartitem;    /* first item to be returned     */
     LONG cItems;        /* count of items to be returned */
     PLONG alItems;      /* array of elements             */

LONG GpiBitBlt(hpsTarg, hpsSrc, cPoints, paptlPoints, lRop, flOptions)
     HPS hpsTarg;
     HPS hpsSrc;
     LONG cPoints;
     PPOINTL paptlPoints;
     LONG lRop;
     LONG flOptions;

HBITMAP GpiCreateBitmap(hps, pbmphNew, flOptions, pbInitData, ppmiInfoData)
        HPS hps;
        PBITMAPINFOHEADER pbmphNew;
        ULONG flOptions;
        PBYTE pbInitData;
        PBITMAPINFO ppmiInfoData;

BOOL GpiQueryDeviceBitmapFormats(hps, clData, alData)
     HPS hps;
     LONG clData;
     PLONG alData;

The Windows function creates a bitmap that is compatible with the device
specified by hDC. The Presentation Manager function GpiQueryDeviceBitmapFormats
can be used to find the most natural format for the bitmap supported by the
device. lCount takes even numbers or zero and lData should be a pointer to a
long where the number of planes and the number of bits per pixel will be
stored. The GpiCreateBitmap function then can be used to create a bitmap and
return the handle. If hDC is not null, PM attempts to use the storage in the
specified device for the bitmap. lpInfo contains the format of the bitmap, and
lUsage contains a 0 in bit position 2 if the bitmap can be discarded.

See Also:

 DevQueryCaps GpiBitBlt GpiCreateBitmap SetMapMode


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HDC CreateCompatibleDC(hDC);
    HDC hDC;

Presentation Manager

HDC DevOpenDC(hab, type, pszToken, count, pbData, hdcComp)
    HAB hab;                /* handle to the anchor block          */
    LONG type;              /* type of device context              */
    PSZ pszToken;           /* device information token            */
    LONG count;             /* number of elements supplied         */
    PDEVOPENDATA pbData;    /* pointer to device context structure */
    HDC hdcComp;            /* handle to compatible device context */

HPS GpiCreatePS(hab, hdc, psizl, fOptions)
    HAB hab;
    HDC hdc;
    PSIZEL psizl;
    ULONG fOptions;

This Windows function creates a memory device context that is compatible with
the device specified by the hDC parameter. The Presentation Manager function
also creates a display context. lType specifies the type of the device context
to be created and should be OD_MEMORY. Before drawing may be done to the
device, a presentation space must be created and associated with the DC. To do
this, call GpiCreatePS.

See Also:

 GpiCreatePS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HDC CreateDC(lpDriverName, lpDeviceName, lpOutput, lpInitData);
    LPSTR lpDriverName;
    LPSTR lpDeviceName;
    LPSTR lpOutput;
    LPSTR lpInitData;

Presentation Manager

HDC DevOpenDC(hab, type, pszToken, count, pbData, hdcComp)
    HAB hab;                /* handle to the anchor block          */
    LONG type;              /* type of device context              */
    PSZ pszToken;           /* device information token            */
    LONG count;             /* number of elements supplied         */
    PDEVOPENDATA pbData;    /* pointer to device context structure */
    HDC hdcComp;            /* handle to compatible device context */

HPS GpiCreatePS(hab, hdc, psizl, fOptions)
    HAB hab;
    HDC hdc;
    PSIZEL psizl;
    ULONG fOptions;

This Windows function creates a display context for the specified device. The
Presentation Manager function also creates a display context. lType specifies
the type of the device context to be created: OD_QUEUED, OD_DIRECT, OD_INFO,
OD_METAFILE, OD_MEMORY. Before drawing may be done to the device, a
presentation space must be created and associated with the DC. To do this, call
GpiCreatePS with pSizeL pointing to two longs which are 0, and lOptions with
bit 14 set to 1 and all other bits set to 0.

See Also:

 GpiCreatePS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HWND CreateDialog(hInstance, lpDialogTemplateName, hWndParent, lpDialogFunc)
     HANDLE hInstance;
     LPSTR  lpTemplateName;
     HWND hWndParent;
     FARPROC lpDialogFunc;

Presentation Manager

USHORT DosLoadModule(pszFailName, cbFileName, pszModName, phMod)
       PSZ pszFailName;   /* pointer to buffer for failure name    */
       USHORT cbFileName; /* length of failure-name buffer         */
       PSZ pszModName;    /* pointer to module name                */
       PHMODULE phmod;    /* pointer to variable for module handle */

BOOL WinDestroyWindow(hwnd)
     HWND hwnd;

HWND WinLoadDlg(hwndParent, hwndOwner, pfnDlgProc, hmod, idDlg, pCreateParams),
     HWND hwndParent;
     HWND hwndOwner;
     PFNWP pfnDlgProc;
     HMODULE hmod;
     USHORT idDlg;
     PVOID pCreateParams;

USHORT WinProcessDlg(hwndDlg)
       HWND hwndDlg;

The Windows function creates a modeless dialog box that has the size, style,
and controls defined by the dialog-box template given by lpTemplateName
parameter. The Presentation Manager function creates a dialog window from the
dialog template in a resource. It returns the handle of the dialog window
created. An invisible dialog window is created unless the WS_VISIBLE window
style is specified in the first dialog item definition within the dialog
template.

See Also:

 DosLoadModule WinDestroyWindow WinProcessDlg


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HWND CreateDialogIndirect(hInstance, lpDialogTemplateName, hWndParent,
                          lpDialogFunc)
     HANDLE hInstance;
     LPSTR  lpTemplateName;
     HWND hWndParent;
     FARPROC lpDialogFunc;

Presentation Manager

USHORT DosLoadModule(pszFailName, cbFileName, pszModName, phMod)
       PSZ pszFailName;   /* pointer to buffer for failure name    */
       USHORT cbFileName; /* length of failure-name buffer         */
       PSZ pszModName;    /* pointer to module name                */
       PHMODULE phmod;    /* pointer to variable for module handle */

HWND WinCreateDlg(hwndParent, hwndOwner, pfnDlgProc, pdlgt, pCreateParams),
     HWND hwndParent;
     HWND hwndOwner;
     PFNWP pfnDlgProc;
     PDLGTEMPLATE pfnDlgProc;
     PVOID pCreateParams;

BOOL WinDestroyWindow(hwnd)
     HWND hwnd;

USHORT WinProcessDlg(hwndDlg)
       HWND hwndDlg;

The Windows function creates a modeless dialog box that has the size, style,
and controls defined by the dialog-box template given by lpTemplateName
parameter. The Presentation Manager function creates a dialog window from the
dialog template. It returns the handle of the dialog window created. An
invisible dialog window is created unless the WS_VISIBLE window style is
specified in the first dialog item definition within the dialog template.

See Also:

 DosLoadModule WinDestroyWindow WinProcessDlg, WinSubstituteStrings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HBITMAP CreateDiscardableBitmap(hDC, X, Y);
        HDC hDC;
        SHORT X;
        SHORT Y;

Presentation Manager

HBITMAP GpiCreateBitmap(hps, pbmphNew, flOptions, pbInitData, ppmiInfoData)
        HPS hps;
        PBITMAPINFOHEADER pbmphNew;
        ULONG flOptions;
        PBYTE pbInitData;
        PBITMAPINFO ppmiInfoData;

The Windows function creates a discardable bitmap. The Presentation Manager
function creates a bitmap and returns the handle. If hDC is not null,
Presentation Manager attempts to use the storage in the specified device for
the bitmap. lpInfo contains the format of the bitmap, and lUsage contains a 0
in bit position 2 if the bitmap can be discarded.

See Also:

 GpiCreateBitmap


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HRGN CreateEllipticRgn(X1, Y1, X2, Y2);
     SHORT X1;
     SHORT Y1;
     SHORT X2;
     SHORT Y2;

Presentation Manager No equivalent

This Windows function creates an elliptical region whose bounding rectangle is
defined by X1, Y1, X2, Y2. In Presentation Manager, there is no equivalent
function. Complex regions can be created from the union of many rectangles.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HFONT CreateFont(wHeight, wWidth, wEscapement, wOrientation, wWeight, cItalic,
                 cUnderline, cStrikeOut, cCharSet, cOutputPrecision,
                 cClipPrecision, cQuality, cPitch, lpFaceName);
      SHORT wHeight;
      SHORT wWidth;
      SHORT wEscapement;
      SHORT wOrientation;
      SHORT wWeight;
      BYTE cItalic;
      BYTE cUnderline;
      BYTE cStrikeOut;
      BYTE cCharSet;
      BYTE cOutputPrecision;
      BYTE cClipPrecision;
      BYTE cQuality;
      BYTE cPitch;
      LPSTR lpFaceName;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiCreateLogFont(hps, pchName, lcid, pfat)
     HPS hps;
     PSTR8 pchName;
     LONG lcid;
     PFATTRS pfat;

BOOL GpiLoadFonts(hab, pszFilename).
     HAB hab;
     PSZ pszFilename;

WORD GpiQueryFonts(hPS, fOptions, pszFacename, pcFonts, cbMetrics, pfmMetrics);
     HPS hPS;
     ULONG fOptions;
     PSZ pszFacename;
     PLONG pcFonts;
     LONG cbMetrics;

This Windows function selects a font from the fonts available in GDI's pool of
physical fonts which is closest to the specified characteristics. If no exact
match is found, it provides an alternate whose characteristics match as many of
the requested characteristics as possible. This font can then be selected into
any DC. The Presentation Manager function should be called with pLogName set to
a descriptive name for the font and lFontId set to a number between 1 and 254
which will be the id of the font. This font id must not conflict with id's
assigned to other objects (such as bitmaps) which have been loaded and
registered. Note that if no font exactly matches the requirements, the system
font will be used. This font can only be selected into the PS under which it
was created. One way to emulate the 'best-fit' functionality of the Windows
function is to load the dynamic link library of the appropriate font using the
GpiLoadFonts function. Then, call GpiQueryFont to load the array of font
metrics. Using these metrics, determine the font closest to the requirements
and set the lMatch fields in the FATTR structure to the lMatch field in the
FONTMETRICS structures pointing to the desired font. Note that the definition
of a logical font has changed, see also translation of LOGFONT. Additional
fields are present in the corresponding Presentation Manager structure FATTRS.

See Also:

 GpiLoadFonts, GpiQueryFonts, FATTRS, FONTMETRICS, GpiSetCharSet,
WinGetLastError, LOGFONT, TEXTMETRIC


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HFONT CreateFontIndirect(lpLogFont);
      LOGFONT FAR * lpLogFont;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiCreateLogFont(hps, pchName, lcid, pfat)
     HPS hps;
     PSTR8 pchName;
     LONG lcid;
     PFATTRS pfat;

BOOL GpiLoadFonts(hab, pszFilename).
     HAB hab;
     PSZ pszFilename;

WORD GpiQueryFonts(hPS, fOptions, pszFacename, pcFonts, cbMetrics, pfmMetrics);
     HPS hPS;
     ULONG fOptions;
     PSZ pszFacename;
     PLONG pcFonts;
     LONG cbMetrics;

This Windows function creates a logical font with characteristics given by
lpLogFont. If it fails to find an exact font, it provides an alternate whose
characteristics match as many of the requested characteristics as possible.
This font can be selected into any DC. This Presentation Manager function
should be called with pLogName set to a descriptive name for the font and
lFontId set to a number between 1 and 254 which will be the id of the font.
This font id must not conflict with id's assigned to other objects (such as
bitmaps) which have been loaded and registered. The definition of a logical
font has changed, see translation of LOGFONT. Note that if no font exactly
matches the requirements, the system font will be used. This font can only be
selected into the PS under which it was created. One way to emulate the
'best-fit' functionality of the Windows function is to load the dynamic link
library of the appropriate font using the GpiLoadFonts function. Then, call
GpiQueryFont to load the array of font metrics. Using these metrics, determine
the font closest to the requirements and set the lMatch fields in the FATTR
structure to the lMatch field in the FONTMETRICS structures pointing to the
desired font. Note that the definition of a logical font has changed, see also
translation of LOGFONT.

See Also:

 GpiLoadFonts, GpiQueryFonts, FATTRS, FONTMETRICS, WinGetLastError, LOGFONT,
TEXTMETRIC


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HBRUSH CreateHatchBrush(wIndex, rgbColor);
       SHORT wIndex;
       DWORD rgbColor;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

The Windows function creates a logical brush having the hatched pattern and
color. In PM, brushes aren't objects, however, there is a structure called
AREABUNDLE which holds the attributes used for interiors and bitblts. To create
a hatched area bundle, the following fields in AREABUNDLE should be set: lColor
should be either the RGB color or index into the loaded color table, usSet
should be 0, and usSymbol should be the hatch constant (see translations for
HS_* constants).

See Also:

 AREABUNDLE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HDC CreateIC(lpDriverName, lpDeviceName, lpOutput, lpInitData);
    LPSTR lpDriverName;
    LPSTR lpDeviceName;
    LPSTR lpOutput;
    LPSTR lpInitData;

Presentation Manager

HDC DevOpenDC(hab, type, pszToken, count, pbData, hdcComp)
    HAB hab;                /* handle to the anchor block          */
    LONG type;              /* type of device context              */
    PSZ pszToken;           /* device information token            */
    LONG count;             /* number of elements supplied         */
    PDEVOPENDATA pbData;    /* pointer to device context structure */
    HDC hdcComp;            /* handle to compatible device context */

HPS WinGetPS(hwnd)
    HWND hwnd;

This Windows function creates an information context for the specified device.
The Presentation Manager function also creates an information context. lType
specifies the type of the device context to be created:   OD_QUEUED   OD_DIRECT
OD_INFO   OD_METAFILE   OD_MEMORY
 The Windows function is called in many instances to get information about the
 screen, such as metrics about the system font. In Presentation Manager, the
 application can get this information by calling WinGetPS with HWND_DESKTOP for
 hWnd. Using this function is fast and efficient.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HMENU CreateMenu();

Presentation Manager

HWND WinCreateWindow(hwndParent, pszClass, pszName, flStyle, x, y, cx, cy,
                     parent, hwndOwner, hwndInsertBehind, id, pCtlData,
                     pPresParams)
     HWND hwndParent;
     PSZ pszClass;
     PSZ pszName;
     ULONG flStyle;
     SHORT x;
     SHORT y;
     SHORT cx;
     SHORT cy;
     HWND hwndOwner;
     HWND hwndInsertBehind;
     USHORT id;
     PVOID pCtlData;
     PVOID pPresParams;

This Windows function creates an empty menu. In Presentation Manager, call
WinCreateWindow with FC_MENU for the class and HWND_DESKTOP for hDesktop.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HDC CreateMetaFile(lpFileName);
    LPSTR lpFileName;

Presentation Manager

HDC DevOpenDC(hab, type, pszToken, count, pbData, hdcComp)
    HAB hab;                /* handle to the anchor block          */
    LONG type;              /* type of device context              */
    PSZ pszToken;           /* device information token            */
    LONG count;             /* number of elements supplied         */
    PDEVOPENDATA pbData;    /* pointer to device context structure */
    HDC hdcComp;            /* handle to compatible device context */

HPS GpiCreatePS(hab, hdc, psizl, fOptions)
    HAB hab;
    HDC hdc;
    PSIZEL psizl;
    ULONG fOptions;

This Windows function creates a metafile display context. In Presentation
Manager, DevOpenDC can be called with lType set to OD_METAFILE, lLength set to
the size of pData, and pData pointing to a NULL pointer followed by the file
name. The application must then call GpiCreatePS to associate the metafile DC
with a presentation space. This should be called with pSize pointing to two
longs which are 0, and lOptions with bit 14 set to 1 and all other bits set to
0.

See Also:

 GpiCreatePS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HBRUSH CreatePatternBrush(hBitmap);
       HBITMAP hBitmap;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiSetBitmapId(hps, hbm, lcid)
     HPS hps;
     HBITMAP hbm;
     LONG lcid;

The Windows function creates a logical brush having the specified style, width,
and color. In PM, brushes aren't objects, however, there is a structure called
AREABUNDLE which holds the attributes used for interiors and bitblts. To create
a area bundle from a bitmap, first call GpiSetBitmapId to associated the value
in lId to the bitmap. lId must be a value between 64 and 239 which does not
conflict with other bitmaps or fonts which have been registered. The
application should then set the following fields in the AREABUNDLE structure:
lColor should be set to the correct index into the color table, usSet should be
set to lcid, and field usSymbol should be set to 65.

See Also:

 AREABUNDLE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HPEN CreatePen(wStyle, wWidth, rgbColor);
     SHORT wStyle;
     SHORT wWidth;
     DWORD rgbColor;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function creates a logical pen having the specified style, width,
and color. Because pens are not considered objects in Presentation Manager,
there is no equivalent function. There is, however, the structure LINEBUNDLE
defined in Presentation Manager which holds the attributes which Windows
associates with pens.

See Also:

 LINEBUNDLE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HPEN CreatePenIndirect(lpLogPen);
     LOGPEN FAR * lpLogPen;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function creates a logical pen with the style, width, and color
given by lpLogPen. There is, however, the structure LINEBUNDLE defined in
Presentation Manager which holds the attributes which Windows associates with
pens.

See Also:

 LINEBUNDLE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HRGN CreatePolygonRgn(lpPoint, wCount, wPolyMode);
      LPPOINT lpPoint;
      SHORT wCount;
      SHORT wPolyMode;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function creates a polygonal region having wCount vertices as
given by lpPoint. In Presentation Manager, there is no equivalent function.
Complex regions can be created from the union of many rectangles.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HRGN CreateRectRgn(X1, Y1, X2, Y2);
     SHORT X1;
     SHORT Y1;
     SHORT X2;
     SHORT Y2;

Presentation Manager

HRGN GpiCreateRegion(hps, cbRectl, prcl)
     HPS hps;
     LONG cbRectl;
     PRECTL prcl;

This Windows function creates a rectangular region. The Presentation Manager
function creates a region compatible with the specified display context.
lNumRects contains the number of rectangles in the pRectl array. The region is
created by taking the union of the rectangles specified (if no rectangles are
specified, an empty region is created).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HBRUSH CreateSolidBrush(rgbColor);
       DWORD rgbColor;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

The Windows function creates a logical brush having the specified solid color.
In Presentation Manager, brushes aren't objects, however, there is a type
called AREABUNDLE which holds the attributes used for interiors and bitblts. To
create a solid area bundle, the following fields in AREABUNDLE should be set:
lColor should be either the RGB color or index into the loaded color table,
usSet should be 0, and usSymbol should be PATSYM_SOLID.

See Also:

 AREABUNDLE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HWND CreateWindow(lpClassName, lpWindowName, dwStyle, xPos, yPos, Width,
     Height, hwndParent, hMenu, hModule, lpParam);
     LPSTR lpClassName;
     LPSTR lpWindowName;
     DWORD dwStyle;
     INT xPos;
     INT yPos;
     INT Width;
     INT Height;
     HWND hwndParent;
     HMENU hMenu;
     HANDLE hModule;
     LPSTR lpParam;

Presentation Manager

HWND WinCreateStdWindow(hwndParent, flStyle, pCtlData, pszClientClass,
     pszTitle, styleClient, hmod, idResources, phwndClient);
     HWND hwndParent;
     ULONG flStyle;
     PVOID pCtlData;
     PSZ pszClientClass;
     PSZ pszTitle;
     ULONG styleClient;
     HMODULE hmod;
     USHORT idResources;
     PHWND phwndClient;

HWND WinCreateWindow(hwndParent, pszClass, pszName, flStyle, x, y, cx, cy,
                     parent, hwndOwner, hwndInsertBehind, id, pCtlData,
                     pPresParams)
     HWND hwndParent;
     PSZ pszClass;
     PSZ pszName;
     ULONG flStyle;
     SHORT x;
     SHORT y;
     SHORT cx;
     SHORT cy;
     HWND hwndOwner;
     HWND hwndInsertBehind;
     USHORT id;
     PVOID pCtlData;
     PVOID pPresParams;

BOOL WinSetWindowPos(hwnd, hwndInsertBehind, x, y, cx, cy, fs)
     HWND hwnd;
     HWND hwndInsertBehind;
     SHORT x;
     SHORT y;
     SHORT cx;
     SHORT cy;
     USHORT fs;

BOOL WinShowWindow(hwnd, fShow)
     HWND hwnd;
     BOOL fShow;

This Windows function creates tiled, popup, and child windows. The Presentation
Manager function WinCreateStdWindow creates frame and client window and should
be called for the main window of an application. When this function is called,
the specified messaging procedure will receive a WM_SIZE message which
indicates that the window is being created with a zero size. For those
applications for which this is a problem, the application can create the main
window without the WS_VISIBLE style and after creation can call WinSetWindowPos
and WinShowWindow to set the window position and to make the window visible. If
the window to be created is a child window or doesn't have control windows,
WinCreateWindow can be called.

See Also:

 WinCreateWindow WinSetWindowPos, WinShowWindow


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

LONG DefWindowProc(hwnd, wMessage, wParam, lParam);
     HWND hwnd;
     USHORT wMessage;
     WORD wParam;
     LONG lParam;

Presentation Manager

MRESULT WinDefWindowProc(hwnd, msg, mp1, mp2)
        HWND hwnd;
        USHORT msg;
        MPARAM mp1;
        MPARAM mp2;

This Windows function is used to process messages not handled by the window
procedure. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

ATOM DeleteAtom(wAtom);
     ATOM wAtom;

Presentation Manager

ATOM WinDeleteAtom(hAtomTbl, atom)
     HATOMTBL hAtomTbl;
     ATOM atom;

This Windows function deletes an atom wAtom if its reference count is zero. The
Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL DeleteDC(hDC);
     HDC hDC;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiDestroyPS(hps)
     HPS hps;

HMF DevCloseDC(hdc)
     HDC hdc;    /* handle to device context */

This Windows function deletes the specified display context. The PM functions
are equivalent, GpiDestroyPS must be called to first destroy the presentation
space if the specified display context was associated into a presentation
space.

See Also:

 DevCloseDC


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL DeleteMetaFile(hMF);
     HANDLE hMF;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiDeleteMetaFile(hmf)
     HMF hmf;

This Windows function deletes access to a metafile by freeing the associated
system resources. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL DeleteObject(hObject);
     HANDLE hObject;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiDeleteSetId(hps, lcid)
     HPS hps;
     LONG lcid;

BOOL GpiDeleteBitmap(hbm)
     HBITMAP hbm;

BOOL GpiDestroyRegion(hps, hrgn)
     HPS hps;
     HRGN hrgn;

This Windows function deletes the logical pen, brush, font, bitmap, or region
by freeing all associated system storage. In Presentation Manager, pens and
brushes are not objects. Bitmaps and regions can be deleted using the
GpiDeleteBitmap and GpiDestroyRegion function calls. Logical fonts can be
deleted by calling GpiDeleteSetID with the ID under which the font was
registered. This deletes the font as well as freeing up the ID for reuse.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID DestroyCaret();

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinDestroyCursor(hwnd)
     HWND hwnd;

This Windows function destroys the current caret and frees any memory it
occupied. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

* WinDestroyWindow Windows

BOOL DestroyMenu(hMenu);
     HMENU hMenu;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinDestroyWindow(hwnd)
     HWND hwnd;

This Windows function destroys the menu specified by hMenu and frees any memory
it occupied. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL DestroyWindow(hwnd);
     HWND hwnd;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinDestroyWindow(hwnd)
     HWND hwnd;

This Windows function sends a WM_DESTROY message to hWnd and frees any memory
it occupied. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

LPSTR DeviceModes(hWnd, hItem, lpString, lpString);
      HWND hWnd;
      HANDLE hItem;
      LPSTR lpString;
      LPSTR lpString;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function displays a dialog box that prompts user to set printer
modes. There is no Presentation Manager equivalent. To simulate this
functionality, call DevQueryCaps, call a dialog box to reference these
capabilities, have the user choose capabilities, and check the user's
responses.

See Also:

 DevQueryCaps


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

INT DialogBox(hInst, lpTemplate, hParent, lpDialog);
    HANDLE hInst;
    LPSTR lpTemplate;
    HWND hParent;
    FARPROC lpDialog;

Presentation Manager

USHORT WinDlgBox(hwndParent, hwndOwner, pfnDlgProc, hmod, idDlg,
                 pCreateParams)
       HWND hwndParent;
       HWND hwndOwner;
       PFNWP pfnDlgProc;
       HMODULE hmod;
       USHORT idDlg;
       PVOID pCreateParams;

USHORT WinProcessDlg(hwndDlg)
       HWND hwndDlg;

This Windows function creates a modal dialog box. The Presentation Manager
function loads and processes a modal dialog box and returns the result value
established by the WinDismissDlg function. Use NULL for hMod if dialog is to be
loaded from application resource file.

See Also:

 WinDismissDlg, WinProcessDlg, WinSendMsg


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HWND DialogBoxIndirect(hInstance, hDTemplate, hWndParent, lpDialogFunc)
     HANDLE hInstance;
     HANDLE  hDTemplate;
     HWND hWndParent;
     FARPROC lpDialogFunc;

Presentation Manager

USHORT DosLoadModule(pszFailName, cbFileName, pszModName, phMod)
       PSZ pszFailName;   /* pointer to buffer for failure name    */
       USHORT cbFileName; /* length of failure-name buffer         */
       PSZ pszModName;    /* pointer to module name                */
       PHMODULE phmod;    /* pointer to variable for module handle */

HWND WinCreateDlg(hwndParent, hwndOwner, pfnDlgProc, pdlgt, pCreateParams),
     HWND hwndParent;
     HWND hwndOwner;
     PFNWP pfnDlgProc;
     PDLGTEMPLATE pfnDlgProc;
     PVOID pCreateParams;

USHORT WinProcessDlg(hwndDlg)
       HWND hwndDlg;

The Windows function creates a modal dialog box that has the size, style, and
controls defined by the dialog-box template given by lpTemplateName parameter.
The Presentation Manager function creates a dialog window from the dialog
template. The lpDlgTemplate parameter holds the dialog box styles. The function
returns the handle of the dialog window created. An invisible dialog window is
created unless the WS_VISIBLE window style is specified in the first dialog
item definition within the dialog template.

See Also:

 CreateDialogIndirect, DosLoadModule, WinDestroyWindow, WinProcessDlg,
WinSubstituteStrings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL DispatchMessage(lpMsg);
     LPMSG lpMsg;

Presentation Manager

ULONG WinDispatchMsg(hab, pqmsg)
      HAB hab;
      PQMSG pqmsg;

This Windows function passes a message to a window function of a window
specified in a MSG structure. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

INT DlgDirList(hDlg, lpPath, wIdList, wIdPath, wFileType);
    HWND hDlg;
    LPSTR lpPath;
    INT wIdList;
    INT wIdPath;
    unsigned wFileType;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function fills list box with names of files matching path
specification. There is no Presentation Manager equivalent to this function.
One way to emulate this functionality is to create a list box, get a directory,
inspect the directory listing, and move the texts of names of files into the
list box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL DlgDirSelect(hDlg, lpString, wIdList);
     HWND hDlg;
     LPSTR lpString;
     INT wIdList;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function copies the current selection from list box to lpString.
There is no Presentation Manager equivalent to this function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL DPtoLP(hDC, pPoints, wNum);
     HDC hDC;
     PPOINT pPoints;
     SHORT wNum;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiConvert(hps, lSrc, lTarg, cPoints, paptlPoints)
     HPS hps;
     LONG lSrc;
     LONG lTarg;
     LONG cPoints;
     PPOINTL paptlPoints;

This Windows function converts the wNum device points given by pPoints into
logical points. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent and may be
called with lSrc set to CVTC_DEVICE and lTarg set to CVTC_WORLD.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL DrawIcon(hDC, X, Y, hIcon);
     HDC hDC;
     INT X;
     INT Y;
     HICON hIcon;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinDrawPointer(hps, x, y, hptr, fs)
     HPS hps;
     SHORT x;
     SHORT y;
     HPOINTER hptr;
     USHORT fs;

This Windows function draws an icon with its upper left corner specified at X,
Y. The Presentation Manager function draws the pointer at position X, Y. In
addition, wHalfTone controls how the image is drawn and may be one of these
values: DP_NORMAL, DP_HALFTONE, or DP_INVERT. Note the coordinate system
differences between Windows and Presentation Manager.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID DrawMenuBar(hMenu);
     HWND hMenu;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinEnableWindowUpdate(hwnd, fEnable)
     HWND hwnd;
     BOOL fEnable;

BOOL WinShowWindow(hwnd, fShow)
     HWND hwnd;
     BOOL fShow;

This Windows function redraws the menu bar. There is no Presentation Manager
equivalent. In Presentation Manager, the application should call
WinEnableWindowUpdate with the menu control handle and with fShow set to FALSE.
After the menu has been changed, calling WinShowWindow with fVisible set to
TRUE will cause the menu to show the changes.

See Also:

 WinShowWindow


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID DrawText(hDC, lpString, wCount, lpRect, wFormat);
     HDC hDC;
     LPSTR lpString;
     INT wCount;
     LPRECT lpRect;
     WORD wFormat;

Presentation Manager

SHORT WinDrawText(hps, cchText, pchText, pcrl, clrFore, clrBack, rgfCmd)
      HPS hps;
      SHORT cchText;
      PSZ pchText;
      PRECTL prcl;
      LONG clrFore;
      LONG clrBack;
      USHORT rgfCmd;

This Windows function draws nCount characters of lpString in format specified
by wFormat, using current text and background colors. The PM function only
draws one line of text. If a line feed or carriage return character is found in
pString, only those characters before the newline will be shown. In addition,
the Presentation Manager function doesn't give the option to expand tabs or
draw without clipping to the rectangle. See translation of DT_* constants used
for wFormat.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL EmptyClipboard();

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinEmptyClipbrd(hab)
     HAB hab;

This Windows function empties the clipboard, frees data handles, and assigns
clipboard ownership to the window that currently has the clipboard open. The
Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL EnableMenuItem(hMenu, wId, wEnable);
     HMENU hMenu;
     WORD wId;
     WORD wEnable;

Presentation Manager

MRESULT WinSendMsg(hwnd, msg, mp1, mp2)
        HWND hwnd;
        USHORT msg;
        MPARAM mp1;
        MPARAM mp2;

This Windows function enables, disables, or grays a menu item, depending on
wEnable. In Presentation Manager, application can send MM_SETATTR message to
menu window handle. Set mp1 to be menu id in low word and bIncludeSubmenus
(usually TRUE) in high word. Set mp2 to be MIA_ENABLED in low word and
MIA_ENABLED or 0 in high word. To disable a menu item, for example, send
MAKELONG(MIA_ENABLED, 0) as the last parameter. Return value is old state of
item. In Windows, items can be grayed but not disabled. In Presentation
Manager, grayed menu items are always disabled.

See Also:

 WinSendMsg


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL EnableWindow(hwnd, fEnable);
     HWND hwnd;
     BOOL fEnable;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinEnableWindow(hwnd, fEnable)
     HWND hwnd;
     BOOL fEnable;

This Windows function enables or disables mouse and keyboard input to the
specified windows. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID EndDialog(hDlg, wResult);
     HWND hDlg;
     int wResult;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinDismissDlg(hwndDlg, usResult)
     HWND hwndDlg;
     USHORT usResult;

This Windows function frees resources and destroys windows associated with a
modal dialog box. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID EndPaint(hwnd, lpPaint);
     HWND hwnd;
     LPPAINTSTRUCT lpPaint;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinEndPaint(hps)
     HPS hps;

This Windows function marks the end of window repainting; required after each
BeginPaint call. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL EnumChildWindows(hwndParent, lpEnumProc, lParam);
     HWND hwndParent;
     FARPROC lpEnumProc;
     LONG lParam;

Presentation Manager

HENUM WinBeginEnumWindows(hwnd)
      HWND hwnd;    /* handle of parent window */

HWND WinGetNextWindow(henum)
     HENUM henum;

BOOL WinEndEnumWindows(henum)
     HENUM henum;

This Windows function enumerates the child style windows belonging to
hWndParent by passing each child window handle and lParam to the lpEnumFunc
function. To enumerate windows in Presentation Manager, the application needs
to call WinBeginEnumWindows with the parent window. WinGetNextWindow can be
then called repeatedly, returning NULL when all windows have been enumerated.
After enumeration, WinEndEnumWindows releases memory associated with henum.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WORD EnumClipboardFormats(wPrevFormat);
     WORD wPrevFormat;

Presentation Manager

USHORT WinEnumClipbrdFmts(hab, fmt)
       HAB hab;
       USHORT fmt;

This Windows function enumerates formats from list of available formats
belonging to the clipboard. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

SHORT EnumFonts(hDC, lpFacename, lpFontFunc, lpData);
      HDC hDC;
      LPSTR lpFacename;
      FARPROC lpFontFunc;
      LPSTR lpData;

Presentation Manager

WORD GpiQueryFonts(hPS, fOptions, pszFacename, pcFonts, cbMetrics, pfmMetrics);
     HPS hPS;
     ULONG fOptions;
     PSZ pszFacename;
     PLONG pcFonts;
     LONG cbMetrics;

This Windows function enumerates the fonts available on a given device, passing
font information through lpData to the function pointed to by the lpfontFunc
parameter. The Presentation Manager function retrieves metrics for fonts
matching the specified face name. If the pszFacename is a NULL pointer, all
available fonts will be queried. Note that the Windows function can enumerate
one font for every face name; however, with the Presentation Manager function
it is only possible to enumerate all fonts for a given face name or all fonts.
The buffer pointed to by the pfmMetrics parameter must be the pcFonts falue
multiplied by the cbMetrics value.

See Also:

 GpiCreateLogFont GpiQueryFontMetrics FATTRS FONTMETRICS  LOGFONT TEXTMETRIC


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

SHORT EnumObjects(hDC, wObjectType, lpObjectFunc, lpData);
      HDC hDC;
      SHORT wObjectType;
      FARPROC lpObjectFunc;
      LPSTR lpData;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function enumerates pens or brushes (depending on wObjectType)
available on a device, passing object information through lpData to
lpObjectFunc function. In Presentation Manager, pens and brushes are no longer
graphics objects. This function has no Presentation Manager equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

INT EnumProps(hwnd, lpEnumFunc);
    HWND hwnd;
    FARPROC lpEnumFunc;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function passes each property of hWnd, in turn, to the lpEnumFunc
function. There is no Presentation Manager equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL EnumWindows(lpEnumProc, lParam);
     FARPROC lpEnumProc;
     LONG lParam;

Presentation Manager

HENUM WinBeginEnumWindows(hwnd)
      HWND hwnd;    /* handle of parent window */

HWND WinGetNextWindow(henum)
     HENUM henum;

BOOL WinEndEnumWindows(henum)
     HENUM henum;

This Windows function enumerates windows on the screen by passing handle of
each tiled, iconic, popup, and hidden popup window (in that order) to the
lpEnumFunc function. To enumerate windows in Presentation Manager, the
application needs to call WinBeginEnumWindows with HWND_DESKTOP to get
top-level windows. WinGetNextWindow can be then called repeatedly, returning
NULL when all windows have been enumerated. After enumeration,
WinEndEnumWindows releases memory associated with hEnum.

See Also:

 WinBeginEnumWindows WinGetNextWindow EndEnumWindows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL EqualRgn(hRGN1, hRGN2);
     HRGN hRGN1;
     HRGN hRGN2;

Presentation Manager

LONG GpiEqualRegion(hps, hrgnSrc1, hrgnSrc2)
     HPS hps;
     HRGN hrgnSrc1;
     HRGN hrgnSrc2;

This Windows function checks the two given regions to determine if they are
identical. The Presentation Manager function is the same. Both regions
specified must belong to the same device class (as specified by hDC).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

short Escape(hDC, wEscape, wCount, lpInData, lpOutData);
      HDC hDC;
      short wEscape;
      short wCount;
      LPSTR lpInData;
      LPSTR lpOutData;

Presentation Manager

LONG DevEscape(hdc, cmdCode, cbInData, pbInData, pcbOutData, pbOutData)
     HDC hdc;             /* handle to device context               */
     LONG cmdCode;        /* function to be performed               */
     LONG cbInData;       /* size of pbInData buffer                */
     PBYTE pbInData;      /* pointer to input data buffer           */
     PLONG pcbOutData;    /* count of bytes returned in pbOutData   */
     PBYTE pbOutData;     /* pointer to output data buffer          */

This Windows function accesses device facilities not directly available through
GDI. The Presentation Manager function performs a similar function, see
translation of escape codes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

short EscapeCommFunction(wCid, wFunc);
      short wCid;
      int wFunc;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function executes escape function wFunc for communication device
wCid.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

SHORT ExcludeClipRect(hDC, X1, Y1, X2, Y2);
      HDC hDC;
      SHORT X1;
      SHORT Y1;
      SHORT X2;
      SHORT Y2;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinMakeRect(hab, pwrc)
     HAB hab;
     PWRECT pwrc;

SHORT WinExcludeUpdateRegion(hps, hwnd)
      HPS hps;
      HWND hwnd;

This Windows function creates a new clipping region from the existing region
less the given rectangle. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent. The
PM function WinMakeRect transforms a word WRECT structure into a long RECTL
structure and can be called to obtain pRectL.

See Also:

 WinMakeRect


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

void FatalExit(wCode);
     int wCode;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function halts Windows and prompts through auxiliary port (AUX)
for instructions on how to proceed. There is no Presentation Manager equivalent
to this function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

int FillRect(hDC, lpRect, hBrush);
    HDC hDC;
    LPRECT lpRect;
    HBRUSH hBrush;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinFillRect(hps, pcrl, lColor)
     HPS hps;
     PRECTL pcrl;
     LONG lColor;

This Windows function fills given rectangle using the specified brush. The
Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL FillRgn(hDC, hRGN, hBrush);
     HDC hDC;
     HRGN hRGN;
     HBRUSH hBrush;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiSetMix(hps, lMixMode)
     HPS hps;
     LONG lMixMode;

BOOL GpiSetPattern(hps, lSymbol)
     HPS hps;
     LONG lSymbol;

LONG GpiPaintRegion(hps, hrgn)
     HPS hps;
     HRGN hrgn;

This Windows function fills given region with brush specified by hBrush. In
Presentation Manager, the application needs to select the correct area
attributes and mix-mode into the hps if this has not been done correctly. For
more information on area attributes and mix modes, see translations on ROP_*
constants.

See Also:

 CreateBrushIndirect GpiPaintRegion


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

ATOM FindAtom(lpString);
     LPSTR lpString;

Presentation Manager

ATOM WinFindAtom(hAtomTbl, pszAtomName)
     HATOMTBL hAtomTbl;
     PSZ pszAtomName;

This Windows function retrieves atom (if any) associated with the character
string lpString. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HANDLE FindResource(hInst, lpName, lpType);
       HANDLE hInst;
       LPSTR lpName;
       LPSTR lpType;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function locates resource lpName having lpType and returns handle
for accessing and loading the resource.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HWND FindWindow(lpClass, lpCaption);
     LPSTR lpClass;
     LPSTR lpCaption;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function returns the handle of the window having the given class
and caption. There is no equivalent Presentation Manager function. The
application can use enumeration functions to find the desired window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL FlashWindow(hwnd, fInvert);
     HWND hwnd;
     BOOL fInvert;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinFlashWindow(hwndFrame, fFlash)
     HWND hwndFrame;
     BOOL fFlash;

This Windows function flashes window once by inverting its active/inactive
state. The Presentation Manager function flashes the window until
WinFlashWindow is called again with FALSE passed in for fFlash.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL FloodFill(hDC, X, Y, rgbColor);
     HDC hDC;
     SHORT X;
     SHORT Y;
     DWORD rgbColor;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiMove(hps, pptl)
     HPS hps;
     PPOINTL pptl;

LONG GpiQueryColorIndex(hps, flOptions, lRgbColor)
     HPS hps;
     ULONG flOptions;
     LONG lRgbColor;

BOOL GpiSetColor(hps, lColor)
     HPS hps;
     LONG lColor;

LONG GpiPaintRegion(hps, hrgn)
     HPS hps;
     HRGN hrgn;

LONG GpiFillPath(hps, idPath, cmdOptions)
     HPS hps;
     LONG idPath;
     LONG cmdOptions;

Windows function fills area of display with current brush, starting at X, Y and
continuing in all directions to the boundaries with the given rgbColor. In
Presentation Manager, you will need to determine the area that needs to be
filled, and then call either GpiPaintRegion or GpiFillPath.

See Also:

 GpiPaintRegion GpiQueryColorIndex GpiSetColor


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

short FlushComm(wCid, wQueue);
      short wCid;
      int wQueue;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function flushes characters from wQueue of communication device
wCid.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

int FrameRect(hDC, lpRect, hBrush);
    HDC hDC;
    LPRECT lpRect;
    HBRUSH hBrush;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinDrawBorder(hps, prcl, cx, cy, clrFore, clrBack, rgfCmd)
     HPS hps;
     PRECTL prcl;
     SHORT cx;
     SHORT cy;
     LONG clrFore;
     LONG clrBack;
     USHORT rgfCmd;

This Windows function draws border for the given rectangle using the specified
brush. The Presentation Manager function draws a rectangular border around the
specified rectangle.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL FrameRgn(hDC, hRGN, hBrush, wWidth, wHeight);
     HRGN hRGN;
     HBRUSH hBrush;
     SHORT wWidth;
     SHORT wHeight;

Presentation Manager

LONG GpiPaintRegion(hps, hrgn)
     HPS hps;
     HRGN hrgn;

This Windows function draws a border for given region using hBrush, with wWidth
and wHeight specifying the width of the horizontal and vertical brush strokes.
The closest Presentation Manager function is GpiPaintRegion which can be called
with a NULL area attribute so that the region is outlined in the current pen.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HANDLE FreeLibrary(hLibModule);
       HANDLE hLibModule;

Presentation Manager

USHORT DosFreeModule(hmod)
       HMODULE hmod;    /* module handle */

This Windows function removes library module hLibModule from memory if
reference count is zero. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent and
unloads a module which was previously loaded using DosLoadModule.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID FreeProcInstance(lpProc);
     FARPROC lpProc;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function removes the function instance entry at address lpProc.
There is no Presentation Manager equivalent to this function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL FreeResource(hResData);
     HANDLE hResData;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function removes resource hResData from memory if reference count
is 0.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HWND GetActiveWindow();

Presentation Manager

HWND WinQueryActiveWindow(hwndDesktop, fLock)
     HWND hwndDesktop;
     BOOL fLock;

This Windows function returns handle to the active window. The Presentation
Manager function can be called withhwndDesktop set to HWND_DESKTOP. If an
application will be sending messages to the active window after obtaining the
handle, the active window should be locked.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HANDLE GetAtomHandle(wAtom);
       ATOM wAtom;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function returns the handle (relative to the local heap) of the
atom string. There is no Presentation Manager equivalent to this function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WORD GetAtomName(wAtom, lpBuffer, wMax);
     ATOM wAtom;
     LPSTR lpBuffer;
     INT  wMax;

Presentation Manager

USHORT WinQueryAtomName(hAtomTbl, atom, pchBuffer, cchBufferMax)
       HATOMTBL hAtomTbl;
       ATOM atom;
       PSZ pchBuffer;
       USHORT cchBufferMax;

This Windows function copies character string (up to wMax characters)
associated with wAtom to lpBuffer. The Presentation Manager function is
equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

long GetBitmapBits(hBitMap, lCount, lpBits);
     HBITMAP hBitMap;
     LONG lCount;
     LPSTR lpBits;

Presentation Manager

LONG GpiQueryBitmapBits(hps, lScanStart, cScans, pbBuffer, pbmi)
     HPS hps;
     LONG lScanStart;
     LONG cScans;
     PBYTE pbBuffer;
     PBITMAPINFO pbmi;

The Windows function copies up to lCount bits of specified bitmap into buffer
pointed to by lpBits. The Presentation Manager function transfers bits from the
bitmap selected into hDC into the pointer pBits. hDC must refer to a memory
display context which has a bitmap currently selected. pBmInfo is a pointer to
a structure describing the desired format of the bitmap to be returned (see
translation for BITMAP).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

DWORD GetBitmapDimension(hBitMap);
      HBITMAP hBitMap;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiQueryBitmapDimension(hbm, psizlBitmap)
     HBITMAP hbm;
     PSIZEL psizlBitmap;

The Windows function returns the width and height of the bitmap specified by
hBitmap. The Presentation Manager function takes a pointer to the location to
store the width and height (long values). These functions are the same.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

DWORD GetBkColor(hDC);
      HDC hDC;

Presentation Manager

LONG GpiQueryBackColor(hPS);
      HPS hPS;

LONG GpiQueryRGBColor(hps, flOptions, lColorIndex)
     HPS hps;
     ULONG flOptions;
     LONG lColorIndex;

This Windows function returns the background color of the specified device. The
Presentation Manager function GpiQueryBackColor returns the rgb value or color
index (if using a color table) of the background color. The function
GpiQueryRGBColor can be called with lOptions set to 1 to convert the color
index into an rgb color.

See Also:

 GpiCreateLogColorTable, WinGetLastError


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

short GetBkMode(hDC);
      HDC hDC;

Presentation Manager

LONG GpiQueryBackMix(hps)
     HPS hps;

This Windows function returns the background mode of the specified device. The
Presentation Manager function returns the background mix mode.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

DWORD GetBrushOrg(hDC);
      HDC hDC;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiQueryPatternRefPoint(hps, pgptRefPoint)
     HPS hps;
     PPOINTL pptlRefPoint;

The Windows function retrieves the current brush origin for the given display
context. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent, returning the origin
or reference point into pptlRefPoint.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

char GetBValue(rgbColor);
     DWORD rgbColor;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function retrieves the blue value of the given color. In
Presentation Manager, this can be done by the following statement:

     Blue = (BYTE) (rgbColor)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WORD GetCaretBlinkTime();

Presentation Manager

LONG WinQuerySysValue(hwndDesktop, iSysValue)
     HWND hwndDesktop;
     SHORT iSysValue;

This Windows function returns the current caret flash rate. The Presentation
Manager function may be called with hwndDesktop set to HWND_DESKTOP and
iSysValue set to SV_CURSORRATE.

See Also:

 WinGetSysValue


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

LONG GetClassLong(hwnd, wIndex);
     HWND hwnd;
     INT wIndex;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinQueryClassInfo(hab, pszClassName, pclsi)
     HAB hab;
     PSZ pszClassName;
     PCLASSINFO pclsi;

This Windows function retrieves information at wIndex in the WNDCLASS
structure. The Presentation Manager function is similar, except that the
Presentation Manager function is invoked with the name of the class instead of
a window handle. The class structure has changed; see translation of GC?_*
constants.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

int GetClassName(hwnd, lpClassName, wMax);
    HWND hwnd;
    LPSTR lpClassName;
    INT wMax;

Presentation Manager

SHORT WinQueryClassName(hwnd, cchMax, pch)
      HWND hwnd;
      SHORT cchMax;
      PSZ pch;

This Windows function copies hWnd's class name (up to wMax characters) into
lpClassName. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WORD GetClassWord(hwnd, wIndex);
     HWND hwnd;
     INT wIndex;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinQueryClassInfo(hab, pszClassName, pclsi)
     HAB hab;
     PSZ pszClassName;
     PCLASSINFO pclsi;

This Windows function retrieves information at wIndex in the WNDCLASS
structure. The Presentation Manager function is similar, except that the
Presentation Manager function is invoked with the name of the class instead of
a window handle. The class structure has changed; see translation of GC?_*
constants.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID GetClientRect(hwnd, lpRect);
     HWND hwnd;
     LPRECT lpRect;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinQueryWindowRect(hwnd, prclDest)
     HWND hwnd;
     PRECTL prclDest;

This Windows function copies client coordinates for the window client area to
pWRect. In Presentation Manager, window origins are in the bottom left corner
instead of the upper left corner. The Presentation Manager function returns
coordinates relative to the lower left corner of the frame window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HANDLE GetClipboardData(wFormat);
       WORD wFormat;

Presentation Manager

ULONG WinQueryClipbrdData(hab, fmt)
      HAB hab;
      USHORT fmt;

This Windows function retrieves data from the clipboard in the format given by
wFormat. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

int GetClipboardFormatName(wFormat, lpName, wMax);
    WORD wFormat;
    LPSTR lpName;
    INT wMax;

Presentation Manager

HATOMTBL HATOMTBL WinQuerySystemAtomTable(VOID)

USHORT WinQueryAtomName(hAtomTbl, atom, pchBuffer, cchBufferMax)
       HATOMTBL hAtomTbl;
       ATOM atom;
       PSZ pchBuffer;
       USHORT cchBufferMax;

This Windows function copies wFormat's name (up to wMax characters) into
lpName. In Presentation Manager, the application should first call
WinQuerySystemAtomTable to obtain the handle to the system atom table. Once
this is obtained, the application can call WinQueryAtomName to obtain the name
for wFormat. wFormat should be a format which has been previously registered by
an application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HWND GetClipboardOwner();

Presentation Manager

HWND WinQueryClipbrdOwner(hab, fLock)
     HAB hab;
     BOOL fLock;
This Windows function retrieves the window handle of the current owner of the
clipboard. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HWND GetClipboardViewer();

Presentation Manager

No equivalent.

This Windows function retrieves the window handle of the first window in the
clipboard viewer chain. The Presentation Manager function gets the clipboard
viewer; viewers may not be chained in Presentation Manager.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

SHORT GetClipBox(hDC, lpRect);
      HDC hDC;
      LPRECT lpRect;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinMakeRect(hab, pwrc)
     HAB hab;
     PWRECT pwrc;

LONG GpiQueryClipBox(hps, prctlBound)
     HPS hps;
     PRECTL prctlBound;

This Windows function copies the dimensions of the bounding rectangle of the
current clip boundary to lpRect. The Presentation Manager function is
equivalent. The Presentation Manager function WinMakeRect transforms a long
WRECT structure into a long RECTL structure and can be called to obtain
prctlBound.

See Also:

 RECTL


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HANDLE GetCodeHandle(lpFunc);
       FARPROC lpFunc;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function retrieves the handle of the code segment containing the
given function. There is no Presentation Manager translation for this function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

DWORD GetCurrentPosition(hDC);
      HDC hDC;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiQueryCurrentPosition(hps, pptlPoint)
     HPS hps;
     PPOINTL pptlPoint;

This Windows function gets the coordinates of the current position. The
Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

LONG GetCurrentTime();

Presentation Manager

ULONG WinGetCurrentTime(hab)
      HAB hab;

This Windows function returns the time elapsed since the system was booted to
the current time. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID GetCursorPos(lpPoint);
     LPPOINT lpPoint;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinQueryPointerPos(hwndDesktop, pptl)
     HWND hwndDesktop;    /* handle of desktop window */
     PPOINTL pptl;        /* pointer to structure     */

This Windows function stores mouse cursor position in a POINT structure. The
Presentation Manager function is equivalent; HWND_DESKTOP should be used for
hDesktop.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HDC GetDC(hWnd);
    HWND hWnd;

Presentation Manager

HPS WinGetPS(hwnd)
    HWND hwnd;

This Windows function retrieves the display context for the client area of the
specified windows. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent, retrieving
a micro-ps for the specified window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

SHORT GetDeviceCaps(hDC, wIndex);
      HDC hDC;
      SHORT wIndex;

Presentation Manager

BOOL DevQueryCaps(hdc, lStartitem, cItems, alItems)
     HDC hdc;            /* handle to device context      */
     LONG lStartitem;    /* first item to be returned     */
     LONG cItems;        /* count of items to be returned */
     PLONG alItems;      /* array of elements             */

This Windows function retrieves the device-specific information specified by
wIndex. The Presentation Manager message is equivalent. wElementNum specifies
the first element of the array in which information should be stored (starting
from 1). wCount specifies the maximum number of items which may be returned in
the array. The constants used for the Windows call have changed, see
translations.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HWND GetDlgItem(hDlg, wId);
     HWND hDlg;
     INT wId;

Presentation Manager

HWND WinWindowFromID(hwndParent, id)
     HWND hwndParent;
     USHORT id;

This Windows function retrieves the handle of a dialog item from the given
dialog box. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

unsigned(hDlg, wId, lpfSuccess, fSigned);
     HWND hDlg;
     INT wId;
     BOOL FAR * lpfSuccess;
     BOOL fSigned;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinQueryDlgItemShort(hwndDlg, idItem, pResult, fSigned)
     HWND hwndDlg;
     USHORT idItem;
     PSHORT pResult;
     BOOL fSigned;

This Windows function translates text of wId into integer value, returning
FALSE in lpfSuccess if error occurs. The Presentation Manager function is
equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

INT GetDlgItemText(hDlg, wId, lpText, wMax);
    HWND hDlg;
    INT wId;
    LPSTR lpText;
    INT wMax;

Presentation Manager

SHORT WinQueryDlgItemText(hwndDlg, idItem, cchBufferMax, pchBuffer);
      HWND hwndDlg;
      USHORT idItem;
      USHORT cchBufferMax;
      PSZ pchBuffer;

This Windows function copies wId's control text (up to wMax chars) into lpText.
The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WORD GetDoubleClickTime();

Presentation Manager

LONG WinQuerySysValue(hwndDesktop, iSysValue)
     HWND hwndDesktop;
     SHORT iSysValue;

This Windows function retrieves the current double-click time of the system
mouse. The Presentation Manager function may be called with hwndDesktop set to
HWND_DESKTOP and iSysValue set to SV_DBLCLKTIME.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

short GetEnvironment(lpPortName, lpEnviron, wMaxCount);
      LPSTR lpPortName;
      LPSTR lpEnviron;
      WORD wMaxCount;

Presentation Manager

USHORT DosGetEnv(pselEnviron, pusOffsetCmd)
       PUSHORT pselEnviron;     /* pointer to variable for selector */
       PUSHORT pusOffsetCmd;    /* pointer to variable for offset   */

USHORT DosScanEnv(pszVarName, ppszResult)
       PSZ pszVarName;          /* pointer to environment-variable name   */
       PSZ FAR * ppszResult;    /* pointer to variable for result pointer */

This Windows function copies to lpEnviron the environment associated with the
device attached to the given port. The Presentation Manager function returns
the segment containing the environment and the offset into the segment where
the command line starts. The Presentation Manager application may search the
environment for specific values if desired by calling DosScanEnv.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HWND GetFocus();

Presentation Manager

HWND WinQueryFocus(hwndDesktop, fLock)
     HWND hwndDesktop;
     BOOL fLock;

This Windows function retrieves the handle of the window currently owning the
input focus. The Presentation Manager function should be called with
HWND_DESKTOP used for hwndDesktop. If the application will be sending messages
to a window with the focus after obtaining the handle, that window should be
locked.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

char GetGValue(rgbColor);
DWORD rgbColor;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function retrieves the green value of the given color. In PM, this
can be done by the following statement:

    Green = (BYTE) (((WORD) rgbColor ) <> 8)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

int GetInstanceData(hPrev, pData, wSize);
    HANDLE hPrev;
    NPSTR pData;
    INT wSize;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function copies wSize bytes of data from offset pData in instance
hPrevto same offset in current instance. There is no Presentation Manager
equivalent to this function. In Presentation Manager, every application has its
own space. Therefore, two instances of an application don't overlap each other
and there is no problem with overlap.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

INT GetKeyState(wVirtKey);
    INT wVirtKey;

Presentation Manager

SHORT WinGetKeyState(hwndDesktop, vkey)
      HWND hwndDesktop;
      SHORT vkey;

This Windows function retrieves the state of the virtual key specified by
wVirtKey. The Presentation Manager function returns the state of the key at the
time that the last message obtained from the queue was posted. HWND_DESKTOP
should be used for hDesktop. The wState parameter format has remained the same.

See Also:

 WinGetPhysicalKeyState


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

short GetMapMode(hDC);
      HDC hDC;

Presentation Manager

ULONG GpiQueryPS(hps, psizlPage)
      HPS hps;
      PSIZEL psizlPage;

This Windows function retrieves the current mapping mode. In Presentation
Manager, GpiQueryPS may be called to obtain the PS options and the page units
of the PS. The return value specifies the mapmode and type of PS, and is a
combination of the following flags:  PU_ARBITRARY, PU_PELS, PU_LOMETRIC,
PU_HIMETRIC, PU_LOENGLISH, PU_HIENGLISH, PU_TWIPS, GPIT_MICRO, and GPIA_ASSOC.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HMENU GetMenu(hWnd);
      HWND hWnd;

Presentation Manager

HWND WinWindowFromID(hwndParent, id)
     HWND hwndParent;
     USHORT id;

This Windows function retrieves the handle to the menu of the specified window.
For Presentation Manager function, call with hwndParent set to the frame window
handle and FID_MENU for id.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

INT GetMenuString(hMenu, wId, lpString, wMax, wPosFlag);
    HMENU hMenu;
    WORD wId;
    LPSTR lpString;
    INT wMax;
    WORD wPosFlag;

Presentation Manager

MRESULT WinSendMsg(hwnd, msg, mp1, mp2)
        HWND hwnd;
        USHORT msg;
        MPARAM mp1;
        MPARAM mp2;

This Windows function copies wId's menu label (up to wMax chars) into lpString,
with wPosFlag set to either MF_BYPOSITION or MF_BYCOMMAND. In Presentation
Manager, application should send MM_QUERYITEMTEXT message to menu window handle
with mp1 set to (menu id, wMax) and mp2 set to be a long pointer to buffer.
Return value is the number of bytes copied.

See Also:

 WinSendMsg


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL GetMessage(lpMsg, hwnd, wFilterMin, wFilterMax);
     LPMSG lpMsg;
     HWND hwnd;
     USHORT wFilterMin;
     USHORT wFilterMax;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinGetMsg(hab, pqmsg, hwndFilter, msgFilterFirst, msgFilterLast)
     HAB hab;
     PQMSG pqmsg;
     HWND hwndFilter;
     USHORT msgFilterFirst;
     USHORT msgFilterLast;

This Windows function retrieves a message in the range wFilterMin to wFilterMax
and stores it at lpMsg. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

DWORD GetMessagePos();

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinQueryMsgPos(hab, pptl)
     HAB hab;
     PPOINTL pptl;

This Windows function returns mouse position, in screen coordinates, at the
time of the last message retrieved by GetMessage. The Presentation Manager
function is similar, and returns position in a pointer to an array of two
points. The origin used to specify the mouse position has changed in
Presentation Manager to be the lower left corner of the screen.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

LONG GetMessageTime();

Presentation Manager

ULONG WinQueryMsgTime(hab)
      HAB hab;

This Windows function returns the message time for the last message retrieved
by GetMessage. The Presentation Manager function is the same.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HANDLE GetMetaFile(lpFileName);
       LPSTR lpFileName;

Presentation Manager

HMF GpiLoadMetaFile(hab, pszFilename)
    HAB hab;
    PSZ pszFilename;

This Windows function creates a handle for the metafile named by lpFileName.
The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HANDLE GetMetaFileBits(hMF);
       HANDLE hMF;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiQueryMetaFileBits(hmf, off, cbBuffer, pbBuffer)
     HMF hmf;
     LONG off;
     LONG cbBuffer;
     PBYTE pbBuffer;

LONG GpiQueryMetaFileLength(hmf)
     HMF hmf;

This Windows function stores the specified metafile as a collection of bits in
the global memory block. The Presentation Manager function is similar, and
should be called with off set to the offset within the metafile structure to
start reading, cbBuffer set to the size of pbBuffer, and pbBuffer pointing to
the storage area to hold the metafile. GpiQueryMetaFileLength should be called
when using GpiQueryMetaFileBits to insure that the buffer is large enough to
hold the metafile.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

int GetModuleFileName(hModule, lpFileName, wSize);
    HANDLE hModule;
    LPSTR lpFileName;
    INT wSize;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function copies the module filename (up to wSize characters) to
lpFileName. There is no Presentation Manager translation for this function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HANDLE GetModuleHandle(lpModuleName);
       LPSTR lpModuleName;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function returns the module handle of a module named by
lpModuleName. There is no Presentation Manager translation for this function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

int GetModuleUsage(hModule);
    HANDLE hModule;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function returns the reference count of the module hModule. There
is no Presentation Manager translation for this function. Memory management in
Presentation Manager is handled differently.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

DWORD GetNearestColor(hDC, rgbColor);
      HDC hDC;
      DWORD rgbColor;

Presentation Manager

LONG GpiQueryNearestColor(hps, flOptions, lRgbColorIn)
     HPS hps;
     ULONG flOptions;
     LONG lRgbColorIn;

This Windows function returns the device color closest to rgbColor. The
Presentation Manager function is equivalent (colors are specified in RGB terms)
and can be called with flOptions set to 0. Note that the nearest color returned
is one which is available in the physical palette on the device. This may, or
may not, be actually realizable with the currently loaded logical color table.

See Also:

 GpiCreateLogColorTable, GpiRealizeColorTable


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

SHORT GetObject(hObject, wCount, lpObject);
      HANDLE hObject;
      SHORT wCount;
      LPSTR lpObject;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function copies wCount bytes of logical data defining hObject to
lpObject. In Presentation Manager, pens and brushes are not objects, so this
function has no equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HWND GetParent(hwnd);
     HWND hwnd;

Presentation Manager

HWND WinQueryWindow(hwnd, cmd, fLock)
     HWND hwnd;
     SHORT cmd;
     BOOL fLock;

This Windows function retrieves the window handle of the specified window's
parent (if any). The Presentation Manager function may be called with the
constant QW_PARENT used for cmd in order to get the parent window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

DWORD GetPixel(hDC, X, Y);
      HDC hDC;
      SHORT X;
      SHORT Y;

Presentation Manager

LONG GpiQueryPel(hps, pgptPoint)
     HPS hps;
     PPOINTL pptl;

This windows function retrieves the RGB color value of the pixel at the point
specified by X and Y. The Presentation Manager function returns the color index
of the pixel specified byt the pptl parameter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID GetPolyFillMode(hDC);
     HDC hDC;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows fucntion retrieves the current polygon-filling mode. There is no
Presentation Manager equivalent to this function. This attribute is specified
when the polygon is to be drawn and is not stored in the PS.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

FARPROC GetProcAddress(hModule, lpProcName);
        HANDLE hModule;
        LPSTR lpProcName;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function returns address of the function named by lpProcName in
module hModule. There is no Presentation Manager translation for this function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

int GetProfileInt(lpSection, lpKey, wDefault);
    LPSTR lpSection;
    LPSTR lpKey;
    INT wDefault;

Presentation Manager

SHORT WinQueryProfileInt(hab, pszAppName, pszKeyName, sDefault)
      HAB hab;
      PSZ pszAppName;
      PSZ pszKeyName;
      SHORT sDefault;

This Windows function returns integer value named by lpKey in section lpSection
from the win.ini file; if name or section not found, wDefault is returned. The
Presentation Manager function is equivalent. In Presentation Manager, the
initialization file is Presentation Manager.ini.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

INT GetProfileString(lpSection, lpKey, lpDefault, lpReturned, wMax);
    LPSTR lpSection;
    LPSTR lpKey;
    LPSTR lpDefault;
    LPSTR lpReturned;
    INT wMax;

Presentation Manager

USHORT WinQueryProfileString(hab, pAppName, pKeyName, pDefault,
                             pProfileString, cchMaxPstring)
       HAB hab;
       PVOID pAppName;
       PVOID pKeyName;
       PVOID pDefault;
       PVOID pProfileString;
       USHORT cchMaxPstring;

This Windows function returns character string named by lpKey in section
lpSection from the win.ini file; if name or section not found, lpDefault is
returned. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent. In Presentation
Manager, the initialization file is Presentation Manager.ini.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HANDLE GetProp(hwnd, lpName);
       HWND hwnd;
       LPSTR lpName;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent This Windows function retrieves the data handle associated with
lpName from the window property list. There is no Presentation Manager
equivalent. It is possible to create and manage a property list by allocating
memory for it and managing it by hand.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

short GetRelAbs(hDC);
HDC hDC;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function retrieves the relabs flag. This function has no
Presentation Manager equivalent. In GPI, there is no equivalent to the relabs
flag; coordinates are always specified in absolute mode.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

short GetROP2(hDC);
      HDC hDC;

Presentation Manager

LONG GpiQueryMix(hps)
     HPS hps;

This Windows function is used to retrieve the current drawing mode. The
Presentation Manager function returns the mix mode (the equivalent to the
Windows drawing mode). These functions are equivalent. The constants used for
these functions have changed (see translation of R2_* constants).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

char GetRValue(rgbColor);
     DWORD rgbColor;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function retrieves the red value of the given color. In
Presentation Manager, this can be done by the following statement:

    Red = (BYTE) (rgbColor <> 16).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

INT GetScrollPos(hwnd, wBar);
    HWND hwnd;
    INT wBar;

Presentation Manager

HWND WinWindowFromID(hwndParent, id)
     HWND hwndParent;
     USHORT id;

MRESULT WinSendMsg(hwnd, msg, mp1, mp2)
        HWND hwnd;
        USHORT msg;
        MPARAM mp1;
        MPARAM mp2;

This Windows function retrieves the current position of scroll bar elevator. In
Presentation Manager, applications should send SBM_QUERYPOS to the scroll bar
control. In order to get the handle to the scroll bar control, application can
call WinWindowFromID with ScrollId set to FID_HORZSCROLL or FID_VERTSCROLL.

See Also:

 WinSendMsg


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID GetScrollRange(hwnd, wBar, lpMin, lpMax);
     HWND hwnd;
     INT wBar;
     LPINT lpMin;
     LPINT lpMax;

Presentation Manager

HWND WinWindowFromID(hwndParent, id)
     HWND hwndParent;
     USHORT id;

MRESULT WinSendMsg(hwnd, msg, mp1, mp2)
        HWND hwnd;
        USHORT msg;
        MPARAM mp1;
        MPARAM mp2;

This Windows function copies minimum and maximum scroll bar positions for given
scroll bar to lpMin and lpMax. In Presentation Manager, the application should
send SBM_QUERYRANGE message to scroll bar control. The return value is the
union of the maximum and minimum values of the scroll bar. The windows handle
for the scroll bar control may be obtained by calling WinWindowFromID with
ScollId set to either FID_HORZSCROLL or FID_VERTSCROLL.

See Also:

 WinSendMsg


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HANDLE GetStockObject(wIndex);
       short wIndex;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function retrieves a handle to a predefined stock pen, brush, or
font. In Presentation Manager, there are pen or brush objects. There are,
however, types which constitute the set of attributes normally associated with
pens and brushes. The Presentation Manager application may fill out a structure
of this type and select it into the PS in a similar manner to the way in which
a Windows application creates a pen or brush and selects it into the DC. For
more information, see translation of specific type (LOGPEN, LOGBRUSH, or
LOGFONT), translations of the constants used for this function, and the
translation for SelectObject.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

SHORT GetStretchBltMode(hDC);
      HDC hDC;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows functions returns the current stretching mode stored in the hDC.
In Presentation Manager, the stretching mode is not stored as a state
attribute, so this function has no equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HMENU GetSubMenu(HMENU, wPos);
      hMenu HMENU;
      INT wPos;

Presentation Manager

MRESULT WinSendMsg(hwnd, msg, mp1, mp2)
        HWND hwnd;
        USHORT msg;
        MPARAM mp1;
        MPARAM mp2;

This Windows function retrieves the menu handle of a popup menu. In
Presentation Manager, the application should send the MM_ITEMIDFROMPOSITION
message to the menu control window with the menu position in the low word of
mp1 to obtain the id of the popup menu. After this is obtained, a MM_QUERYITEM
message should be sent with the id in the low word of lParam1 and a pointer to
the MENUITEM structure in mp2. On return, the hwnd of the submenu will be in
field hwndSubMenu of the MENUITEM structure.

See Also:

 WinSendMsg


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

DWORD GetSysColor(wIndex);
      INT wIndex;

Presentation Manager

LONG WinQuerySysColor(hwndDesktop, iColor, lReserved)
     HWND hwndDesktop;
     LONG iColor;
     LONG lReserved;

This Windows function retrieves the system color identified by wIndex. The
Presentation Manager function is equivalent and returns the RGB value
corresponding to the index value specified by the iColor parameter. The
constants for wIndex have changed, see translation for COLOR_* constants.

See Also:

 WinSetSysColors


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HWND GetSysModalWindow();

Presentation Manager

HWND WinQuerySysModalWindow(hwndDesktop, fLock)
     HWND hwndDesktop;
     BOOL fLock;

This Windows function returns the handle of a system-modal window, if one is
present. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent; HWND_DESKTOP should
be used for hwndDeskTop.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HMENU GetSystemMenu(hwnd, fRevert);
      HWND hwnd;
      BOOL fRevert;

Presentation Manager

HWND WinWindowFromID(hwndParent, id)
     HWND hwndParent;
     USHORT id;

This Windows function allows access to the system menu for copying and
modification; fRevert is nonzero to restore the original system menu. For
Presentation Manager function, call with hwndParent set to the frame window
handle and FID_SYSMENU for wId. Presentation Manager doesn't keep a separate
copy of the system menu the way that Windows does.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

int GetSystemMetrics(wIndex);
    int wIndex;

Presentation Manager

LONG WinQuerySysValue(hwndDesktop, iSysValue)
     HWND hwndDesktop;
     SHORT iSysValue;

This Windows function retrieves information about the system metrics identified
by wIndex. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent. The format for the
constants used for wIndex has changed, see translation of SM_* constants.

See Also:

 WinGetSysValue


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

DWORD GetTextColor(hDC);
      HDC hDC;

Presentation Manager

LONG GpiQueryAttrs(hps, lPrimType, flAttrsMask, pbunAttrs)
     HPS hps;
     LONG lPrimType;
     ULONG flAttrsMask;
     PBUNDLE pbunAttrs;

This Windows function retrieves the current text color. The Presentation
Manager application can call GpiQueryAttrs with lPrimType set to PRIM_CHAR,
lAttrs set to CBB_COLOR, and pAttrs set to be a long pointer to a CHARBUNDLE
structure. On return from this function, field lColor in the CHARBUNDLE
structure should contain the current text color.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

short GetTextFace(hDC, wCount, lpFaceName);
      HDC hDC;
      SHORT wCount;
      LPSTR lpFaceName;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiQueryFontMetrics(hps, cbMetrics, pfmMetrics)
     HPS hps;
     LONG cbMetrics;
     PFONTMETRICS pfmMetrics;

This Windows function copies the current font's facename (up to wCount
characters) into lpFaceName. In PM, the application must call
GpiQueryFontMetrics to get the metrics information. The facename is store in
field FaceName.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL GetTextMetrics(hDC, lpMetrics);
     HDC hDC;
     LPTEXTMETRIC lpMetrics;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiQueryFontMetrics(hps, cbMetrics, pfmMetrics)
     HPS hps;
     LONG cbMetrics;
     PFONTMETRICS pfmMetrics;

This Windows function fills buffer given by lpMetrics with metrics for
currently selected font. Refer to the TEXTMETRIC structure for more
information. The GpiQueryFonts function returns a font metrics record for the
currently selected logical font. Refer to the FONTMETRICS structure for more
information. FONTMETRICS,


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID  GetThresholdStatus();

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function returns a bit mask containing the threshold event status;
if a bit is set, the given voice queue is below threshold.  There is no PM
equivalent; sound functions are not supported in PM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL GetUpdateRect(hWnd, lpRect, fErase);
     HWND hWnd;
     LPRECT lpRect;
     BOOL fErase;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinQueryUpdateRect(hwnd, prcl)
     HWND hwnd;
     PRECTL prcl;

This Windows function copies dimensions of bounding rectangle of window region
that needs to updating to lpRect, with fErase specifying whether the background
needs erasing. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent, but cannot be
used to specify that the background should be erased.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WORD GetVersion();

Presentation Manager

ULONG WinQueryVersion(hab)
      HAB hab;

This Windows function returns the current version of Windows. The PM function
is similar. The return value of the PM value is composed of a long which has
the environment in the high word and the version in the low word.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

DWORD GetViewportExt(hDC);
      HDC hDC;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiQueryModelTransformMatrix(hps, cElements, pmatlfTransform)
     HPS hps;
     LONG cElements;
     PMATRIXLF pmatlfTransform;

This Windows function retrieves the x and y extents of the display context's
viewport. The Presentation Manager function returns the transformation matrix
which PM uses to transform the coordinates. Applications using this function
should be careful because there are now many possible levels of transformation
and this function only returns the matrix at the model transformation level.
This function returns up to nine values in the provided array. These values are
used to transform a given x, y as follows:

    New X = (Val1 * x + Val4 * y + Val7).
    New Y = (Val2 * x + Val5 * y + Val8).
Values 1, 2, 4, and 5 are stored in fixed point notation. To convert from fixed
values to floats, the following statement may be used:

    FloatVal = ((float) FixVal / (float) 0x10000).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

DWORD GetViewportOrg(hDC);
      HDC hDC;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiQueryModelTransformMatrix(hps, cElements, pmatlfTransform)
     HPS hps;
     LONG cElements;
     PMATRIXLF pmatlfTransform;

This Windows function retrieves the x and y coordinates of the display
context's viewport.

See Also:

 GetViewportExt


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

DWORD GetWindowExt(hDC);
      HDC hDC;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiQueryModelTransformMatrix(hps, cElements, pmatlfTransform)
     HPS hps;
     LONG cElements;
     PMATRIXLF pmatlfTransform;

This Windows function retrieves the x and y coordinates of the display
context's window.

See Also:

 GetViewportExt


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

LONG GetWindowLong(hwnd, wIndex);
     HWND hwnd;
     INT wIndex;

Presentation Manager

ULONG WinQueryWindowULong(hwnd, index)
      HWND hwnd;
      SHORT index;

This Windows function retrieves information identified by wIndex about the
given window. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent, although the
indices into the window information have changed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

DWORD GetWindowOrg(hDC);
      HDC hDC;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiQueryModelTransformMatrix(hps, cElements, pmatlfTransform)
     HPS hps;
     LONG cElements;
     PMATRIXLF pmatlfTransform;

This Windows function retrieves the x and y coordinates of the display
context's origin.

See Also:

 GetViewportExt


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID GetWindowRect(hwnd, lpRect);
     HWND hwnd;
     LPRECT lpRect;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinQueryWindowRect(hwnd, prclDest)
     HWND hwnd;
     PRECTL prclDest;

BOOL WinMakePoints(hab, pwpt, cwpt)
     HAB hab;
     PWPOINT pwpt;
     SHORT cwpt;

BOOL WinMapWindowPoints(hwndFrom, hwndTo, pptl, cwpt)
     HWND hwndFrom;
     HWND hwndTo;
     PPOINTL pptl;
     SHORT cwpt;

This Windows function copies dimensions, in screen coordinates, of entire
window to lpRect. In PM, the function WinQueryWindowRect obtains the dimensions
of the frame window relative to the lower left corner of the window. These
coordinates can then be put into points and the function WinMakePoints converts
the word points into long points. Finally, WinMapWindowPoints can be called
with hWndFrom set to the frame window and hWndTo set to HWND_DESKTOP. This
converts the points into screen coordinates.

See Also:

 WinMakePoints WinMapWindowPoints


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

INT GetWindowText(hwnd, lpText, wMax);
    HWND hwnd;
    LPSTR lpText;
    INT wMax;

Presentation Manager

SHORT WinQueryWindowText(hwnd, cchBufferMax, pszBuffer)
      HWND hwnd;
      SHORT cchBufferMax;
      PSZ pszBuffer;

This Windows function copies hwnd's window caption (up to wMax chars) into
lpText. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WORD GetWindowWord(hwnd, wIndex);
     HWND hwnd;
     INT wIndex;

Presentation Manager

USHORT WinQueryWindowUShort(hwnd, index)
       HWND hwnd;
       SHORT index;

This Windows function retrieves information identified by wIndex about the
given window. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent although many of
the constants used for wIndex have changed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HANDLE GlobalAlloc(wFlags, dwBytes);
       WORD wFlags;
       DWORD dwBytes;

Presentation Manager

USHORT DosAllocHuge(usNumSeg, usPartialSeg, psel, usMaxNumSeg, fAlloc)
       USHORT usNumSeg;     /* number of 65,536-byte segments             */
       USHORT usPartialSeg; /* number of bytes in last segment            */
       PSEL psel;           /* pointer to variable for selector allocated */
       USHORT usMaxNumSeg;  /* max. number of 65,536-byte segments        */
       USHORT fAlloc;       /* alloc/discardable flags                    */

USHORT DosGetHugeShift(pusShiftCount)
       PUSHORT pusShiftCount;    /* shift count returned */

USHORT  DosAllocSeg(usSize, psel, fAlloc)
        USHORT usSize;    /* number of bytes requested   */
        PSEL psel;        /* Receives selector allocated */
        USHORT fAlloc;    /* allocation flags            */

USHORT DosSubSet(sel, fFlags, cbSeg)
       SEL sel;          /* segment selector  */
       USHORT fFlags;    /* parameter flags   */
       USHORT cbSeg;     /* new size of block */

USHORT DosSubAlloc(sel, pusOffset, usSize)
       SEL sel;              /* segment selector               */
       PUSHORT pusOffset;    /* pointer to variable for offset */
       USHORT usSize;        /* size of allocation             */

This Windows function allocates dwBytes of memory from the global heap with the
memory type (fixed or moveable) set by wFlags. The Presentation Manager
functions allocate global memory and return the address of the segment in
SegSel. If more than 64 K bytes is to be allocated, DosAllocHuge should be
called with wSizeLast set to the number of bytes in the last segment to be
allocated and wShareInd set to 1 if the memory will be shared with other
applications or 0 otherwise. wMaxSegs indicates the maximum number of segments
that this memory block will cover (it may be reallocated to be a larger size).
In order to access a subsequent segment (beyond the first), the application
needs to call DosGetHugeShift to get wShiftCount. The application then adds '2
to the wShiftCount power' to SegSel to get the next segment. The DosAllocSeg
function is similar, and allocates the memory from one segment. In many Windows
applications, GlobalAlloc is used to allocate small chunks of memory instead of
large memory blocks. If this is the case, the application can use DosAllocSeg
to allocate a segment and can call DosSubSet on that segment to prepare it for
sub-allocation. The wFlags parameter is 0 if the application has already called
DosSubSet at least once for the segment, and the segment should be increased by
wSize. Otherwise, wFlags should be 1. After calling DosSubSet, the application
can allocate memory from the segment by calling DosSubAlloc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

DWORD GlobalCompact(dwMinFree);
      DWORD dwMinFree;

Presentation Manager

USHORT DosMemAvail(pulAvailMem)
       PULONG pulAvailMem;    /* available memory */

This Windows function compacts global memory to generate dwMinFree free bytes.
In Presentation Manager, no compaction of global memory is performed.
DosMemAvail returns the largest existing memory block which may be allocated.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HANDLE GlobalDiscard(hMem);
       HANDLE hMem;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function discards globals memory block hMem if reference count is
zero. There is no PM or Presentation Manager equivalent to this function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WORD GlobalFlags(hMem);
     HANDLE hMem;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function returns the memory type of global memory block hMem.
There is no PM or Presentation Manager equivalent to this function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HANDLE GlobalFree(hMem);
       HANDLE hMem;

Presentation Manager

USHORT DosFreeSeg(sel)
       SEL sel;    /* selector */

USHORT DosSubFree(sel, offBlock, cbBlock)
       SEL sel;            /* segment selector */
       USHORT offBlock;    /* block offset     */
       USHORT cbBlock;     /* size of block    */

This Windows function removes global memory block hMem from memory if reference
count is zero. If the memory block was allocated by DosAllocHuge or
DosAllocSeg, the function DosFreeSeg should be called. If the memory block was
allocated by DosSubAlloc, then DosSubFree should be called.

See Also:

 DosAllocHuge DosSubAlloc DosAllocSeg


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

DWORD GlobalHandle(wMem);
      WORD wMem;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function retrieves the handle of the global memory object whose
segment address is wMem. There is no PM or Presentation Manager equivalent to
this function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

LPSTR GlobalLock(hMem);
      HANDLE hMem;

Presentation Manager

USHORT DosLockSeg(sel)
       SEL sel;    /* selector to lock */

This Windows function returns address of global memory block hMem, locks block
in memory, and increases reference count by one. The Presentation Manager
function is only applicable for global memory blocks allocated with the
DosAllocSeg call and specified as discardable. For these blocks, this call
prevents them from being discarded.

See Also:

 DosAllocSeg


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HANDLE GlobalReAlloc(hMem, dwBytes, wFlags);
       HANDLE hMem;
       DWORD dwBytes;
       WORD wFlags;

Presentation Manager

USHORT DosReallocSeg(usNewSize, sel)
       USHORT usNewSize;    /* new segment size */
       SEL sel;             /* selector         */

USHORT DosReallocHuge(usNumSeg, usPartialSize, sel)
       USHORT usNumSeg;         /* number of 65,536-byte segments  */
       USHORT usPartialSize;    /* number of bytes in last segment */
       SEL sel;                 /* selector                        */

This Windows function reallocates the global memory block hMem to dwBytes and
memory type wFlags. These Presentation Manager functions are equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

DWORD GlobalSize(hMem);
HANDLE hMem;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function returns the size, in bytes, of global memory block
hMem. There is no Presentation Manager equivalent to this function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL GlobalUnlock(hMem);
     HANDLE hMem;

Presentation Manager

USHORT DosUnlockSeg(sel)
       SEL sel;    /* selector of segment to be unlocked */

This Windows function unlocks global memory block hMem and decreases the
reference count by one. The Presentation Manager function is only applicable
for memory blocks allocated with the DosAllocSeg call and specified as
discardable. For these blocks, this call reduces the reference counter, and
these blocks may be discarded when the reference counter reaches 0.

See Also:

 DosAllocSeg


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL GrayString(hDC, hBrush, lpOutputFunc, lpData, wCount, X, Y,
                wWidth, wHeight);
     HDC hDC;
     HBRUSH hBrush;
     FARPROC lpOutputFunc;
     DWORD lpData;
     INT wCount;
     INT X;
     INT Y;
     INT wWidth;
     INT wHeight;

Presentation Manager

SHORT WinDrawText(hps, cchText, pchText, pcrl, clrFore, clrBack, rgfCmd)
      HPS hps;
      SHORT cchText;
      PSZ pchText;
      PRECTL prcl;
      LONG clrFore;
      LONG clrBack;
      USHORT rgfCmd;

LONG GpiCharString(hps, cchString, pchString)
     HPS hps;
     LONG cchString;
     PCH pchString;

This Windows function writes wCount characters of string at X, Y, using
lpOutputFunc (or TextOut if NULL), graying text using hBrush; lpData specifies
output string or data to be passed to lpOutputFunc. In PM, the application may
call WinDrawText with DT_HALFTONE as one of the options (see DT_* translation
for other options). Additionally, the application may call GpiCharString which
draws the character string using the attributes currently selected into the PS.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID HideCaret(hwnd);
     HWND hwnd;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinShowCursor(hwnd, fShow)
     HWND hwnd;
     BOOL fShow;

This Windows function removes the system caret from the given window. The
Presentation Manager function is similar and should be called with fShow set to
FALSE.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL HiliteMenuItem(hwnd, hMenu, wId, wHilite);
     HWND hwnd;
     HMENU hMenu;
     WORD wId;
     WORD wHilite;

Presentation Manager

MRESULT WinSendMsg(hwnd, msg, mp1, mp2)
        HWND hwnd;
        USHORT msg;
        MPARAM mp1;
        MPARAM mp2;

This windows function highlights or removes the highlighting from a top-level
(menu bar) menu item. In PM, application can send MM_SETATTR message to menu
window handle. Set lParam1 to be menu id in low word and bIncludeSubmenus in
high word. Set lParam2 to be MIA_HILITED in low word and either MIA_HILITED or
0 in high word. To unhilite a menu item, for example, send
MAKELONG(MIA_HILITED, 0) as the last parameter. Return value is old hilite
state of item.

See Also:

 WinSendMsg


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

INT InflateRect(lpRect, X, Y);
    LPRECT lpRect;
    INT X;
    INT Y;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinInflateRect(hab, prcl, cx, cy)
     HAB hab;
     PRECTL prcl;
     SHORT cx;
     SHORT cy;

This Windows function expands or shrinks the rectangle specified by lpRect by X
units on the left and right ends of the rectangle and Y units on the top and
bottom. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL InitAtomTable(wSize);
     int wSize;

Presentation Manager

HATOMTBL WinCreateAtomTable(cbInitial, cbBuckets)
         USHORT cbInitial;
         USHORT cbBuckets;

This Windows function initializes atom hash table and sets it to wSize atoms.
The Presentation Manager function is similar and may be called with wBytes set
to 0 in order to use the default value as the initial size.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL InSendMessage();

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinInSendMsg(hab)
     HAB hab;

This Windows function returns TRUE if window function is processing a message
sent with SendMessage. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

short IntersectClipRect(hDC, X1, Y1, X2, Y2);
      HDC hDC;
      SHORT X1;
      SHORT Y1;
      SHORT X2;
      SHORT Y2;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinMakeRect(hab, pwrc)
     HAB hab;
     PWRECT pwrc;

LONG GpiIntersectClipRectangle(hps, pgrc)
     HPS hps;
     PRECTL pgrc;

This Windows function forms new clipping region from intersection of current
clipping region and given rectangle. The Presentation Manager function is is
equivalent. The Presentation Manager function WinMakeRect transforms a word
WRECT structure into a RECTL structure and can be called to obtain pRectL.

See Also:

 WinMakeRect


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

int IntersectRect(lpDest, lpSrc1, lpSrc2);
    LPRECT lpDest;
    LPRECT lpSrc1;
    LPRECT lpSrc2;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinIntersectRect(hab, prclDst, prclSrc1, prclSrc2)
     HAB hab;
     PRECTL prclDst;
     PRECTL prclSrc1;
     PRECTL prclSrc2;

This Windows function finds the intersection of two rectangles and copies it to
lpDest. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID InvalidateRect(hwnd, lpRect, fErase);
     HWND hwnd;
     LPRECT lpRect;
     BOOL fErase;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinInvalidateRect(hwnd, prcl, fIncludeChildren)
     HWND hwnd;
     PRECTL prcl;
     BOOL fIncludeChildren;

This Windows function marks for repainting the rectangle specified by lpRect
(in client coordinates); the rectangle is erased if fErase is nonzero. The
Presentation Manager function is the same.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID InvalidateRgn(hwnd, hrgn, fErase);
     HWND hwnd;
     HRGN hrgn;
     BOOL fErase;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinInvalidateRegion(hwnd, hrgn, fIncludeChildren)
     HWND hwnd;
     HRGN hrgn;
     BOOL fIncludeChildren;

This Windows function marks hrgn for repainting; the region is erased if fErase
is nonzero. The Presentation Manager function is the same.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

INT InvertRect(hDC, lpRect);
    HDC hDC;
    LPRECT lpRect;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinInvertRect(hps, prcl)
     HPS hps;
     PRECTL prcl;

This Windows function inverts the display bits of the specified rectangle. The
Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL InvertRgn(hDC, hRGN);
     HDC hDC;
     HRGN hRGN;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiSetMix(hps, lMixMode)
     HPS hps;
     LONG lMixMode;

LONG GpiPaintRegion(hps, hrgn)
     HPS hps;
     HRGN hrgn;

This Windows function inverts the colors in the region specified by hRGN. In
PM, the application can call GpiSetMix to set the mix-mode to FM_INVERT. After
this is done, GpiPaintRegion can be called with the specified region.

See Also:

 GpiPaintRegion


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL IsChild(hParent, hWnd);
     HWND hParent;
     HWND hWnd;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinIsChild(hwnd, hwndParent)
     HWND hwnd;
     HWND hwndParent;

This Windows function returns TRUE if given window is a child of hParent. The
Presentation Manager function returns TRUE if hChild is a descendent of
hParent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL IsClipboardFormatAvailable(wFormat);
     WORD wFormat;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinQueryClipbrdFmtInfo(hab, fmt, pfFmtInfo)
     HAB hab;
     USHORT fmt;
     PUSHORT pfFmtInfo;

This Windows function returns TRUE if data in given format is available. The
Presentation Manager function is equivalent. Additionally, if the format is
available, lpInfo will contain the CFI_* flags (CFI_SELECTOR, CFI_OWNERFRand
CFI_OWNERDISPLAY) which were used when the data was put on the clipboard.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL IsDialogMessage(hDlg, lpMsg);
     HWND hDlg;
     LPMSG lpMsg;

Presentation Manager

USHORT WinProcessDlg(hwndDlg)
       HWND hwndDlg;

This Windows function determines whether lpMsg is intended for the given
modeless dialog box; if so, the message is processed and fUsed is nonzero. The
Presentation Manager function is the same.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WORD IsDlgButtonChecked(hDlg, wId);
     HWND hDlg;
     int wId;

Presentation Manager

MRESULT WinSendDlgItemMsg(hwndDlg, idItem, msg, mp1, mp2)
        HWND hwndDlg;
        USHORT idItem;
        USHORT msg;
        MPARAM mp1;
        MPARAM mp2;

This Windows function tests whether wId button is checked; for a 3-state
button, returns 2 for grayed, 1 for checked, zero for neither. The PM
application should send BM_QUERYCHECK message to the button control with both
message parameters 0. The return value is the check position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL IsIconic(hwnd);
     HWND hwnd;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinQueryWindowPos(hwnd, pswp)
     HWND hwnd;
     PSWP pswp;

This Windows function specifies whether or not a window is open or closed
(iconic). After the Presentation Manager function is called, the fs field of
pSwp structure should be checked to see if SWP_MINIMIZE is set.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL IsWindow(hwnd);
     HWND hwnd;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinIsWindow(hab, hwnd)
     HAB hab;
     HWND hwnd;

This Windows function determines whether or not hwnd is a valid, existing
window. The Presentation Manager function is the same.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL IsWindowEnabled(hwnd);
     HWND hwnd;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinIsWindowEnabled(hwnd)
     HWND hwnd;

This Windows function specifies whether or not hwnd is enabled for mouse and
keyboard input. The Presentation Manager function is the same.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL IsWindowVisible(hwnd);
     HWND hwnd;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinIsWindowVisible(hwnd)
     HWND hwnd;

This Windows function determines whether or not the given window is visible on
the screen. The Presentation Manager function is the same.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL KillTimer(hWnd, wIdEvent);
     HWND hWnd;
     SHORT wIdEvent;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinStopTimer(hab, hwnd, idTimer)
     HAB hab;
     HWND hwnd;
     USHORT idTimer;

This Windows function kills the timer event identified by hWnd and wIdEvent.
The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

void LineDDA(X1, Y1, X2, Y2, lpLineFunc, lpData);
     SHORT X1;
     SHORT Y1;
     SHORT X2;
     SHORT Y2;
     FARPROC lpLineFunc;
     LPSTR lpData;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

Windows function computes successive points in line starting at X1, Y1 and
ending at X2, Y2, passing each point and lpData parameter to lpLineFunc
function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL LineTo(hDC, X, Y);
     HDC hDC;
     SHORT X;
     SHORT Y;

Presentation Manager

LONG GpiLine(hps, pptl)
     HPS hps;
     PPOINTL pptl;

This Windows function draws a line with the current pen from the current
position up to the point X, Y. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HANDLE LoadAccelerators(hInst, lpTableName);
       HANDLE hInst;
       LPSTR lpTableName;

Presentation Manager

HACCEL WinLoadAccelTable(hab, hmod, idAccelTable)
       HAB hab;
       HMODULE hmod;
       USHORT idAccelTable;

This Windows function is used to load the accelerator table named by
lpTableName. In Windows, applications needed to load accelerator table and call
TranslateAccelerator in message loop. In PM, this is done automatically if the
top level window is created with WinCreateStdWindow and the wId parameter
matches the id of the accelerator table. WinLoadAccelTable allows applications
to load the accelerator table manually.

See Also:

 TranslateAccelerator WinCreateStdWindow


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HBITMAP LoadBitmap(hInst, lpName);
        HANDLE hInst;
        LPSTR lpName;

Presentation Manager

HBITMAP GpiLoadBitmap(hps, hModule, idBitmap, lWidth, lHeight)
        HPS hps;
        USHORT hModule;
        USHORT idBitmap;
        LONG lWidth;
        LONG lHeight;

This Windows function loads the bitmap resource named by lpName from the
application resource file. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent;
idMod can be set to NULL if the application resource file is to be used.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HCURSOR LoadCursor(hInst, lpCursorName);
        HANDLE hInst;
        LPSTR lpCursorName;

Presentation Manager

HPOINTER WinQuerySysPointer(hwndDesktop, iptr, fLoad)
         HWND hwndDesktop;
         SHORT iptr;
         BOOL fLoad;

HPOINTER WinLoadPointer(hwndDesktop, hmod, idres)
         HWND hwndDesktop;
         HMODULE hmod;
         USHORT idres;

This Windows function loads the cursor resource named by lpCursorName. The
Presentation Manager function is equivalent; if the cursor should be loaded
from the application resource file, WinLoadPointer should be called with NULL
sent for hMod. If the cursor requested is one of the system pointers,
WinQuerySysPointer should be called. The constants for the system pointers have
changed; see translations for IDC_* constants.

See Also:

 WinQuerySysPointer


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HANDLE LoadLibrary(lpLibFileName);
       LPSTR lpLibFileName;

Presentation Manager

USHORT DosLoadModule(pszFailName, cbFileName, pszModName, phMod)
       PSZ pszFailName;   /* pointer to buffer for failure name    */
       USHORT cbFileName; /* length of failure-name buffer         */
       PSZ pszModName;    /* pointer to module name                */
       PHMODULE phmod;    /* pointer to variable for module handle */

This Windows function loads the library module named by lpLibFileName. The
Presentation Manager function loads the dynamic link module specified by
pModName. If an error occurs, the name of the object which led to the error is
stored in pObjectBuf. Otherwise, wpModHandle will contain the handle to the
loaded module.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HMENU LoadMenu(hInst, lpMenuName);
      HANDLE hInst;
      LPSTR lpMenuName;

Presentation Manager

HWND WinLoadMenu(owner, hmod, menuid)
     HWND owner;
     HMODULE hmod;
     USHORT menuid;
The Windows functions loads a menu from the resource file and returns a handle.
The Presentation Manager function is similar. If hwnd is specified as NULL, the
menu is created but is not associated with a window. If hMod is NULL, the menu
template is retrieved from the application resource file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HANDLE LoadResource(hInst, hResInfo);
       HANDLE hInst;
       HANDLE hResInfo;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function loads the resource hResInfo and returns a handle to the
resource.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

INT LoadString(hInst, wId, lpString, wMax);
    HANDLE hInst;
    USHORT wId;
    LPSTR lpString;
    INT wMax;

Presentation Manager

SHORT WinLoadString(hab, hmod, id, cchMax, pchBuffer)
      HAB hab;
      HMODULE hmod;
      USHORT id;
      SHORT cchMax;
      PSZ pchBuffer;

This Windows function loads string resource wId into the buffer lpString,
copying up to wMax characters. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent
to the Windows function. If NULL is passed in for hMod, the stringtable is
accessed from the application resource file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HANDLE LocalAlloc(wFlags, wBytes);
       WORD wFlags;
       WORD wBytes;

Presentation Manager

NPBYTE WinAllocMem(hHeap, cb)
       HHEAP hHeap;    /* handle to heap              */
       USHORT cb;      /* number of bytes to allocate */

This Windows function allocates wBytes of memory from the local heap; memory
type (e.g., fixed or moveable) is set by wFlags. The Presentation Manager
function also allocates a memory block from the local heap. In Presentation
Manager, the heap must be created by the application (see translation for
WinMain). hHeap is the handle returned by WinCreateHeap. The pointer returned
by WinAllocMem points to 2 reserved words followed by the memory block. If the
block is be a moveable block (specified in Windows by the LMEM_MOVEABLE flag),
a pointer to the memory block can be stored in the first word. When this block
is moved, the pointer stored in the first word is updated to reflect the new
position of the block. This is similar to the way in which Windows updates the
handle to the memory block when it is moved, the difference being that in
Windows, copies of the handle are updated also. If the block is non-moveable,
the first reserved word should remain 0. The second reserved word stores the
size of the memory block which follows.

See Also:

 WinCreateHeap


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WORD LocalCompact(wMinFree);
     WORD wMinFree;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function compacts local memory to generate wMinFree free bytes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HANDLE LocalDiscard(hMem);
       HANDLE hMem;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function discards the local memory block hMem if reference count
is zero. In PM, memory blocks cannot be discarded so this function has no
equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WORD LocalFlags(hMem);
     HANDLE hMem;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function returns the status of the memory block, i.e. whether it
has been discarded or is marked as discardable. In PM, memory blocks cannot be
discarded so this function has no equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HANDLE LocalFree(hMem);
       HANDLE hMem;

Presentation Manager

NPBYTE WinFreeMem(hHeap, npMem, cbMem)
       HHEAP hHeap;
       NPBYTE npMem;
       USHORT cbMem;

This Windows function frees local memory block hMem from memory if reference
count is 0. The Presentation Manager function also frees allocated memory
blocks in the local heap. If the Presentation Manager heap is moveable (see
WinMain translation), the wBytes parameter is ignored. hHeap is the handle to
the heap returned by WinCreateHeap.

See Also:

 WinCreateHeap


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID LocalFreeze(wDummy);
     WORD wDummy;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function prevents the heap from being compacted. There is no PM
equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HANDLE LocalHandle(wMem);
       WORD wMem;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function retrieves the handle of the local memory object whose
address is wMem. There is no PM equivalent to this function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WORD LocalHandleDelta(wNewDelta);
     WORD wNewDelta;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function sets the number of new handles entries to be added to the
handle table when it is filled. In PM, the equivalent to handles are stored at
the beginning of each memory block (see LocalAlloc and WinMain translations),
so this function has no equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL LocalInit(wValue, pString, pString);
     WORD wValue;
     NPCH pString;
     NPCH pString;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function initializes the local heap. There is no equivalent in PM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

CHAR * LocalLock(hMem);
     HANDLE hMem;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This function locks a memory block, preventing it from being moved or
discarded. In PM, the first reserved word in a memory block (see LocalAlloc and
WinMain translations) indicates whether it can be moved. If this word is 0, the
block may not be moved. In PM, memory blocks are never discarded.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID LocalMelt(dummy);
     WORD dummy;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function is the complement of the LocalFreeze function and
specifies that the heap can be compacted. There is no PM equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

FARPROC LocalNotify(lpFunc);
        FARPROC lpFunc;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function sets the callback function for handling notification
messages from local memory. There is no equivalent Presentation Manager
function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HANDLE LocalReAlloc(hMem, wNewSize, wFlags);
       HANDLE hMem;
       WORD wNewSize;
       WORD wFlags;

Presentation Manager

NPBYTE WinReallocMem(hHeap, npMem, cbOld, cbNew)
       HHEAP hHeap;
       NPBYTE npMem;
       USHORT cbOld;
       USHORT cbNew;
The Windows function reallocates the memory block, changing the size to that
specified. The Presentation Manager function performs the same operation. hHeap
is the handle to the heap returned by WinCreateHeap. If the heap was specified
as moveable, the wOldSize parameter is ignored (see WinMain translation).

See Also:

 WinCreateHeap


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WORD LocalSize(hMem);
     HANDLE hMem;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function returns the current size of the memory block. In PM, the
size of the memory block is stored in the second reserved word at the beginning
of the block (see LocalAlloc and WinMain translations).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL LocalUnlock(hMem);
     HANDLE hMem;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function unlocks a memory block, allowing it to be moved or
discarded (depending on the style set when allocating it). In Presentation
Manager, the first reserved word in a memory block (see LocalAlloc and WinMain
translations) indicates whether it can be moved. If it is non-zero, the block
may be moved. In Presentation Manager, memory blocks are never discarded.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HANDLE LockData(Dummy);
       WORD Dummy;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function locks the data segment in memory. There is no PM
equivalent to this function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

LPSTR LockResource(hResInfo);
      HANDLE hResInfo;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function returns the memory address of the resource hResInfo,
locks the resource in memory, and increases the reference count by one.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HANDLE LockSegment(wSegment);
       WORD wSegment;

Presentation Manager

USHORT DosLockSeg(sel)
       SEL sel;    /* selector to lock */

This Windows function locks the segment whose segment address is wSegment. The
Presentation Manager function is only applicable for segments allocated with
the DosAllocSeg call and specified as discardable. For these segments, this
call prevents them from being discarded.

See Also:

 DosAllocSeg


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL LPtoDP(hDC, pPoints, wNum);
     HDC hDC;
PPOINT pPoints;
short wNum;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiConvert(hps, lSrc, lTarg, cPoints, paptlPoints)
     HPS hps;
     LONG lSrc;
     LONG lTarg;
     LONG cPoints;
     PPOINTL paptlPoints;

This Windows function converts logical points into device points. The
Presentation Manager function is equivalent and may be called with lSrc set to
CVTC_WORLD and lTarg set to CVTC_DEVICE.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

FARPROC MakeProcInstance(lpProc, hInst);
        FARPROC lpProc;
        HANDLE hInst;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function returns a function instance address for function lpProc,
with the new address insuring that calls to it will use the same data segment
as specified with hInst. There is no PM equivalent to this function. In PM,
applications don't need to perform this call for functions which PM will
callback.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID MapDialogRect(hDlg, lpRect);
     HWND hDlg;
     LPRECT lpRect;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinMapDlgPoints(hwndDlg, pptl, cwpt, fCalcWindowCoords)
     HWND hwndDlg;
     PPOINTL pptl;
     SHORT cwpt;
     BOOL fCalcWindowCoords;
This Windows function converts the dialog box coordinates given in lpRect to
client coordinates. The Presentation Manager function is more general and can
be used to map any number of points from either dialog coordinates to window
coordinates or window coordinates to dialog coordinates.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL MessageBeep(wMessageBoxType);
     WORD wMessageBoxType;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinAlarm(hwndDesktop, rgfType)
     HWND hwndDesktop;    /* handle of desktop */
     USHORT rgfType;      /* alarm style       */

This Windows function generates a beep at the system speaker when a message box
is displayed. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent, with the
following flags specified for wWarningType: WA_DEFAULT, WA_WARNING, WA_NOTE,
and WA_ERROR.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

INT MessageBox(hwnd, lpText, lpCaption, wType);
    HWND hwnd;
    LPSTR lpText;
    LPSTR lpCaption;
    WORD wType;

Presentation Manager

USHORT WinMessageBox(hwndParent, hwndOwner, pszText, pszCaption,
                     idWindow, flStyle)
       HWND hwndParent;
       HWND hwndOwner;
       PSZ pszText;
       PSZ pszCaption;
       USHORT idWindow;
       USHORT flStyle;

This Windows function creates a window with given lpText and lpCaption
containing the predefined icons and push buttons defined by wType. PM
applications should send HWND_DESKTOP for hDesktop and 0 for wIdHelp. The
constants used for wType are the same as in the Windows MessageBox function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

DWORD MoveTo(hDC, X, Y);
      HDC hDC;
      SHORT X;
      SHORT Y;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function moves the current position to the point specified by X
and Y.  The Presentation Manager function GpiMove does the same.

See Also:

 GpiMove


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID MoveWindow(hWnd, XPos, YPos, wWidth, wHeight, fRepaint);
     HWND hWnd;
     INT XPos;
     INT YPos;
     INT wWidth;
     INT wHeight;
     BOOL fRepaint;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinSetWindowPos(hwnd, hwndInsertBehind, x, y, cx, cy, fs)
     HWND hwnd;
     HWND hwndInsertBehind;
     SHORT x;
     SHORT y;
     SHORT cx;
     SHORT cy;
     USHORT fs;

This Windows function causes WM_SIZE message to be sent to hwnd; X, Y, wWidth,
and wHeight give the new size of the window. In PM, application should call
function with wCmd set to SWP_MOVE | SWP_SIZE and hwndInsertBehind set to NULL.
If the application is moving the main application window, the handle to the
frame window should be passed for hwnd.

See Also:

 WinSetWindowPos,


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL OemToAnsi(lpOemStr, lpAnsiStr);
     LPSTR lpOemStr;
     LPSTR lpAnsiStr;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinCpTranslateString(hab, cpSrc, pszSrc, cpDst, cchDestMax, pchDest)
     HAB hab;
     USHORT cpSrc;
     PSZ pszSrc;
     USHORT cpDst;
     USHORT cchDestMax;
     PSZ pchDest;

This Windows function converts the OEM string to an ANSI string. The PM
function is equivalent, translating a string from one code page to another.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

short OffsetClipRgn(hDC, X, Y);
      HDC hDC;
      SHORT X;
      SHORT Y;

Presentation Manager

LONG GpiOffsetClipRegion(hps, pptl)
     HPS hps;
     PPOINTL pptl;

This Windows function moves clipping region X units along the x-axis and Y
units along the y-axis. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

int OffsetRect(lpRect, X, Y);
LPRECT lpRect;
       INT X;
       INT Y;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinOffsetRect(hab, prcl, cx, cy)
     HAB hab;
     PRECTL prcl;
     SHORT cx;
     SHORT cy;

This Windows function moves given rectangle X units along the x-axis and Y
units along the y-axis. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

short OffsetRgn(hRGN, X, Y);
      HRGN hRGN;
      SHORT X;
      SHORT Y;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiOffsetRegion(hps, hrgn, pptl)
     HPS hps;
     HRGN hrgn;
     PPOINTL pptl;

This Windows function moves the given region X units along the x-axis and Y
units along the y-axis. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL OpenClipboard(hwnd);
     HWND hwnd;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinOpenClipbrd(hab)
     HAB hab;

This Windows function opens clipboard; prevents other applications from
modifying its contents. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

int OpenFile(lpFileName, lpStruct, wStyle);
    LPSTR lpFileName;
    LPOFSTRUCT lpStruct;
    WORD wStyle;

Presentation Manager

USHORT DosOpen(pszFileName, phf, pusAction, ulFileSize, usAttribute,
               fOpenFlags, fOpenMode, ulReserved)
       PSZ pszFileName;       /* pointer to filename                       */
       PHFILE phf;            /* new pointer to variable for file's handle */
       PUSHORT pusAction;     /* pointer to variable for action taken      */
       ULONG ulFileSize;      /* initial allocation size                   */
       USHORT usAttribute;    /* file attribute                            */
       USHORT fOpenFlags;     /* open function type                        */
       USHORT fOpenMode;      /* open mode of file                         */
       ULONG ulReserved;      /* Must be zero                              */

USHORT DosDelete(pFile, lReserved);
       PSZ pFile;
       DWORD lReserved;

This Windows function creates, opens, reopens, or deletes file named by
lpFileName.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL OpenIcon(IconHwnd);
     HWND IconHwnd;

Presentation Manager

MRESULT WinSendMsg(hwnd, msg, mp1, mp2)
        HWND hwnd;
        USHORT msg;
        MPARAM mp1;
        MPARAM mp2;

This Windows message opens the specified window by copying the window's caption
and client area to the screen and removing its icon from the icon area. In
order to open a window which has been minimized, the PM application should send
a WM_SYSCOMMAND message to the frame window with the low word of lParam1
containing SC_MINIMIZE. This should restore the size and position of the window
to its previous values when iconized.

See Also:

 WinSendMsg


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID OpenSound();

Presentation Manager

No equivalent
This Windows function opens the play device for exclusive use. There is no
PM equivalent; sound functions are not supported in PM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL PaintRgn(hDC, hRGN);
     HDC hDC;
     HRGN hRGN;

Presentation Manager

LONG GpiPaintRegion(hps, hrgn)
     HPS hps;
     HRGN hrgn;

This Windows function fills the region specified by hRGN with the currently
selected brush. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL PatBlt(hDest, X, Y, wWidth, wHeight, dwROP);
     HDC hDest;
     SHORT X;
     SHORT Y;
     SHORT wWidth;
     SHORT wHeight;
     DWORD dwROP;

Presentation Manager

LONG GpiBitBlt(hpsTarg, hpsSrc, cPoints, paptlPoints, lRop, flOptions)
     HPS hpsTarg;
     HPS hpsSrc;
     LONG cPoints;
     PPOINTL paptlPoints;
     LONG lRop;
     LONG flOptions;

Windows function creates bit pattern on the specified device using dwROP to
combine the current brush with the pattern already on the device. The PM
function may be called with a ROP which does not include the source (such as
ROP_PATCOPY). If such a ROP is specified, hSrc should be NULL and lMode should
be BLTMODE_NOSCALE. In addition, lNum should be 2 and pPointL should contains 2
points, the bottom left corner of the destination area and the upper right
corner of the destination area.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL PeekMessage(lpMsg, hwnd, wFilterMin, wFilterMax, fRemove);
     LPMSG lpMsg;
     HWND hwnd;
     unsigned wFilterMin;
     WORD wFilterMax;
     BOOL fRemove;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinPeekMsg(hab, pqmsg, hwndFilter, msgFilterFirst, msgFilterLast, fs)
     HAB hab;
     PQMSG pqmsg;
     HWND hwndFilter;
     USHORT msgFilterFirst;
     USHORT msgFilterLast;
     USHORT fs;

This Windows function checks application queue and places message (if any) at
lpMsg. Presentation Manager function is similar; wMsgCommand is either
PM_REMOVE to remove messages or PM_NOREMOVE to leave.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL PlayMetaFile(hDC, hMF);
     HDC hDC;
     HANDLE hMF;

Presentation Manager

LONG GpiPlayMetaFile(hps, hmf, cOptions, alOptions, pcSegments, cchDesc,
                     pszDesc)
     HPS hps;
     HMF hmf;
     LONG cOptions;
     PLONG alOptions;
     PLONG pcSegments;
     LONG cchDesc;
     PSZ pszDesc;

This Windows function plays the contents for the specified metafile on the
given device context. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent and may
be called with lNum set to 0, lOptionArray set to NULL, lSegCount pointing to
0, lDescLen set to 0, and pDesc set to NULL.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL Polygon(hDC, lpPoints, wNum);
     HDC hDC;
     LPPOINT lpPoints;
     short wNum;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiBeginArea(hps, fOptions)
     HPS hps;
     ULONG fOptions;

LONG GpiEndArea(hps)
     HPS hps;

LONG GpiPolyLine(hps, cPoints, paptlPoints)
     HPS hps;
     LONG cPoints;
     PPOINTL paptlPoints;

This Windows function is used to draw a polygon consisting of two or more
vertices connected by lines using the current polyfill mode, brush, and pen. In
PM, the application begins drawing an area by calling GpiBeginArea with lMode
set to the translation of ALTERNATE or WINDING (0 or 1). After the area is
begun, the application may call any line drawing primitive, such as GpiLine and
GpiPolyLine, to define the vertix and edges of the polygon which will be
filled. GpiEndArea should be called when the area has been defined. The area is
then drawn with the current LINEBUNDLE and AREABUNDLE attributes stored in the
PS.

See Also:

 GpiMove


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL Polyline(hDC, lpPoints, wNum);
     HDC hDC;
     LPPOINT lpPoints;
     short wNum;

Presentation Manager

LONG GpiPolyLine(hps, cPoints, paptlPoints)
     HPS hps;
     LONG cPoints;
     PPOINTL paptlPoints;

This Windows function draws a set of line segments, connecting the wNum points
given by lpPoints. The Presentation Manager function is similar, but uses the
current position as the first point. After this call, the current position is
updated to be the final point.

See Also:

 GpiMove


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL PostAppMessage(hTask, wMsg, wParam, lParam);
     HANDLE hTask;
     USHORT wMsg;
     WORD wParam;
     LONG lParam;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinPostQueueMsg(hmq, msg, mp1, mp2)
     HMQ hmq;
     USHORT msg;
     MPARAM mp1;
     MPARAM mp2;

This Windows function posts message to application; returns without waiting for
processing. The Presentation Manager function posts message directly to an
application's message queue and returns.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL PostMessage(hwnd, wMsg, wParam, lParam);
     HWND hwnd;
     USHORT wMsg;
     WORD wParam;
     LONG lParam;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinPostMsg(hwnd, msg, mp1, mp2)
     HWND hwnd;
     USHORT msg;
     MPARAM mp1;
     MPARAM mp2;

This Windows function places message in application queue; returns without
waiting for processing. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID PostQuitMessage(wExitCode);
     INT wExitCode;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinPostMsg(hwnd, msg, mp1, mp2)
     HWND hwnd;
     USHORT msg;
     MPARAM mp1;
     MPARAM mp2;

This Windows function posts a WM_QUIT message to the application and returns
immediately. The PM application can use WinPostMsg to send WM_QUIT message to
the application. PM applications should note that the WM_QUIT message should
not be sent as a response to the WM_DESTROY message. See translations for
WM_CLOSE and WM_DESTROY.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL PtInRect(lpRect, Pt);
     LPRECT lpRect;
     POINT Pt;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinPtInRect(hab, prcl, pptl)
     HAB hab;
     PRECTL prcl;
     PPOINTL pptl;

This Windows function indicates whether or not a specified point lies within a
given rectangle. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL PtInRegion(hRGN, X, Y);
     HRGN hRGN;
     short X;
     short Y;

Presentation Manager

LONG GpiPtInRegion(hps, hrgn, pptl)
     HPS hps;
     HRGN hrgn;
     PPOINTL pptl;

This Windows function tests if X, Y is within the given region. The PM function
is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL PtVisible(hDC, X, Y);
     HDC hDC;
     SHORT X;
     SHORT Y;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinMakePoints(hab, pwpt, cwpt)
     HAB hab;
     PWPOINT pwpt;
     SHORT cwpt;

LONG GpiPtVisible(hps, pptl)
     HPS hps;
     PPOINTL pptl;

This Windows function tests if X, Y is within the clipping region of the given
display context. In PM, the word point should first be converted to be a long
point by calling WinMakePoints. GpiPtVisible may then be called. The return
value, wVisible, is defined as follows: 0 if an error occured, 1 if the point
is not visible, and 2 if the point is visible.

See Also:

 WinMakePoints


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL Rectangle(hDC, X1, Y1, X2, Y2);
     HDC hDC;
     SHORT X1;
     SHORT Y1;
     SHORT X2;
     SHORT Y2;

Presentation Manager

LONG GpiBox(hps, cmdControl, pptlPoint, lHRound, lVRound)
     HPS hps;
     LONG cmdControl;
     PPOINTL pptlPoint;
     LONG lHRound;
     LONG lVRound;

Windows function draws rectangle using current pen for border and current brush
for filling. In PM, application needs to set current position at one corner of
rectangle using GpiMove function. GpiBox then draws a rectangle with wControl
controlling the following attributes: if 1, fill interior with current area
attributes; if 2, draw outline with current line attributes; if 3, do both. If
no rounding of rectangle should occur, set lHorRound and lVerRound to 0.

See Also:

 GpiMove


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL RectVisible(hDC, lpRect);
     HDC hDC;
     LPRECT lpRect;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinMakeRect(hab, pwrc)
     HAB hab;
     PWRECT pwrc;

LONG GpiRectVisible(hps, prclRect)
     HPS hps;
     PRECTL prclRect;
p. This Windows function determines if any part of the given rectangle lies
within the clipping region. In PM, the application should convert the word
rectangle to be a long rectangle by calling WinMakeRect. GpiRectVisible then
checks if the rectangle is visible, returning 0 if an error occurred, 1 if none
of the rectangle is visible, 2 if part of the rectangle is visible, and 3 if
all of the rectangle is visible.

See Also:

 WinMakeRect


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL RegisterClass(lpWndClass);
     LPWNDCLASS lpWndClass;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinRegisterClass(hab, pszClassName, pfnWndProc, flStyle, cbWindowData)
     HAB hab;
     PSZ pszClassName;
     PFNWP pfnWndProc;
     ULONG flStyle;
     USHORT cbWindowData;

This Windows function registers a window class. The Presentation Manager
function is the same except that now menu name, background brush, cursor, icon,
and number of extra bytes for window aren't stored in the class.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WORD RegisterClipboardFormat(lpFormatName);
     LPSTR lpFormatName;

Presentation Manager

HATOMTBL HATOMTBL WinQuerySystemAtomTable(VOID)

ATOM WinAddAtom(hAtomTbl, pszAtomName)
     HATOMTBL hAtomTbl;    /* handle to atom table */
     PSZ pszAtomName;      /* pointer to atom name */

This Windows function is used to register a new clipboard format whose name is
pointed to by lpFormatName. In PM, the application can call
WinQuerySystemAtomTable to get the systom atom table. Once this is retrieved,
the format name can be added to the table. The return value may be used as a
format and is guaranteed to be unique in the system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

unsigned RegisterWindowMessage(lpMessageString);
         LPSTR lpMessageString;

Presentation Manager

HATOMTBL WinQuerySystemAtomTable(VOID)

ATOM WinAddAtom(hAtomTbl, pszAtomName)
     HATOMTBL hAtomTbl;    /* handle to atom table */
     PSZ pszAtomName;      /* pointer to atom name */

This Windows function defines a new window message that is guaranteed to be
unique. In PM, the application can call WinQuerySystemAtomTable to get the
system atom table. Once this is retrieved, the message string can be added to
the table. The return value may be passed as a message, and is guaranteed to be
unique in the system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID ReleaseCapture();

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinSetCapture(hwndDesktop, hwnd)
     HWND hwndDesktop;
     HWND hwnd;

This Windows function releases mouse input and restores normal input
processing. The Presentation Manager function can be called with hWnd set to
NULL to cancel the mouse capture mode.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

int ReleaseDC(hWnd, hDC);
    HWND hWnd;
    HDC hDC;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinReleasePS(hps)
     HPS hps;

This Windows function releases a display context when an application is
finished drawing in it. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL RemoveFontResource(lpFileName);
     LPSTR lpFileName;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiUnloadFonts(hab, pszFilename)
     HAB hab;
     PSZ pszFilename;

This Windows function removes from the system font table the font resource
named by lpFileName. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent. Before
issuing this function, the application must issue the GpiSetCharSet function to
a font other than one of those to be unloaded. The application must then issue
the GpiDeleteSetId function for each local identifier which references one of
the fonts.

See Also:

 GpiDeleteSetId GpiSetCharSet


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HANDLE RemoveProp(hwnd, lpName);
       HWND hwnd;
       LPSTR lpName;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function removes lpName from property list; retrieves
corresponding data handle. There is no PM equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID ReplyMessage(lReply);
     LONG lReply;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function replies to message without returning control to the
SendMessage caller. There is no corresponding PM function because with the
multitasking environment, all applications share the processor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL RestoreDC(hDC, wSavedDC);
     HDC hDC;
     SHORT wSavedDC;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiRestorePS(hps, idPS)
     HPS hps;
     LONG idPS;

This Windows function restores display context given by hDC to previous state
given by wSavedDC. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL RoundRect(hDC, X1, Y1, X2, Y2, X3, Y3);
     HDC hDC;
     SHORT X1;
     SHORT Y1;
     SHORT X2;
     SHORT Y2;
     SHORT X3;
     SHORT Y3;

Presentation Manager

LONG GpiBox(hps, cmdControl, pptlPoint, lHRound, lVRound)
     HPS hps;
     LONG cmdControl;
     PPOINTL pptlPoint;
     LONG lHRound;
     LONG lVRound;

Windows function draws rounded rectangle, using current pen for border, current
brush attributes for filling. In PM, application needs to set current position
at one corner of rectangle using GpiMove function. GpiBox then draws a
rectangle with wControl controlling the following attributes: if 1, fill
interior with current area attributes; if 2, draw outline with current line
attributes; if 3, do both. lHorRound and lVerRound specify the horizontal and
vertical length of the axes of the ellipses used for rounding at each corner.

See Also:

 GpiMove


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

short SaveDC(hDC);
      HDC hDC;

Presentation Manager

LONG GpiSavePS(hps)
     HPS hps;
This Windows function saves the current state of the display context hDC.
The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID ScreenToClient(hWnd, lpPoint);
     HWND hWnd;
     LPPOINT lpPoint;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinMakePoints(hab, pwpt, cwpt)
     HAB hab;
     PWPOINT pwpt;
     SHORT cwpt;

BOOL WinMapWindowPoints(hwndFrom, hwndTo, pptl, cwpt)
     HWND hwndFrom;
     HWND hwndTo;
     PPOINTL pptl;
     SHORT cwpt;

This Windows function converts the screen coordinates at lpPoint to client
coordinates. The Presentation Manager function can be called with hWndFrom set
to HWND_DESKTOP to convert points from the screen to the desired window. The
points in the array should be long points, the function WinMakePoints may be
called to convert word points into long points.

See Also:

 WinMakePoints WinMapWindowPoints


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

void ScrollWindow(hWnd, dx, dy, lpRect, lpClipRect);
     HWND hWnd;
     INT dx;
     INT dy;
     LPRECT lpRect;
     LPRECT lpClipRect;

Presentation Manager

SHORT WinScrollWindow(hwnd, dx, dy, prclScroll, prclClip, hrgnUpdate,
                      prclUpdate, rgfsw)
      HWND hwnd;
      SHORT dx;
      SHORT dy;
      PRECTL prclScroll;
      PRECTL prclClip;
      HRGN hrgnUpdate;
      PRECTL prclUpdate;
      USHORT rgfsw;

This Windows function moves contents of client area dx units along screen's
x-axis and dy units along screen's y axis (right for positive dx, down for
positive dy). The Presentation Manager function is similar. The update region
and rectangle are returned if hrgnUpdate and pWRectUpdate are not NULL. The
wType parameters is a combination of the following flags, SW_SCROLLCHILDREN and
SW_INVALIDATEREGION, which specify whether children are to be scrolled and
whether a paint message should be generated. Note that the window origin has
changed in PM and that if dy is positive the scroll window will move upwards.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

short SelectClipRgn(hDC, hRGN);
      HDC hDC;
      HRGN hRGN;

Presentation Manager

HRGN GpiSetClipRegion(hps, hrgn)
     HPS hps;
     HRGN hrgn;

This Windows function selects given region as current clipping region for the
specified display context. The Presentation Manager function is the same.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HANDLE SelectObject(hDC, hObject);
       HDC hDC;
       HANDLE hObject;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiSetAttrMode(hps, cmdMode)
     HPS hps;
     LONG cmdMode;

BOOL GpiPop(hps, cAttrs)
     HPS hps;
     LONG cAttrs;

BOOL GpiSetAttrs(hps, lPrimType, flAttrsMask, flDefsMask, pbunAttrs)
     HPS hps;
     LONG lPrimType;
     ULONG flAttrsMask;
     ULONG flDefsMask;
     PBUNDLE pbunAttrs;

This Windows function is used to select hObject as current object, replacing
the previous object of the same type. In PM, pens and brushes aren't really
objects, but LINEBUNDLES and AREABUNDLES are structures which are similar to
pens and brushes in Windows and can be selected into the hPS. lPrim is a flag
which indicates what type of attributes are being set: PRIM_LINE, PRIM_CHAR,
PRIM_MARKER, PRIM_AREA, or PRIM_IMAGE. lAttrsMask is the union of flags
indicating which attributes out of each primitive type are to be set. For line
attributes, possible values are LBB_COLOR, LBB_WIDTH, and LBB_TYPE. For area
bundles, possible values are MBB_COLOR, MBB_SET, and MBB_SYMBOL. lDefsMask are
flags indicating which attributes for the specified primitive type should be
defaulted. These attributes are only defaulted if the corresponding bit in
lAttrsMask is set. Finally, pAttrs is a pointer to the structure of the
specified primitive type. For line or area attributes, it is a pointer to the
LINEBUNDLE or AREABUNDLE structure. In order to save the previous state,
GpiSetAttrMode can be called with lMode set to 1 to indicate that the previous
state should be pushed on the stack when GpiSetAttrs mode is called. In order
to restore the state of the PS, GpiPop can be called with lCount set to the
number of attributes which were changed in the GpiSetAttrs call.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

long SendDlgItemMessage(hDlg, wId, wMessage, wParam, lParam);
     HWND hDlg;
     int wId;
     unsigned wMessage;
     WORD wParam;
     LONG lParam;

Presentation Manager

MRESULT WinSendDlgItemMsg(hwndDlg, idItem, msg, mp1, mp2)
        HWND hwndDlg;
        USHORT idItem;
        USHORT msg;
        MPARAM mp1;
        MPARAM mp2;

This Windows function sends a message to wId within the dialog box specified by
hDlg. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent. Additionally, the PM
function may be used to send messages to frame window controls.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

long SendMessage(hwnd, wMsg, wParam, lParam);
     HWND hwnd;
     unsigned wMsg;
     WORD wParam;
     LONG lParam;

Presentation Manager

MRESULT WinSendMsg(hwnd, msg, mp1, mp2)
        HWND hwnd;
        USHORT msg;
        MPARAM mp1;
        MPARAM mp2;

This Windows function sends a message to a window. The Presentation Manager
function is equivalent, although the parameters are different because the
message structure has changed. PM applications should call WinTimeoutSendMsg if
sending message to window in a different thread.

See Also:

 WinSendMsg


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HWND SetActiveWindow(hwnd);
     HWND hwnd;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinSetActiveWindow(hwndDesktop, hwnd)
     HWND hwndDesktop;
     HWND hwnd;

This Windows function makes a tiled or popup window the active window. The
Presentation Manager function is equivalent. The PM application should send
HWND_DESKTOP for hwndDesk.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL SetBitmapBits(hBitMap, dwCount, lpBits);
     HBITMAP hBitMap;
     DWORD dwCount;
     LPSTR lpBits;

Presentation Manager

LONG GpiSetBitmapBits(hps, iScanStart, cScans, pbBuffer, pbmi)
     HPS hps;
     LONG iScanStart;
     LONG cScans;
     PBYTE pbBuffer;
     PBITMAPINFO pbmi;

The Windows function sets the bitmap bits to values given at lpBits with
dwCount set to the byte count at lpBits. The Presentation Manager function
transfers bits from the location specified by pBits to the bitmap selected into
hDC. hDC must refer to a memory display context which has a bitmap currently
selected. bmInfo is a structure describing the format of the bits in the pBits
structure (see translation for BITMAP).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

DWORD SetBitmapDimension(hBitMap, X, Y);
      HBITMAP hBitMap;
      short X;
      short Y;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiSetBitmapDimension(hbm, psizlBitmap)
     HBITMAP hbm;
     PSIZEL psizlBitmap;

The Windows function associates a width and height, in 0.1 millimeter units,
with a bitmap. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent. The PM
application should specify a two element array of long values containing the
width and height in 0.1 millimeter units.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

DWORD SetBkColor(hDC, rgbColor);
      HDC hDC;
      DWORD rgbColor;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiSetBackColor(hps, lColor)
     HPS hps;
     LONG lColor;

This Windows function sets the current background to the device color closest
to rgbColor. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent and sets the
current background color index attribute, for each individual primitive type,
to the specified value.

See Also:

 GpiCreateLogColorTable, GpiErase, GpiPop, WinGetLastError


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

short SetBkMode(hDC, wMode);
      HDC hDC;
      short wMode;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiSetBackMix(hps, lMixMode)
     HPS hps;
     LONG lMixMode;

This Windows function sets the background mode used with text, hatched brushes,
and line styles. The Presentation Manager function sets the background mode.
For more information, see translations for TRANSPARENT and OPAQUE.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

DWORD SetBrushOrg(hDC, X, Y);
      HDC hDC;
      INT X;
      INT Y;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiSetPatternRefPoint(hps, pgptRefPoint)
     HPS hps;
     PPOINTL pgptRefPoint;

The Windows function sets the origin of all brushes selected into the given
display context. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HWND SetCapture(hWnd);
     HWND hWnd;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinSetCapture(hwndDesktop, hwnd)
     HWND hwndDesktop;
     HWND hwnd;

This Windows function causes mouse input to be sent to hWnd, regardless of
mouse cursor position. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID SetCaretBlinkTime(wMSeconds);
     WORD wMSeconds;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinSetSysValue(hwndDesktop, iSysValue, lValue)
     HWND hwndDesktop;
     SHORT iSysValue;
     LONG lValue;

This Windows function establishes the caret flash rate. The Presentation
Manager function may be called with hDesktop set to HWND_DESKTOP, wIndex set to
SV_CARETBLINKTIME, and wValue set to wMSeconds (the blink time in
milliseconds).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID SetCaretPos(xPos, yPos);
     INT xPos;
     INT yPos;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinCreateCursor(hwnd, x, y, cx, cy, fs, prclClip)
     HWND hwnd;
     SHORT x;
     SHORT y;
     SHORT cx;
     SHORT cy;
     USHORT fs;
     PRECTL prclClip;

This Windows function moves the caret to the position specified by xPos and
yPos. The Presentation Manager function performs this functionality and can be
called with wType set to CURSOR_SETPOS. In this case, wWidth and wHeight are
ignored and xPos and yPos are used to set the position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

LONG SetClassLong(hwnd, wIndex, lValue);
     HWND hwnd;
     int wIndex;
     LONG lValue;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function replaces long value at the given wIndex in the WNDCLASS
structure. In PM, the application can't change the values for a class once the
window is created. Instead, the application can create and register a new class
with the modified values.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WORD SetClassWord(hwnd, wIndex, wValue);
     HWND hwnd;
     int wIndex;
     WORD wValue;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function replaces word value at the given wIndex in the WNDCLASS
structure. In PM, the application can't change the values for a class once the
window is created. Instead, the application can create and register a new class
with the modified values.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HANDLE SetClipboardData(wFormat, hMem);
       WORD wFormat;
       HANDLE hMem;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinSetClipbrdData(hab, ulData, fmt, rgfFmtInfo)
     HAB hab;
     ULONG ulData;
     USHORT fmt;
     USHORT rgfFmtInfo;

This Windows function copies hMem, a handle for data having wFormat format,
into the clipboard. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent, the
wFormatInfo parameter is the union of the following flags: CFI_SELECTOR,
CFI_OWNERFREE, CFI_OWNERDISPLAY. These flags allow the PM application to
specify that either the data should be freed with DosFreeSeg, that the owner
will free the data when necessary, or that the owner will display the data in
the clipboard window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HWND SetClipboardViewer(hViewer);
     HWND hViewer;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinSetClipbrdViewer(hab, hwnd)
     HAB hab;
     HWND hwnd;

This Windows function adds hViewer to clipboard viewer chain; hNext is next
window in chain. The Presentation Manager function also sets the clipboard
viewer. In PM, however, only one application can be specified as the clipboard
viewer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HCURSOR SetCursor(hCursor);
        HCURSOR hCursor;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinSetPointer(hwndDesktop, hptrNew)
     HWND hwndDesktop;
     HPOINTER hptrNew;

This Windows function sets cursor shape to hCursor and removes cursor from
screen if hCursor is NULL. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent;
HWND_DESKTOP should be sent for hDesktop.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID SetCursorPos(xPos, yPos);
     INT xPos;
     INT yPos;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinSetPointerPos(hwndDesktop, x, y)
     HWND hwndDesktop;
     SHORT x;
     SHORT y;

This Windows function sets the position of mouse cursor to the screen
coordinates given by xPos and yPos. The Presentation Manager function is
equivalent; HWND_DESKTOP should be sent for hDesktop.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

void SetDlgItemInt(hDlg, wId, wValue, fSigned);
     HWND hDlg;
     INT wId;
     USHORT wValue;
     BOOL fSigned;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinSetDlgItemShort(hwndDlg, idItem, usValue, fSigned)
     HWND hwndDlg;
     USHORT idItem;
     USHORT usValue;
     BOOL fSigned;

This Windows function sets text of wId to string representing an integer. The
Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

void SetDlgItemText(hDlg, wId, lpText);
     HWND hDlg;
     INT wId;
     LPSTR lpText;

Presentation Manager

SHORT WinSetDlgItemText(hwndDlg, idItem, pszText);
      HWND hwndDlg;
      USHORT idItem;
      PSZ pszText;

This Windows function sets caption or text of wId to lpText. The PM function is
equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

short SetEnvironment(lpPortName, lpEnviron, wCount);
      LPSTR lpPortName;
      LPSTR lpEnviron;
      WORD wCount;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function copies data at lpEnviron to environment associated with
device attached to given port. In Presentation Manager, this is equivalent to
executing the "set" command at the Presentation Manager prompt. However,
caution should be used here because spawning a second prompt only sets
Аattributes for that thread and when this thread dies these attribute settings
also die.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HWND SetFocus(hWnd);
     HWND hWnd;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinFocusChange(hwndDesktop, hwndSetFocus, fsFocusChange)
     HWND hwndDesktop;
     HWND hwndSetFocus;
     USHORT @fsFocusChange;

This Windows function assigns the input focus to the window specified by hWnd.
The Presentation Manager function sets the focus to the specified window.

See Also:

 WinSetFocus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

short SetMapMode(hDC, wMapMode);
      HDC hDC;
      SHORT wMapMode;

Presentation Manager

HPS GpiCreatePS(hab, hdc, psizl, fOptions)
    HAB hab;
    HDC hdc;
    PSIZEL psizl;
    ULONG fOptions;

This Windows function sets the mapping mode of the specified display context.
The Presentation Manager function creates a presentation space. An initial
association of the new presentation space with a device context may be
performed. To assign the mapping mode, or the desired mapping mode constant,
see translation for MM_* constants into lOptions with the GpiCreatePS call. The
pSize parameter should be a long pointer to two longs which are 0. To change
the mapping mode, use the GpiSetPS function.

See Also:

 GpiQueryElement, GpiSetPS, WinGetLastError


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL SetMenu(hWnd, hMenu);
     HWND hWnd;
     HMENU hMenu;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinSetParent(hwnd, hwndNewParent, fRedraw)
     HWND hwnd;
     HWND hwndNewParent;
     BOOL fRedraw;

This Windows function sets window menu to hMenu and removes menu if hMenu is
NULL. In PM, the application should set present menu to have parent HWND_OBJECT
and the new menu to have parent hWnd.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HANDLE SetMetaFileBits(hMem);
       HANDLE hMem;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiSetMetaFileBits(hmf, off, cbBuffer, pbBuffer)
     HMF hmf;
     LONG off;
     LONG cbBuffer;
     PBYTE pbBuffer;

This Windows function creates a memory metafile form data in the given global
memory block. The Presentation Manager function is similar and allows the bits
to be written in separate chunks. lOffset specifies the starting offset of the
metafile to write, lLength specifies the length of pBuffer, and pBuffer holds
the bytes to be written to the metafile.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

DWORD SetPixel(hDC, X, Y, rgbColor);
      HDC hDC;
      short X;
      short Y;
      DWORD rgbColor;

Presentation Manager

LONG GpiQueryColorIndex(hps, flOptions, lRgbColor)
     HPS hps;
     ULONG flOptions;
     LONG lRgbColor;

BOOL GpiSetColor(hps, lColor)
     HPS hps;
     LONG lColor;

LONG GpiSetPel(hps, pgptPoint)
     HPS hps;
     PPOINTL pgptPoint;

This Windows function sets pixel at X, Y to the device color closest to
rgbColor. If a color table has been realized for the PS, the application may
call GpiQueryColorIndex with lOptions set to 0 to get the PM color index
closest to the rgb color specified. To set the current color, GpiSetColor can
be called with the color. GpiSetPel sets the pel at position X, Y to the
current color.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

short SetPolyFillMode(hDC, wPolyMode);
      HDC hDC;
short wPolyMode;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows fucntion sets the polygon-filling mode for the specified display
context. There is no PM equivalent to this function. This attribute passed to
the function which draws the polygon, see the translation for Polygon.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL SetProp(hWnd, lpName, hMem);
     HWND hWnd;
     LPSTR lpName;
     HANDLE hMem;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function copies string and data handle to property list of hWnd.
There is no PM equivalent, property lists must be maintained by hand.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

int SetRect(lpRect, X1, Y1, X2, Y2);
    LPRECT lpRect;
    int X1;
    int Y1;
    int X2;
    int Y2;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinSetRect(hab, prcl, xLeft, yBottom, xRight, yTop)
     HAB hab;
     PRECTL prcl;
     SHORT xLeft;
     SHORT yBottom;
     SHORT xRight;
     SHORT yTop;

This Windows function fills RECT structure at lpRect with given coordinates.
The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

INT SetRectEmpty(lpRect);
    LPRECT lpRect;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinSetRectEmpty(hab, prcl)
     HAB hab;
     PRECTL prcl;

This Windows function sets the rectangle to an empty rectangle (all coordinates
are zero). The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

short SetRelAbs(hDC, wRelAbsMode);
      HDC hDC;
      short wRelAbsMode;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function sets the relabs flag. This function has no PM equivalent.
In GPI, there is no equivalent to the relabs flag; coordinates are always
specified in absolute mode.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

FARPROC SetResourceHandler(hInst, lpType, lpLoadFunc);
        HANDLE hInst;
        LPSTR lpType;
        FARPROC lpLoadFunc;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function sets the function address of the resource handler for
resources with type lpType; a resource handler provides for loading of custom
resources. There is no Presentation Manager equivalent. In order to load
resources of a nonstandard type, you must write the code yourself.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

short SetROP2(hDC, wRopMode);
      HDC hDC;
      short wRopMode;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiSetMix(hps, lMixMode)
     HPS hps;
     LONG lMixMode;

This Windows function is used to set the current drawing mode. The PM function
sets the mix mode (the equivalent to the Windows drawing mode) for all
primitives. These functions are equivalent. The constants used for these
functions have changed (see translation of R2_* constants).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

INT SetScrollPos(hwnd, wBar, wPos, fRedraw);
    HWND hwnd;
    INT wBar;
    INT wPos;
    BOOL fRedraw;

Presentation Manager

MRESULT WinSendDlgItemMsg(hwndDlg, idItem, msg, mp1, mp2)
        HWND hwndDlg;
        USHORT idItem;
        USHORT msg;
        MPARAM mp1;
        MPARAM mp2;

MRESULT WinSendMsg(hwnd, msg, mp1, mp2)
        HWND hwnd;
        USHORT msg;
        MPARAM mp1;
        MPARAM mp2;

This Windows function sets scroll bar elevator to wPos; redraws scroll bar is
fRedraw is nonzero. In PM, the application can send SBM_SETPOS message to
scroll bar control. WinSendDlgItemMsg may be called with the scroll bar id and
frame window instead of WinSendMsg. The position of the scroll bar elevator
should be sent in the low order word of lParam1.

See Also:

 WinSendMsg


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

void SetScrollRange(hwnd, wBar, wMin, wMax, fRedraw);
     HWND hwnd;
     INT wBar;
     INT wMin;
     INT wMax;
     BOOL fRedraw;

Presentation Manager

HWND WinWindowFromID(hwndParent, id)
     HWND hwndParent;
     USHORT id;

MRESULT WinSendMsg(hwnd, msg, mp1, mp2)
        HWND hwnd;
        USHORT msg;
        MPARAM mp1;
        MPARAM mp2;

This Windows function sets the minimum and maximum scroll bar positions for
given scroll bar. In PM, application should send SBM_SETSCROLLBAR message to
scroll bar control with lParam1 set to Position and lParam2 set to the union of
wMin and wMax. The handle to the scroll bar control may be obtained by calling
WinWindowFromID with ScrollId set to FID_HORZSCROLL or FID_VERTSCROLL. One
difference between the way this function works in Windows and PM is that in
Windows, if wMin and wMax are the same, the scroll bar will not appear whereas
in PM, the scroll bar always appears unless explicitly deleted from the Frame.

See Also:

 WinSendMsg


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID SetSoundNoise();

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function sets the source and duration of a noise from the play
device. There is no Presentation Manager equivalent; sound functions are not
supported in Presentation Manager.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID SetSysColors(wNum, lpIndices, lpValues);
     INT wNum;
     LPINT lpIndices;
     LONG FAR * lpValues;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinSetSysColors(hwndDesktop, flOptions, flFormat, clrFirst, cclr, pclr)
     HWND hwndDesktop;
     ULONG flOptions;
     ULONG flFormat;
     LONG clrFirst;
     ULONG cclr;
     PLONG pclr;

This Windows function changes one or more system colors. The Presentation
Manager function is equivalent and sends a WM_SYSCOLORCHANGE message to all
main windows in the sysetm to indicate that the colors have changed. When this
message is received, applications that depend on the system colors can query
the new color values by using the WinQuerySysColor function.

See Also:

 WinQuerySysColor


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HWND SetSysModalWindow(hwnd);
     HWND hwnd;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinSetSysModalWindow(hwndDesktop, hwnd)
     HWND hwndDesktop;
     HWND hwnd;

This Windows function makes the specified window a system-modal window. The
Presentation Manager function is equivalent; send HWND_DESKTOP for hDeskTop.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

DWORD SetTextColor(hDC, rgbColor);
      HDC hDC;
      DWORD rgbColor;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiSetAttrs(hps, lPrimType, flAttrsMask, flDefsMask, pbunAttrs)
     HPS hps;
     LONG lPrimType;
     ULONG flAttrsMask;
     ULONG flDefsMask;
     PBUNDLE pbunAttrs;

This Windows function sets the current text color. The Presentation Manager
application can call GpiSetAttrs with lPrimType set to PRIM_CHAR, lAttrs set to
CBB_COLOR, lDefs to be 0, and pAttrs containing a long pointer to a CHARBUNDLE
structure. The field lColor in the CHARBUNDLE structure should contain the text
color.

See Also:

 GpiQueryAttrs


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

short SetTimer(hWnd, wIdEvent, wElapse, lpTimerFunc);
      HWND hWnd;
      short wIdEvent;
      unsigned wElapse;
      FARPROC lpTimerFunc;

Presentation Manager

USHORT WinStartTimer(hab, hwnd, idTimer, dtTimeout)
       HAB hab;
       HWND hwnd;
       USHORT idTimer;
       USHORT dtTimeout;
This Windows function creates a system timer event identified by wIdEvent
with wElapse specifying the elapsed time in milliseconds, and lpTimerFunc
recieving the timer messages if not NULL. The Presentation Manager function is
equivalent except that the WM_TIMER messages are always received by the
window's message procedure.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

DWORD SetViewportExt(hDC, X, Y);
      HDC hDC;
      short X;
      short Y;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiSetModelTransformMatrix(hps, cElements, pmatlfTransform, lType)
     HPS hps;
     LONG cElements;
     PMATRIXLF pmatlfTransform;
     LONG lType;

This Windows function sets the x and y extents of the viewport of the specified
display context. The Presentation Manager function takes the transformation
matrix. The transformation matrix should be an array containing nine points.
lNum should be nine and lType should be TRANSFORM_REPLACE. The transformation
matrix's third, sixth, and ninth values should be 0. The values 1, 2, 4, and 5
must be in fixed point notation. A number is in fixed point notation when the
high order word stores the integer part of the number and the low order word
stores the fractional part of the number. To convert from an integer to fixed
point notation, use the define: FIXEDFRAC(integer, 0). To convert from a float
to fixed point, use the following statement: FixVal = (ULONG) (FloatVal *
(float) 0x10000). The values needed for the PM transformation array can be
expressed in terms of the Window and Viewport values which are used in Windows.
Assuming that the values for the viewport and window are in Vx1, Vy1, Vx2, Vy2,
Wx1, Wy1, Wx2, Wy2; the values for the transformation matrix should be:

           1st value = (Vx2 - Vx1 + 1) / (Wx2 - Wx1 + 1)
[fixed pt] 2nd value = 0
           4th value = 1st value with y's for the x's
[fixed pt] 5th value = 0
           7th value = Vx1 - 1/2 - (Wx1 - 1/2) (Vx2 - Vx1 + 1) / (Wx2 - Wx1 + 1)
           8th value = 7th value with y's for the x's


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

DWORD SetViewportOrg(hDC, X, Y);
      HDC hDC;
      SHORT X;
      SHORT Y;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiSetModelTransformMatrix(hps, cElements, pmatlfTransform, lType)
     HPS hps;
     LONG cElements;
     PMATRIXLF pmatlfTransform;
     LONG lType;

This Windows function sets the x and y origin of the viewport of the specified
display context. For an explanation of the Presentation Manager function, see
translation for SetViewportExt.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID SetVoiceAccent();

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function places an accent (tempo, volume, mode, and pitch) in the
voice queue.  There is no PM equivalent; sound functions are not supported in
PM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID SetVoiceEnvelope();

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function places the envelope (wave shape and repeat count) in the
voice queue. There is no PM equivalent; sound functions are not supported in
PM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID SetVoiceNote();

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function places a note in the voice queue. There is no PM
equivalent; sound functions are not supported in PM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID SetVoiceQueueSize();

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function allocates wBytes of memory for the voice queue wVoice.
There is no PM equivalent; sound functions are not supported in PM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID SetVoiceSound();

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function places a sound (frequency and duration) in the voice
queue. There is no PM equivalent; sound functions are not supported in PM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID SetVoiceThreshold();

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function sets the threshold level to nNotes for the voice queue.
There is no Presentation Manager equivalent; sound functions are not supported
in Presentation Manager.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

DWORD SetWindowExt(hDC, X, Y);
      HDC hDC;
      SHORT X;
      SHORT Y;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiSetModelTransformMatrix(hps, cElements, pmatlfTransform, lType)
     HPS hps;
     LONG cElements;
     PMATRIXLF pmatlfTransform;
     LONG lType;

This Windows function sets the x and y extents of the window of the specified
display context. For an explanation of the Presentation Manager function, see
translation for SetViewportExt.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

LONG SetWindowLong(hwnd, wIndex, lValue);
     HWND hwnd;
     int wIndex;
     LONG lValue;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinSetWindowULong(hwnd, index, ul)
     HWND hwnd;
     SHORT index;
     ULONG ul;

This Windows function changes the window attribute identified by wIndex. The
Presentation Manager function is equivalent although the contants used for the
indices have changed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

DWORD SetWindowOrg(hDC, X, Y);
      HDC hDC;
      short X;
      short Y;

Presentation Manager

BOOL GpiSetModelTransformMatrix(hps, cElements, pmatlfTransform, lType)
     HPS hps;
     LONG cElements;
     PMATRIXLF pmatlfTransform;
     LONG lType;

This Windows function sets the x and y coordinates of the window of the
specified display context. For an explanation of the Presentation Manager
function, see translation for SetViewportExt.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

void SetWindowPos(hWnd, hWndInsertAfter, x, y, cx, cy, wFlags);
     HWND hWnd;
     HWND hWndInsertAfter;
     int x;
     int y;
     int cx;
     int cy;
     WORD wFlags;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinSetWindowPos(hwnd, hwndInsertBehind, x, y, cx, cy, fs)
     HWND hwnd;
     HWND hwndInsertBehind;
     SHORT x;
     SHORT y;
     SHORT cx;
     SHORT cy;
     USHORT fs;

This Windows function changes the size, position, and ordering of child,
pop-up, and top-level windows. The Presentation Manager function allows the
general positioning of a window. Note the coordinate differences between
Windows and Presentation Manager: in Windows the coordinates for child windows
are relative to the upper-left corder of the parent window's client area,
whereas in Presentation Manager the coordinates are relative to the bottom-left
corner of the parent window. Note that in Presentation Manager, most parameters
are ignored if the correct fs parameter option is not selected.

See Also:

 WinSetActiveWindow, WinSetMultWindowPos


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

FARPROC SetWindowsHook(wFilterType, lpFilterFunc);
        int wFilterType;
        FARPROC lpFilterFunc;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinSetHook(hab, hmq, iHook, pfnHook, hmod)
     HAB hab;
     HMQ hmq;
     SHORT iHook;
     PFN pfnHook;
     HMODULE hmod;

This Windows function installs a system and/or application hook function. The
Presentation Manager function is significantly different from the Windows
function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

void SetWindowText(hwnd, lpText);
     HWND hwnd;
     LPSTR lpText;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinSetWindowText(hwnd, pszText)
     HWND hwnd;
     PSZ pszText;

This Windows function sets window caption (if any) or text (if a control) to
lpText. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WORD SetWindowWord(hwnd, wIndex, wValue);
     HWND hwnd;
     int wIndex;
     WORD wValue;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinSetWindowUShort(hwnd, index, us)
     HWND hwnd;
     SHORT index;
     USHORT us;
This Windows function changes the window attribute specified by wIndex. The
Presentation Manager function is similar although the constants used for the indices
have changed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID ShowCaret(hwnd);
     HWND hwnd;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinShowCursor(hwnd, fShow)
     HWND hwnd;
     BOOL fShow;

This Windows function displays newly-created caret or redisplays hidden caret.
The Presentation Manager function performs this functionality, and can be
called with fShow set to TRUE.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

int ShowCursor(fShow);
    BOOL fShow;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinShowPointer(hwndDesktop, fShow)
     HWND hwndDesktop;
     BOOL fShow;

This Windows function adds 1 to the cursor display count is fShow is nonzero
and subtracts 1 if fShow is zero. The Presentation Manager function is
equivalent; HWND_DESKTOP should be sent for hDesktop.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL ShowWindow(hWnd, wShowType);
     HWND hWnd;
     int wShowType;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinShowWindow(hwnd, fShow)
     HWND hwnd;
     BOOL fShow;

This Windows function displays or removes the given window as specified by
wShowType. The Presentation Manager can be used to set the window visibility
state. In order to iconize, restore, or zoom the window, the Presentation
Manager application should send a WM_SYSCOMMAND message to the frame with
either SC_MAXIMIZE or SC_MINIMIZE in the low word of the first parameter. Note
that WinShowWindow does not update the screen.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WORD SizeofResource(hInst, hResInfo);
     HANDLE hInst;
     HANDLE hResInfo;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function returns the size, in bytes, of resource hResInfo. There
is no PM equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID StartSound();

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function starts play in each voice queue.  There is no PM
equivalent; sound functions are not supported in PM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID StopSound();

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function stops playing all voice queues, and flushes the contents
of the queues.  There is no PM equivalent; sound functions are not supported in
PM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL StretchBlt(hDest, X, Y, wWidth, wHeight, hSrc, XSrc, YSrc, wWidthSrc,
                wHeightSrc, dwROP);
     HDC hDest;
     short X;
     short Y;
     short wWidth;
     short wHeight;
     HDC hSrc;
     short XSrc;
     short YSrc;
     short wWidthSrc;
     short wHeightSrc;
     DWORD dwROP;

Presentation Manager

LONG GpiBitBlt(hpsTarg, hpsSrc, cPoints, paptlPoints, lRop, flOptions)
     HPS hpsTarg;
     HPS hpsSrc;
     LONG cPoints;
     PPOINTL paptlPoints;
     LONG lRop;
     LONG flOptions;

Windows function moves bitmap from rectangle on source device to rectangle on
destination device, with dwRop describing how source, destination, and possibly
brush bits are to be combined. GpiBitBlt encompasses the functionality present
in BitBlt and StretchBitBlt. For stretched blitting, lMode should be either
BLTMODE_OR, BLTMODE_AND, or BLTMODE_IGNORE corresponding to constants in
Windows of WHITEONBLACK, BLACKONWHITE, and COLORONCOLOR. lNum should be 4, and
pPointL should be an array with the 4 following points: the bottom left corner
of the destination blit area, the top right corner of the destination blit
area, the bottom left corner of the source blit area, and the top right corner
of the source blit area. The ROP codes have changed, see translation of desired
ROP code.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL SwapMouseButton(fSwap);
     BOOL fSwap;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinSetSysValue(hwndDesktop, iSysValue, lValue)
     HWND hwndDesktop;
     SHORT iSysValue;
     LONG lValue;

This Windows function swaps the meaning of the left and right mouse buttons if
fSwap is TRUE. The Presentation Manager function can be called with hDesktop
set to HWND_DESKTOP, wIndex set to SV_SWAPBUTTON, and wValue set to fSwap.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID SyncAllVoices();

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function places a sync mark in each voice queue; voices wait at
the sync mark until all queues have encountered it. There is no PM equivalent;
sound functions are not supported in PM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL TextOut(hDC, X, Y, lpString, wCount);
     HDC hDC;
     SHORT X;
     SHORT Y;
     LPSTR lpString;
     SHORT wCount;

Presentation Manager

LONG GpiCharStringAt(hps, pptlStart, cchString, pchString)
     HPS hps;
     PPOINTL pptlStart;
     LONG cchString;
     PCH pchString;

This Windows function writes character string using current font starting at X,
Y. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent. In PM, the origin in text
mode is in the bottom left hand corner of the window, versus the top left hand
corner in Windows. Additionally, the x and y positions given for
GpiCharStringAt determine where the left base side of the text will start. The
positions for TextOut determine the upper left side of where the text will
start. In order to translate from the Windows y coordinate to the equivalent
coordinate in PM, the application can use the following equation: PM Y Coord =
Height of Window - (Win Y Coord + Height of Text).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

void Throw(lpCatchBuf, wThrowBack);
     LPCATCHBUF lpCatchBuf;
     int wThrowBack;

Presentation Manager

VOID WinThrow(pCatchBuf, nThrowBack)
     PCATCHBUF pcatchbuf;
     SHORT nThrowBack;

This Windows function restores the execution environment to the values in
buffer lpCatchBuf, with execution continuing at the location specified by the
environment with the return value wThrowBack available for processing. The
Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL TranslateAccelerator(hWnd, hAccTable, lpMsg);
     HWND hWnd;
     HANDLE hAccTable;
     LPMSG lpMsg;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinSetAccelTable(hab, haccel, hwndFrame)
     HAB hab;
     HACCEL haccel;
     HWND hwndFrame;

This Windows function processes keyboard accelerators for menu commands. The
Presentation Manager function can be called once after window creation to
associate the accelerator table with the window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL TranslateMessage(lpMsg);
     LPMSG lpMsg;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function translates virtual keystroke messages into character
messages. In PM, this function is not needed becuase the character message has
been combined with the virtual keystroke message. See translation of WM_CHAR.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

int UnionRect(lpDest, lpSrc1, lpSrc2);
    LPRECT lpDest;
    LPRECT lpSrc1;
    LPRECT lpSrc2;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinUnionRect(hab, prclDst, prclSrc1, prclSrc2)
     HAB hab;
     PRECTL prclDst;
     PRECTL prclSrc1;
     PRECTL prclSrc2;

This Windows function stores the union of two rectangles at lpDest. The PM
function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HANDLE UnlockData(Dummy);
       WORD Dummy;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function unlocks the data segment. There is no PM equivalent to
this function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HANDLE UnlockSegment(wSegment);
       WORD wSegment;

Presentation Manager

USHORT DosUnlockSeg(sel)
       SEL sel;    /* selector of segment to be unlocked */

This Windows function unlocks the segment whose segment address is wSegment.
The Presentation Manager function is only applicable for segments allocated
with the DosAllocSeg call and specified as discardable. For these segments,
this call reduces the reference counter, and these segments may be discarded
when the reference counter reaches 0.

See Also:

 DosAllocSeg


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL UnrealizeObject(hBrush);
     HBRUSH hBrush;

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

The Windows function directs GDI to reset the origin of the given brush the
next time it is selected. In Presentation Manager, the reference point or
origin is stored in the hPS and is reset each time the hPS is created. There is
no Presentation Manager equivalent to this function. In Presentation Manager,
brushes are not objects, but the type AREABUNDLE corresponds to the attributes
associated with brushes in Windows.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID UpdateWindow(hWnd);
     HWND hWnd;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinUpdateWindow(hwnd)
     HWND hwnd;

This Windows function notifies application when parts of a window need
redrawing after changes. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent. In
PM, the application may also choose to register the window class with style
CS_SYNCPAINT. This style means that the PM window will immediately receive a
WM_PAINT message as soon as part of the window becomes invalide. Normally,
WM_PAINT messages are combined at the end of the message queue and are only
sent when no more messages remain.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID ValidateRect(hwnd, lpRect);
     HWND hwnd;
     LPRECT lpRect;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinValidateRect(hwnd, prcl, fIncludeChildren)
     HWND hwnd;
     PRECTL prcl;
     BOOL fIncludeChildren;

This Windows function releases from repainting rectangle specified by lpRect
(in client coordinates); if lpRect is NULL, entire window is validated. The
Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

void ValidateRgn(hwnd, hrgn);
     HWND hwnd;
     HRGN hrgn;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinValidateRegion(hwnd, hrgn, fIncludeChildren)
     HWND hwnd;
     HRGN hrgn;
     BOOL fIncludeChildren;

This Windows function release hRgn from repainting; if hRgn is NULL, entire
region is validated. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID WaitMessage();

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinWaitMsg(hab, msgFirst, msgLast)
     HAB hab;
     USHORT msgFirst;
     USHORT msgLast;

This Windows message yields control to other applications when application has
no tasks to perform. The Presentation Manager function is equivalent except
that application has ability to wait for range of messages.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

VOID WaitSoundState();

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows function waits until the play driver enters the state wState.
There is no PM equivalent; sound functions are not supported in PM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

HWND WindowFromPoint(Point);
     POINT Point;

Presentation Manager

HWND WinWindowFromPoint(hwnd, pptl, fChildren, fLock)
     HWND hwnd;
     PPOINTL pptl;
     BOOL fChildren;
     BOOL fLock;

This Windows function identifies the window containing Point (in screen
coordinates). The Presentation Manager function is equivalent if called with
hWndParent set to HWND_DESKTOP and fEnumChild set to FALSE.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

INT WinMain(hInst, hPrev, lpszCmd, cmdShow);
    HANDLE hInst;
    HANDLE hPrev;
    LPSTR lpszCmd;
    INT cmdShow;

Presentation Manager

HAB WinInitialize(fOptions)
    USHORT fOptions;

BOOL WinTerminate(hab)
     HAB hab;

HMQ WinCreateMsgQueue(hab, cmsg)
    HAB hab;
    SHORT cmsg;

BOOL WinDestroyMsgQueue(hmq)
     HMQ hmq;

HHEAP WinCreateHeap(selHeapBase, cbHeap, cbGrow, cbMinDed, cbMaxDed, fOptions)

HHEAP WinDestroyHeap(hHeap)
      HHEAP hHeap;

This function is the main entry point for the application. In Windows, the
application does not need to do much system initialization before registering
and creating its window. In PM, the application must first call WinInitialize
before calling any Presentation Manager functions. The anchor block handle
which is returned is needed for many functions and should be saved. Before the
application terminates, WinTerminate should be called to release resources
associated with the hAB. Before the main window can be created, the application
needs to call WinCreateMsgQueue to create a message queue. Calling this
function with wSizeQueue set to 0 creates a queue with the default size. Before
the application exits, the message queue should be destroyed by the
WinDestroyMsgQueue function. Finally, if the application uses the local heap,
it may be created at this time. In Windows, the local heap was created
automatically. To create a heap with is similar to that in Windows, call
WinCreateHeap with all parameters set to 0, except wOption which is set to
HM_MOVEABLE. Although this creates a heap which is compatible to the Windows
local heap, local heaps have been significantly enhanced in PM and the
application developer may want to investigate them further to take full
advantage of their capabilities.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

BOOL WriteProfileString(lpSection, lpKey, lpString);
     LPSTR lpSection;
     LPSTR lpKey;
     LPSTR lpString;

Presentation Manager

BOOL WinWriteProfileString(hab, pszAppName, pszKeyName, pszValue)
     HAB hab;
     PSZ pszAppName;
     PVOID pszKeyName;
     PVOID pszValue;
p. This Windows function copies character string lpString to the win.ini file;
the string replaces the current string named by lpKey in section lpSection; if
the key or section does not exist, a new key and section are created. the
Presentation Manager function is equivalent. In PM, the initialization file is
presserv.ini.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_ACTIVATEAPP in WIN3

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows message is sent when the window that is being activated belongs to
a different application than the window that previously was active. This
message is not available in PM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_ASKCBFORMATNAME in WIN3

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows message is sent when the clipboard contains a data handle for the
CF_OWNERDISPLAY format to request a copy of the format name. This message is
not available in OS/2. In OS/2, the format names are held in the system atom
table. To refer to the format name, use the function WinQuerySystemAtomTable
and give a handle to the atom table and the atom.

See Also:

 RegisterClipboardFormat


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_CHANGECBCHAIN in WIN3

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows message notifies the first window in the clipboard viewer chain
that a window is being removed from the clipboard viewer chain. In PM, only one
window can be specified as the clipboard viewer; this message is unnecessary.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_CLEAR in WIN3

Presentation Manager

EM_CLEAR

This Windows edit control message deletes the current selection. The PM message
is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_COPY in WIN3

Presentation Manager

EM_COPY
This Windows edit control message sends the current selection to the clipboard
in CF_TEXT format. The PM message is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_CTLCOLOR in WIN3

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows message is sent to the parent window of a predefined control or
message box when the child is about to be drawn; a handle to the brush used to
paint the control's backgroud should be returned. This message is not available
in PM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_CUT in WIN3

Presentation Manager

EM_CUT
This Windows edit control message sends the current selection to the clipboard
in CF_TEXT format, then deletes the selection from the control window. The PM
message is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_DEADCHAR in WIN3

Presentation Manager

WM_CHAR
This Windows message is the result of a translated WM_KEYUP or WM_KEYDOWN
message; it specifies the character value of a dead key. In PM, dead keys are
reported through the WM_CHAR message.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_DEVMODECHANGE in WIN3

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows message is sent to all top-level windows whenever the user changes
device mode settings. This message is not available in PM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_ENDSESSION in WIN3

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows message is sent to tell an application that has responded nonzero
to a WM_QUERYENDSESSION message whether the session is actually being ended. In
PM, this message is not available; applications do not have the ability to
prevent the session from ending.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_ERASEBKGND in WIN3

Presentation Manager

WM_ERASEBACKGROUND
This Windows message occurs when the window background needs erasing; it is
sent in preparation for painting an invalidated region. The OS/2 message is
similar.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_FONTCHANGE in WIN3

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows message occurs when the pool of font resources changes. This
message is not available in PM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_GETDLGCODE in WIN3

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows message is sent by the Windows dialog manager to a control; by
responding to the message, an application can take control of a particular type
of input and process the input itself. This message is not available in PM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_GETTEXT in WIN3

Presentation Manager

WM_QUERYWINDOWPARAMS
This Windows message is used to copy the text corresponding to a window. The PM
message is equivalent; the field cchText in WNDPARAMS should be set to the
maximum buffer size and the field lpszText should point to the buffer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_GETTEXTLENGTH in WIN3

Presentation Manager

WM_QUERYWINDOWPARAMS
This Windows message is used to find the length, in bytes, of the text
associated with a window. The OS/2 message is equivalent; the field cchText of
WNDPARAMS contains the text length.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_INITDIALOG in WIN3

Presentation Manager

WM_INITDLG
This Windows message is sent immediately before a dialog box is displayed. The
return value for the PM message is the opposite of the return value for the
Windows message.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_INITMENUPOPUP in WIN3

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows message is sent immediately before a popup menu is displayed.
There is no equivalent notification in PM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_KEYDOWN in WIN3

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows message is sent when a non-system key is pressed. In PM, the key
down and up events are reported by the system through the WM_CHAR message.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_KEYFIRST in WIN3

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows constant marks the position of the first keyboard message. This
constant is not available in PM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_KEYLAST in WIN3

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows constant marks the position of the first last message. This
constant is not available in PM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_KEYUP in WIN3

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows message is sent when a non-system key is released. In PM, the key
down and up events are reported by the system through the WM_CHAR message.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_KILLFOCUS in WIN3

Presentation Manager

WM_SETFOCUS
This Windows message is sent immediately before a window loses the input focus.
The PM message is sent when the window gets or loses the input focus.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_LBUTTONDOWN in WIN3

Presentation Manager

WM_BUTTON1DOWN
This Windows message occurs when the user presses the left mouse button. The
Presentation Manager function is the same.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_LBUTTONUP in WIN3

Presentation Manager

WM_BUTTON1UP
This Windows message occurs when the user releases the left mouse button. The
Presentation Manager function is the same.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_MBUTTONDOWN in WIN3

Presentation Manager

WM_BUTTON3DOWN
This Windows message occurs when the user presses the middle mouse button. The
Presentation Manager function is the same.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_MBUTTONUP in WIN3

Presentation Manager

WM_BUTTON3UP
This Windows message occurs when the user releases the middle mouse button. The
Presentation Manager function is the same.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_NCACTIVATE in WIN3

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows non-client area message is not available in PM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_NCCALCSIZE in WIN3

Presentation Manager

WM_FORMATFRAME
Windows message is sent when client rect needs to be calculated. PM message is
sent to the frame window in above sitiuation in addition to the general case of
adding, deleting, or changing controls.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_NCCREATE in WIN3

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows non-client area message is not available in PM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_NCDESTROY in WIN3

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows non-client area message is not available in PM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_NCHITTEST in WIN3

Presentation Manager

WM_HITTEST
Windows message is used to determine where mouse is destined for. PM message is
only used to determine how mouse click should be handled (i.e. whether it
should be processed or thrown away).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_NCLBUTTONUP in WIN3

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows non-client area message is not available in PM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_NCMBUTTONUP in WIN3

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows non-client area message is not available in PM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_NCMOUSEMOVE in WIN3

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows non-client area message is not available in PM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_NCPAINT in WIN3

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows non-client area message is not available in PM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_NCRBUTTONUP in WIN3

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows non-client area message is not available in PM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_PASTE in WIN3

Presentation Manager

EM_PASTE
This Windows edit control message inserts the data from the clipboard into the
control window at the current cursor position. The PM message is equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_QUERYENDSESSION in WIN3

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows message occurs when the user invokes the "End Session" command;
the default action is to return TRUE. In OS/2, this message is not available;
applications do not have the ability to prevent the session from ending.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_QUERYOPEN in WIN3

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows message is sent to an icon when the user is requesting that is be
opened; returning zero prevents the icon from being opened. This message is not
available in PM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_RBUTTONDOWN in WIN3

Presentation Manager

WM_BUTTON2DOWN
This Windows message occurs when the user presses the right mouse button. The
Presentation Manager function is the same.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_RBUTTONUP in WIN3

Presentation Manager

WM_BUTTON2UP
This Windows message occurs when the user releases the right mouse button. The
Presentation Manager function is the same.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_SETREDRAW in WIN3

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows message sets or clears the redraw flag, which determines whether
updates to a control are displayed. In PM, the application can call
WinEnableWindowUpdate with the control handle and FALSE to turn redraw off. To
turn the redraw on, the application can call this function with TRUE or
WinShowWindow which forces a redraw.

See Also:

 WinEnableWindowUpdate WinShowWindow


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_SETTEXT in WIN3

Presentation Manager

WM_SETWINDOWPARAMS
This Windows message is used to set the text of a window. The PM message is
equivalent; the field cchText in WNDPARAMS should contain the text length and
the field lpszText should point to the text buffer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_SETVISIBLE in WIN3

Presentation Manager

WM_SHOW
This Windows message is sent immediately before a window is made visible. The
PM message is sent when the window is shown.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_SHOWWINDOW in WIN3

Presentation Manager

WM_SHOW
This Windows message is sent whenever a window is to be hidden or shown;
DefWindowProc hides or shows the window as specified. The PM message is
equivalent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_SYSCHAR in WIN3

Presentation Manager

WM_CHAR
This Windows message is the result of translating a WM_SYSKEYUP or
WM_SYSKEYDOWN message. In PM, the WM_CHAR message reports when a system key has
been depressed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_SYSDEADCHAR in WIN3

Presentation Manager

WM_CHAR
This Windows message is the result of a translated WM_SYSKEYUP or WM_SYSKEYDOWN
message; it specifies the character value of a dead key. In PM, the WM_CHAR
message reports when a system dead key has been pressed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_SYSKEYUP in WIN3

Presentation Manager

WM_CHAR
This Windows message occurs whenever the user releases a key that was pressed
while the ALT key was held down. In PM, the WM_CHAR message reports when a
system key has been pressed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_TIMECHANGE in WIN3

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This Windows message occurs when an application makes a change to the system
time. This message is not available in PM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows

WM_WININICHANGE in WIN3

Presentation Manager

No equivalent

This message occurs when the Windows initialization file (WIN.INI) changes.
This message is not available in PM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

/* Font structure for Vio/GpiCreateLogFont */
typedef struct _FATTRS {    /* fat */
    USHORT  usRecordLength;
    USHORT  fsSelection;
    LONG    lMatch;
    CHAR    szFacename[FACESIZE];
    USHORT  idRegistry;
    USHORT  usCodePage;
    LONG    lMaxBaselineExt;
    LONG    lAveCharWidth;
    USHORT  fsType;
    USHORT  fsFontUse;
} FATTRS;
typedef FATTRS far *PFATTRS;


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

/* Font metrics returned by GpiQueryFonts and others */
typedef struct _FONTMETRICS { /* fm */
    CHAR    szFamilyname[FACESIZE];
    CHAR    szFacename[FACESIZE];
    USHORT  idRegistry;
    USHORT  usCodePage;
    LONG    lEmHeight;
    LONG    lXHeight;
    LONG    lMaxAscender;
    LONG    lMaxDescender;
    LONG    lLowerCaseAscent;
    LONG    lLowerCaseDescent;
    LONG    lInternalLeading;
    LONG    lExternalLeading;
    LONG    lAveCharWidth;
    LONG    lMaxCharInc;
    LONG    lEmInc;
    LONG    lMaxBaselineExt;
    SHORT   sCharSlope;
    SHORT   sInlineDir;
    SHORT   sCharRot;
    USHORT  usWeightClass;
    USHORT  usWidthClass;
    SHORT   sXDeviceRes;
    SHORT   sYDeviceRes;
    SHORT   sFirstChar;
    SHORT   sLastChar;
    SHORT   sDefaultChar;
    SHORT   sBreakChar;
    SHORT   sNominalPointSize;
    SHORT   sMinimumPointSize;
    SHORT   sMaximumPointSize;
    USHORT  fsType;
    USHORT  fsDefn;
    USHORT  fsSelection;
    USHORT  fsCapabilities;
    LONG    lSubscriptXSize;
    LONG    lSubscriptYSize;
    LONG    lSubscriptXOffset;
    LONG    lSubscriptYOffset;
    LONG    lSuperscriptXSize;
    LONG    lSuperscriptYSize;
    LONG    lSuperscriptXOffset;
    LONG    lSuperscriptYOffset;
    LONG    lUnderscoreSize;
    LONG    lUnderscorePosition;
    LONG    lStrikeoutSize;
    LONG    lStrikeoutPosition;
    SHORT   sKerningPairs;
    SHORT   sFamilyClass;
    LONG    lMatch;
} FONTMETRICS;
typedef FONTMETRICS far *PFONTMETRICS;


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

typedef struct _RECTL {     /* rcl */
    LONG    xLeft;
    LONG    yBottom;
    LONG    xRight;
    LONG    yTop;
} RECTL;
typedef RECTL FAR  *PRECTL;
typedef RECTL near *NPRECTL;